Briefly read the powerpoint and then answer the quiz
1). When discussing the history of photography, the student should be able to:
1.1 Explain how the early ideas for photography came about.
1.2 Name the earliest form of camera.
1.3 Identify the key individuals who advanced the development of photography.
1.4 Identify the significant developments in the history of photography.
2). When discussing the fundamental concepts of digital photography, the student should be able to:
2.1 Explain the five basic stages of image production.
2.2 Define pixel and explain its function.
2.3 Define resolution and explain its significance for digital photography.
2.4 Define pixelation.
2.5 Explain factors that determine photo quality.
IntroductIon to
photography
T i p s a n d T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r p h o T o g r a p h y
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
• p h o T o g r a p h y i s a s c i e n c e , b e c a u s e
T h e r e a r e b a s i c p r i n c i p l e s o f
p h y s i c s T h a T g o v e r n s u c c e s s
• p h o T o g r a p h y i s a r T b e c a u s e i T s
b e a u T y i s s u b j e c T i v e
photography
J g r e e k f o r “ p a i n T i n g w i T h l i g h T ”
J c a n b e c o n s i d e r e d b o T h a n a r T
a n d a s c i e n c e
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
f i r s T p h o T o g r a p h T a k e n b y j o s e p h n i c é p h o r e n i é p c e i n f r a n c e .
i n 1 8 2 6 , o n a b i T u m e n c o a T e d a l u m i n u m p l a T e
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
ExposurE
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
stops
J a d i f f e r e n c e o f 1 s T o p i s a
d o u b l i n g o r h a l v i n g o f T h e
l i g h T m a k i n g T h e i m a g e
J T h e a m o u n T o f l i g h T T h a T s T r i k e s
T h e f i l m / c h i p i s m e a s u r e d i n s T o p s
a n d i s a l s o k n o w n a s e x p o s u r e
v a l u e ( e v )
J a s T o p i s u s e d T o m e a s u r e T h e
d i f f e r e n c e s i n e v o f a p e r T u r e s ,
s h u T T e r s p e e d s a n d f i l m s p e e d s
J “ f a s T ” m e a n s T h e c a m e r a c a n
e x p o s e a p h o T o q u i c k l y
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
FIlm spEEd
Film
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
FIlm spEEd
J i T i s m e a s u r e d i n v a l u e s u s i n g a n
i n T e r n a T i o n a l o r g a n i z a T i o n s o f
s T a n d a r d s ( i s o ) n u m b e r . u s e d T o b e
m e a s u r e d i n a m e r i c a n s T a n d a r d s
a s s o c i a T i o n s ( a s a ) n u m b e r s
J f i l m s p e e d i s a m e a s u r e o f T h e
s e n s i T i v i T y o f T h e f i l m o r s e n s o r
i n a c a m e r a .
J i s o n u m b e r s a r e u s e d i n b o T h
f i l m a n d d i g i T a l c a m e r a s
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
FIlm spEEd
J i s o n u m b e r s a r e l i n e a r i n T h e i r
r e l a T i o n s h i p
J i s o n u m b e r s c o m e i n a w i d e
r a n g e , b u T s T a n d a r d n u m b e r s
a r e 5 0 , 1 0 0 , 2 0 0 , 4 0 0 , 8 0 0 , 1 6 0 0 ,
a n d 3 2 0 0
J T h e h i g h e r T h e i s o n u m b e r , T h e
m o r e s e n s i T i v e T h e f i l m / s e n s o r a n d
a l s o T h e m o r e n o i s e o r g r a i n i n
T h e i m a g e
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
FIlm spEEd
l o w i s o h i g h i s o
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
shuttEr spEEd
Shutter
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
shuttEr spEEd
J s h u T T e r s p e e d i s m e a s u r e d i n
f r a c T i o n s o f s e c o n d s
J c o n T r o l s T h e a m o u n T o f T i m e
T h e s h u T T e r o r c u r T a i n i s o p e n
J d e p e n d i n g o n T h e c a m e r a , i T m a y
s h o w T h e s h u T T e r s p e e d w i T h o u T
T h e n u m e r a T o r , i . e . 2 5 0 i n s T e a d o f
1 / 2 5 0
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
shuttEr spEEd
J a d o u b l i n g o r h a l v i n g o f T h e
T i m e v a l u e (Tv) r e p r e s e n T s o n e
s T o p o f e v
J c o m m o n s h u T T e r s p e e d s a r e
1 , 1 / 2 , 1 / 4 , 1 / 8 , 1 / 1 5 , 1 / 3 0 , 1 / 6 0 ,
1 / 1 2 5 , 1 / 2 5 0 , 1 / 5 0 0 , 1 / 1 0 0 0
J a
f a s T s h u T T e r s p e e d
f r e e z e s T h e
a c T i o n o f a n i m a g e
J c o n v e r s e l y , a s l o w s h u T T e r s p e e d
b l u r s T h e a c T i o n o f a n i m a g e
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
shuttEr spEEd
s l o w s h u T T e r s p e e d
f a s T s h u T T e r s p e e d
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
s l o w s h u T T e r s p e e d
f a s T s h u T T e r s p e e d
shuttEr spEEd
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
apErturE
Aperture
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
apErturE
J T h e l a r g e r T h e h o l e , T h e m o r e
l i g h T T h a T e n T e r s T h e c a m e r a
i n a g i v e n T i m e
J a p e r T u r e i s T h e s i z e o f T h e h o l e
i n T h e d i a p h r a g m T h a T a l l o w s
l i g h T i n T o T h e c a m e r a
J a p e r T u r e v a l u e s (av) a r e
m e a s u r e d u s i n g f – s T o p s ,
s h o w n a s f / # ( i . e . f / 1 6 )
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
apErturE
J T h e i m a g e a T l e f T
s h o w s c o m m o n
f – s T o p v a l u e s a n d
h o w T h e y a p p e a r
J a c h a n g e o f 1 f – s T o p
d o u b l e s o r h a l v e s
T h e l i g h T e n T e r i n g
T h e c a m e r a
J s m a l l e r f – n u m b e r s
r e p r e s e n T w i d e r
a p e r T u r e s , a n d
l a r g e r f – n u m b e r s a r e
s m a l l e r a p e r T u r e s
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
apErturE
J T h e w i d e r T h e a p e r T u r e , T h e
m o r e s h a l l o w T h e d e p T h o f
f i e l d , a n d v i c e v e r s a
J T h e av c o n T r o l s T h e a m o u n T o f
d e p T h o f f i e l d i n a n i m a g e
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
av & tv togEthEr
J c o n v e r s e l y , T h e s l o w e r T h e
s h u T T e r s p e e d , T h e s m a l l e r T h e
a p e r T u r e n e e d s T o b e
J T h e w i d e r T h e a p e r T u r e u s e d ,
T h e l e s s T i m e – i . e . T h e f a s T e r
s h u T T e r s p e e d – i s n e e d e d T o
p r o p e r l y e x p o s e T h e i m a g e
J f o r a n y i m a g e , T h e r e a r e a
n u m b e r o f c o m b i n a T i o n s T h a T
w i l l m a k e a c o r r e c T e x p o s u r e
f-s top 1.4 2 2.8 4 5.6 8 11 16
Shutter
s peed
1
1000
1
500
1
250
1
125
1
60
1
30
1
15
1
8
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
lIghtIng
J o n e o f T h e s k i l l s T h a T
s e p a r a T e s p h o T o g r a p h e r s
f r o m s n a p s h o o T e r s i s T h e
a b i l i T y T o s o l v e l i g h T i n g
p r o b l e m s
J l i g h T i s T h e e s s e n T i a l
i n g r e d i e n T o f p h o T o s
J T h e r e a r e 2 p r i m a r y f a c T o r s
T o c o n s i d e r f o r l i g h T :
d i r e c T i o n a n d c o l o u r
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
lIghtIng – dIrEctIon
J T h e d i r e c T i o n T h e l i g h T c o m e s
f r o m c a n m a k e T h e i m a g e s e e m
f l a T o r 3 – d i m e n s i o n a l
J f r o n T l i g h T i n g i s e a s y T o
p h o T o g r a p h , b u T i m a g e s a r e
g e n e r a l l y f l a T
J T o p l i g h T i n g , s u c h a s f r o m T h e
s u n o v e r h e a d , a l s o m a k e s T h e
i m a g e f l a T , a n d s h a d o w s a r e
s h o r T a n d d a r k
J s i d e l i g h T i n g w i l l e m p h a s i z e
T e x T u r e a n d c o n T o u r s , a n d
c r e a T e l o n g s h a d o w s
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
lIghtIng – dIrEctIon
f r o n T l i g h T i n g
T o p l i g h T i n g
s i d e l i g h T i n g
b o T T o m l i g h T i n g
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
lIghtIng – colour
J T h e c o l o u r o f l i g h T i s
m e a s u r e d b y T e m p e r a T u r e
i n k e l v i n ( ° k )
J T h e c o l o u r o f n a T u r a l l i g h T
c h a n g e s T h r o u g h T h e d a y
J h u m a n s r e s p o n d p s y c h o l o g i c a l l y
T o d i f f e r e n T c o l o u r s , T h e r e f o r e
T h e c o l o u r o f a p h o T o w i l l
a f f e c T e m o T i o n a l r e s p o n s e s
J l i g h T T h a T i s i n T h e r e d s , o r a n g e s
a n d y e l l o w s i s s a i d T o b e “ w a r m ” .
c o n v e r s e l y , “ c o o l ” l i g h T i s b l u e
i n T o n e
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
w a r m l i g h T i n g c o o l l i g h T i n g
lIghtIng – colour
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
lIghtIng – colour
J w h e n T a k i n g a p h o T o w i T h
a d i g i T a l c a m e r a , T h e w h i T e
b a l a n c e s e T T i n g o f a c a m e r a
w i l l a f f e c T T h e c o l o u r c a s T
o f T h e i m a g e , b a l a n c i n g T h e
l i g h T i n g o f T h e s u b j e c T
J T y p i c a l w h i T e b a l a n c e s e T T i n g s
o f a c a m e r a i n c l u d e : T u n g s T e n ,
f l o r e s c e n T , s h a d e , s u n n y ,
c l o u d y
,
f l a s h , a u T o a n d m a n u a l
J f i l T e r s c a n a l s o b e u s e d T o
a f f e c T T h e c o l o u r o f l i g h T i n
T h e i m a g e
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
lIghtIng – colour
f l a s h / m i d – d a y
f l o r e s c e n T
T u n g s T e n
c l o u d y
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
camEra shootIng modEs
J a l l d i g i T a l c a m e r a s h a v e
v a r i o u s m o d e s f o r s h o o T i n g
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
camEra shootIng modEs
J s c e n e m o d e s T a k e T h e g u e s s w o r k
o u T o f s e T T i n g p r o p e r e x p o s u r e
• m o d e s i n c l u d e p r e s e T s f o r T a k i n g
p h o T o s i n a v a r i e T y o f s e T T i n g s
s u c h a s a T n i g h T , o n T h e b e a c h o r
s n o w , o r f o r p o r T r a i T s
• a g r e a T e r u n d e r s T a n d i n g o f
c a m e r a s e T T i n g s i s r e q u i r e d
J m a n u a l m o d e s a l l o w f o r m o r e
c r e a T i v e c o n T r o l
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
composItIon
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
lEnsEs
J T h e l e n g T h o f a l e n s i s m e a s u r e d
i n m i l l i m e T r e s (mm), o r e q u i v a l e n T
f o r p o i n T – a n d – s h o o T c a m e r a s
J l o w n u m b e r s a r e c o n s i d e r e d
w i d e l e n s e s , w h i l e h i g h n u m b e r s
a r e c o n s i d e r e d l o n g l e n s e s
J h u m a n e y e s i g h T i s e q u i v a l e n T T o
a b o u T 5 0 m m
• a w i d e l e n s , i . e . , 1 8 mm, i s u s e f u l f o r
l a n d s c a p e p h o T o s
• a l o n g l e n s , i . e . , 3 0 0 mm, i s u s e f u l
f o r c l o s e – u p s o f w i l d l i f e
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
dEpth oF FIEld
J d e p T h o f f i e l d (dof) i s T h e “ z o n e o f
a c c e p T a b l e s h a r p n e s s ”
J d o f i s c o n T r o l l e d b y a p e r T u r e
a n d d i s T a n c e T o s u b j e c T
• T h e c l o s e r T h e s u b j e c T ,
T h e s m a l l e r T h e dof
• T h e w i d e r T h e a p e r T u r e ,
T h e s m a l l e r T h e dof
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
dEpth oF FIEld
d i s T a n T – d e e p d o f c l o s e – s h a l l o w d o f
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
dEpth oF FIEld
s m a l l a p e r T u r e – d e e p d o f l a r g e a p e r T u r e – s h a l l o w d o f
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
thE rulE oF thIrds
J T h e “ r u l e o f T h i r d s ” s T a T e s T h a T
w h e n c o m p o s i n g y o u r p h o T o ,
p l a c e T h e c e n T r e o f i n T e r e s T a T a
j u n c T i o n o f T h e l i n e s T h a T T r i s e c T
T h e i m a g e
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
thE rulE oF thIrds
J a l s o , w h e n
c o m p o s i n g
l a n d s c a p e
s h o T s , T h e
h o r i z o n l i n e
s h o u l d b e o n
o n e o f T h e
i n T e r s e c T i n g
l i n e s
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
FramIng
J f r a m i n g i s u s i n g a f o r e g r o u n d
o b j e c T T o “ f r a m e ” T h e s u b j e c T o f
T h e p h o T o
J T h e f r a m e s h o u l d b e a p p r o p r i a T e
T o T h e s u b j e c T
J T h e f r a m e s h o u l d h a v e i T s o w n
a e s T h e T i c v a l u e
J r e n d e r T h e f r a m e s h a r p l y ,
o r b l u r i T a w a y
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
FramIng
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
FIll thE FramE
I f y o u r p I c t u r e s a r e n ’ t g o o d
e n o u g h , y o u ’ r e n o t c l o s e
e n o u g h .
r o b e r T c a p a , w o r l d w a r i i p h o T o j o u r n a l i s T
J i f y o u c a n ’ T g e T c l o s e r T o y o u r
s u b j e c T , u s e a l o n g e r l e n s T o f i l l
T h e f r a m e
J f i l l i n g T h e f r a m e r e f e r s T o T h e
p r i m a r y s u b j e c T , n o T e x T r a n e o u s
o b j e c T s
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
FIll thE FramE
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
portraIt tEchnIquEs
J T h e s u b j e c T s h o u l d f a c e i n T o
T h e i m a g e s o T h a T T h e r e i s m o r e
s p a c e i n f r o n T T h a n b e h i n d
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
portraIt tEchnIquEs
J s u b j e c T s
u s u a l l y
s h o u l d n ’ T
b e s q u a r e
o n T o T h e
c a m e r a
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
landscapEs
J T r y T o
i n c l u d e
a n o b j e c T
T o c r e a T e
s e n s e o f
s c a l e
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
landscapEs
J h o r i z o n l i n e s h o u l d b e p l a c e d
T o e m p h a s i z e e i T h e r T h e s k y o r
T h e l a n d
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
landscapEs
J h o r i z o n l i n e s h o u l d b e p l a c e d
T o e m p h a s i z e e i T h e r T h e s k y o r
T h e l a n d
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
landscapEs
J f o c u s o n a d e T a i l w i T h i n T h e
s c e n e T o a d d i n T e r e s T
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
landscapEs
J T r y T o u s e a l i n e T h a T w i l l l e a d
T h e v i e w e r s e y e i n T o T h e p i c T u r e
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
FInal tIp
J T h e r e a r e n o r u l e s i n
p h o T o g r a p h y
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
J T h e s u b j e c T s h o u l d f a c e i n T o
T h e i m a g e s o T h a T T h e r e i s m o r e
s p a c e i n f r o n T T h a n b e h i n d
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
J s u b j e c T s
u s u a l l y
s h o u l d n ’ T
b e s q u a r e
o n T o T h e
c a m e r a
T i p s a n d
T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r
p h o T o g r a p h y
J h o r i z o n l i n e s h o u l d b e p l a c e d
T o e m p h a s i z e e i T h e r T h e s k y o r
T h e l a n d
thE End
T i p s a n d T e c h n i q u e s
f o r b e T T e r p h o T o g r a p h y
D I G I T A L M E D I A E – 1 0
E X P O S I N G D I G I T A L P H O T O G R A P H Y
W E E K 8 : D I G I T A L C A M E R A S
D A N A R M E N D A R I Z D A N A L L A N @ C S . H A R V A R D . E D U
mailto:danallan@cs.harvard.edu
A S S I G N M E N T R E M I N D E R S
Project 3: due tonight (11:59PM)
Problem Set 4: due next Thursday, October 29
Project 4: released today
D Y N A M I C R A N G E
D I G I T A L C A M E R A S
Pixel (“Bucket”)
Photons
(Light)
Collected Light
S I M P L I F I E D D Y N A M I C R A N G E C A L C U L A T I O N
Dynamic Range =
Biggest signal (full “bucket”)
Smallest detectable signal
D Y N A M I C R A N G E
I N S C E N E S
2013: 1/250s, f/5.6, ISO 200, -1/3EV, 28mm
D I G I T A L C A M E R A S
S E N S O R S I Z E S
adapted from wikipedia.org by MarcusGR
http://
wikipedia.org
S E N S O R S I Z E S
W H A T A R E T H E P I X E L S I Z E S ?
24mm
16mm
7mm
5mm
APS-C, 6MP 1/2.5”, 6MP
33mm Crop
80mm 33mm & moved
Images from http://www.dpreview.com/learn/?/Glossary/Optical/Perspective_01.htm
http://www.dpreview.com/learn/?/Glossary/Optical/Perspective_01.htm
S E N S O R S I Z E S
F O C A L L E N G T H A N D P E R S P E C T I V E
2013: 1/320s, f/5.6, ISO 200, +1EV, 35mm
S E N S O R S I Z E S
F O C A L L E N G T H A N D P E R S P E C T I V E
2013: 1/320s, f/5.6, ISO 200, +1EV, 35mm
S E N S O R S I Z E S
F O C A L L E N G T H A N D P E R S P E C T I V E
S E N S O R S I Z E S
S A M E S I Z E P I X E L S , S T I L L D A R K ?
24mm
16mm
7mm
5mm
APS-C, 6MP 1/2.5”, 0.5MP
S E N S O R S I Z E
D E P T H O F F I E L D
S E N S O R S I Z E S
P I X E L S I Z E
S I M P L I F I E D D Y N A M I C R A N G E C A L C U L A T I O N
Dynamic Range =
Biggest signal (full “bucket”)
Smallest detectable signal
D Y N A M I C R A N G E
F U L L – W E L L C A P A C I T Y O F P I X E L S A T V A R I O U S I S O V A L U E S
100 200 400 800
D I G I T A L C A M E R A S
S E N S O R T Y P E S
A C T I V E P I X E L S E N S O R S P A S S I V E P I X E L S E N S O R S
C M O S C C D
S E N S O R S
A C T I V E P I X E L
(Light)
wikimedia.org
http://wikimedia.org
P I X E L L A Y E R S
M I C R O L E N S
Image from Eastman Kodak, from http://www.luminous-landscape.com/essays/kodak-iss.shtml
P I X E L L A Y E R S
C O L O R F I L T E R A R R A Y S
wikipedia.org
Incoming light
Filter layer
Sensor array
http://wikipedia.org
D I G I T A L M E D I A E – 1 0
E X P O S I N G D I G I T A L P H O T O G R A P H Y
W E E K 8 : D I G I T A L C A M E R A S
D A N A R M E N D A R I Z D A N A L L A N @ C S . H A R V A R D . E D U
mailto:danallan@cs.harvard.edu
D I G I T A L M E D I A E – 1 0
E X P O S I N G D I G I T A L P H O T O G R A P H Y
W E E K 9 : D I G I T A L C A M E R A S ( C O N T I N U E D )
D A N A R M E N D A R I Z D A N A L L A N @ C S . H A R V A R D . E D U
mailto:danallan@cs.harvard.edu
A S S I G N M E N T R E M I N D E R S
Problem Set 4: due tonight (11:59PM)
Project 4: due next Thursday, November 5
Problem Set 5: released today, due November 12
S E N S O R S I Z E S
F O C A L L E N G T H A N D P E R S P E C T I V E
2013: 1/320s, f/5.6, ISO 200, +1EV, 35mm
S E N S O R S I Z E S
F O C A L L E N G T H A N D P E R S P E C T I V E
2013: 1/320s, f/5.6, ISO 200, +1EV, 35mm
S E N S O R S I Z E
D E P T H O F F I E L D
D Y N A M I C R A N G E
F U L L – W E L L C A P A C I T Y O F P I X E L S A T V A R I O U S I S O V A L U E S
100 200 400 800
D I G I T A L C A M E R A S
S E N S O R T Y P E S
A C T I V E P I X E L S E N S O R S P A S S I V E P I X E L S E N S O R S
C M O S C C D
S E N S O R S I Z E S
P I X E L S I Z E
S E N S O R S
A C T I V E P I X E L
(Light)
wikimedia.org
http://wikimedia.org
P I X E L L A Y E R S
M I C R O L E N S
Image from Eastman Kodak, from http://www.luminous-landscape.com/essays/kodak-iss.shtml
P I X E L L A Y E R S
C O L O R F I L T E R A R R A Y S
wikipedia.org
Incoming light
Filter layer
Sensor array
http://wikipedia.org
C O L O R F I L T E R A R R A Y S
B A Y E R F I L T E R
adapted from Cburnett’s image from wikipedia.org
http://wikipedia.org
C O L O R F I L T E R A R R A Y S
D E M O S A I C I N G
cambridgeincolour.com
http://cambridgeincolour.com
S E N S O R S
F O V E O N X 3
Foveon X3 Sensor from wikipedia.org
http://wikipedia.org
S E N S O R S
F O V E O N X 3
Image adapted from http://www.ddisoftware.com/sd14-5d/
http://www.ddisoftware.com/sd14-5d/
S E N S O R S
L O W – P A S S ( A N T I – A L I A S I N G ) F I L T E R
Images adapted from http://www.ddisoftware.com/reviews/sd9-v-bayer/
http://www.ddisoftware.com/reviews/sd9-v-bayer/
D Y N A M I C R A N G E
L O W C O N T R A S T A L L O W S H I G H R A N G E
2014: 1/13s, f/4, ISO 200, 76mm
D Y N A M I C R A N G E
C O N T R A S T
2014: 1/13s, f/4, ISO 200, 76mm
D Y N A M I C R A N G E
R I S K S O F H I G H C O N T R A S T
2014: 1/13s, f/4, ISO 200, 76mm
B I T S & B Y T E S
A R E F R E S H E R
B I T 0 O R 1
B Y T E 8 B I T S
D I G I T A L C A M E R A S
A N A L O G T O D I G I T A L C O N V E R T E R ( A D C )
0.00 V
1.00 V
0.55 V
Analog Sensor 8-bit Sampling
255
14
0
0
Digital Output
10001100
D I G I T A L C A M E R A S
A N A L O G T O D I G I T A L C O N V E R T E R ( A D C )
0.00 V
1.00 V
0.55 V
Analog Sensor 12-bit Sampling
4095
2252
0
Digital Output
100011001100
D I G I T A L C A M E R A S
S E N S O R L I N E A R I T Y
409520481024512…
1 stop1 stop1 stop…
D I G I T A L C A M E R A S
T O N E C U R V E
Image from http://www.covingtoninnovations.com/dslr/Curves.html
http://www.covingtoninnovations.com/dslr/Curves.html
D I G I T A L C A M E R A S
R A W J P E G
B I T D E P T H 1 0 – , 1 2 – , 1 4 – B I T 8 – B I T
T O N E C U R V E N O T A P P L I E D A P P L I E D
W H I T E B A L A N C E N O T S E T S E T
C O M P R E S S I O N L O S S L E S S
L O S S Y
P O R T A B I L I T Y N O N S T A N D A R D S T A N D A R D
P O S T – P R O C E S S I N G R E Q U I R E D O P T I O N A L
R A W V S J P E G
D I G I T A L C A M E R A S
“ E X P O S E T O T H E R I G H T ”
Image from http://www.guillermoluijk.com/tutorial/dcraw/index_en.htm
http://www.guillermoluijk.com/tutorial/dcraw/index_en.htm
D I G I T A L M E D I A E – 1 0
E X P O S I N G D I G I T A L P H O T O G R A P H Y
W E E K 9 : D I G I T A L C A M E R A S ( C O N T I N U E D )
D A N A R M E N D A R I Z D A N A L L A N @ C S . H A R V A R D . E D U
mailto:danallan@cs.harvard.edu
Fourth Edition
A Short Course in
HY
AN INTRODUCT I 。 N TO P H 。 TOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUE
币2比
笔
霞a
e
A
W
忽
3
ι
E
Barbara London Jim Stone
@民arson
Publish盯: Roch Wilkofsky
Editorial Assistant: Kaylee Navarra
Product M盯kecing Manag盯 Nicholas Bole
Executive Field Marketing Manager: Wendy Albert
Managing Content Produc盯 Donna DeBenedictis
Project Coordina口on, T四E Design, and Electronic Page
Makeup: SPi G lobal
Cover Designer: Lumina Datamat1cs
Cover Image: Adam Ekberg, Va印刷,s 011 a Froz;en La岭, 2005.
C> Adam Ekberg
Manufacturing Buyer: Mary Ann G lo riande
Printer/ Binder: LSCC-Kendallville
Cover Printer: Phoenix Color
Acknowledgmen臼 of th ird-par ty content appear on the appropriate page in the text o r on page 228, which const,ru四s an
extension of this copyright page.
Frontispiece: Edward Bateman, Landscape Photographer, 2012
Opposite page: Teun Hocks, Untitled, 2000. Courtesy of the ar tist a nd Torch Gallery, Amsterdam
PEARSON and ALWAYS LEARNING are exclusive trademar ks owned by Pearson Education, Inc. or its affiliates in the United
States and/ or oth盯countries
Un less otherwise indicated h盯ein, any th ird-party t rademarks that may appear in this work a re the property of their respec口ve
own盯S and any references to third-party trademarks, logos, o r other trade dress are for demonstrative o r descriptive pu叩oses
on ly. Such references are not intended co imply any sponsorship, endorsement, autho口zation, or promotion of Pearson’s prod-
UC臼 by the owners of such marks, or any relationship between the own盯and Pearson Education, Inc., or its 对’f,liates, authors,
license凹, or distributors
Library of Congress Ca时oging-in-Publication Data
London, Barbara I Stone, J,m
A short course in photography. D igital an introduction to photograph ic technique / Bar bara London, Jim Stone
Fourth edition. I Upper Saddle River, New J ersey Pearson Educa口on, Inc., (2018)
LCCN 2017047540 I ISBN 9780134525815 I ISBN 0134525817
LCSH: Photography…Digital techniques…Textbooks. I Image processing…Digital techniques…T四tbooks
LCCTR267 .L647 20 18 I DOC 771-位23
Copyright © 2019, 20 15, 2012 by Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Printed in the United States of America Th,s
publication is protected by copyright, and permission should be obtained from the publisher prio r to any proh ib ited repro-
duction, storage in a retrieval system, or 盯·ansmission in any form o r by any me.ans, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording, or otherwise For info rmation regarding permi臼ions, request fo rms and the appropriate contac臼within the Pe.arson
Education G lobal Rights & Permissions Deparε盯Y、ent, p lease v’s’E飞叭ww.pe缸soned com/per盯T、 s阳,sfφ
1 18
@民梢。n
Student Edi口on
ISBN 10: 0-13-452581-7
ISBN 13: 978-0 -13-452581-5
A La Carte Ed,口on
ISBN 10: 0-13-452603-1
ISBN 13: 978-0 -13-452603-4
Instructor’s Review Copy.
ISBN 10: 0-13-452601-5
ISBN 13: 978-0 -13-452601-0
曰 』~
Contents
iv CONT ENT S
Preface vii
I Camerα1111 2
Ge忧ing Star晦d Getting y。ur camera read y 4 • Focusing an d se忧ing t he exposure
6 • Exposure readout 7 • Exp。sing images 8 • What will you ph悦。graph? 9
• Types 。f Ca meras Film cameras 10 • Digital cameras 1 2 • Basic Camera
c。ntrols 14 • M。re ab。utCamera c。ntrols 1 6 • Inside a d igital single-lens
re自由came甩 17 • Shutter Speed A俄cts light a nd m。tion 18 • Use it creatively
20 • Apertt』re Affects light a nd de pt h 。f fi eld 22 • Use it creat ively 24 •
Sh utter Speed and Aperture Blur vs. depth o f field 26 • Getting the Most from
y。ur Camera and l ens 28
2 L ens 9 30
Lens Focal Length The basic di民rence between lenses 32 • Normal F民d
Lengtl、 The m。st like hu man visi。n 34 • Long Focal Lengtl、 Telephoto
lenses 36 • Short Focal Len萨 Wide-angle lenses 38 • Zoom, Maao, and
Fisheye Lens国 40 • Focus and Depth of Field 42 • Automatic F。cus 43
• Dep由 of Field Controll ing sharpness in a ph。tograph 44 • M。陀 about
Depth 。f Field H。wto preview it 46 • Perspective H。wa photograph sh。WS
depth 48 • Lens Attachments Cl。se-ups and fi l回归 50
3 Li~ht αnd E x posure I 52
Sensors and Pixels 54 • Pixels and Resoluti。n 55 • Col。r in Phot。罗叩hy
c。lor Systems 56 • Col。r Cha racteristics 57 • White Balan国 58 • Using
Hist。grams 60 • Exp。sure Meters W ha t different types do 62 • How to cal-
cula te and a句ust a n exposure manua lly 64 • Overrid ing an Automatic Exp。-
sure Camera 66 • Making an Exp。sure of an Average Scene 68 • Exp。sing
Scenes that are Lighter or Darker than Average 70 • Backlighting 72 •
Exposing Scenes with High Contrast 73 • H DR Hig h dyna m ic ra nge 74
4 Di互itαl Workplαce Bαsics ( 76
Equipment and Materials You’ II N时 78 • Pictures Are Files 80 • 时时
Col。r Modes, gam uts, spaces, and profil es 82 • Channels 83 • Cal ib阻ting for
accu阻cy 84 • Working wi出 Camera Raw 85 • Stay organized Setting up a
Worl
If others have alrea命photographedyour subject,
how will your pictures bed伊rent? If you magnifj,
伪e meaningyour images have for you, will you also
increase the impact they have on others? Read on.
l川…叫川t photog吵nd
would lik e to learn, or if you want to make better p ictures than
the ones you are maki n g now, A Short Cot4rse in Photograp抄
D怨“I will h e lp you. T his book is modeled after the widely used
fi lm-and-dark room edi tion of A Short Co1’r咒 in Photograp妙, but
presents the medium in its cu rrent, e lectronic form.
We present her毡,mdep巾, the basic E旺hn iques of photography:
1 H。w to get a good四posure
1 How to a句ust the focus , s hutt er speed, and aperture (the
size of the lens openin g) to produ ce the results you want
1 Howton-血1sferyOL町 pictures to a computer血1dmal也sure
they缸e organized and safe fro m loss
1 How to use com p uter software to ma!忧your ph。tographs
look t h eir best
Alm ost all of today’s cameras i ncorp。rate automa tic fea tu res,
b ut t hat doesn’t mean t hat t h ey a u tomatically produ ce t he re-
s ults you want. Th is edition of A Sh。时 Courτe in Photograp抄 de
votes special atten tion to:
1 Au tomatic focus a n d a u tomatic exposu re-what they do
and, part icularly, h ow to override them when it is better to
adj us t the camera man ually
Some of t h e book’s h ighligh ts inclu de:
1 Getting Started If y口U缸e brand new to photography, this
section w让l walk you through 出e first s teps of selecting and
ins talling a mem01yαrd, settin g the camera’s menu options,
focus ing sh盯ply, adjusting the四posL町e, and making your
自rst piαures. S四pag臼4-9.
1 Projects. T h ese projects are designed to help develop your
tech n ical and expressive skills. See page 136 or 155.
1 Making Bett er Prints. This includes informatio n abou t how
to adjust your p h otographs with image咱diting sofn,.咀re
(pages 92- 11 1), select ink an d paper for th e m (page 1 17),
p rint them (page 1 18), and由en display them in a mat and
frame (pages 120- 12乃.
1 Types oflenses (pages 31-4 1), cameras (pages 10- 13),
ligh ting (pages 13 4- 15 1), and software for 。rganizing and
arch ivi n g (pages 13 1- 133).
1 History of Photography. The medium has been used for
docu men tatio n, persuasio n, and person al expressi。n sin ce
its 19由-centu1y inventio n. See pag,臼 180-213.
Photography is a su均ective undertaking. A Sha时 Course in
Photograp抄emphasizes your choices in p ictu re m aking:
1 How to look a t a scen e in th e way a camera can record it
1 How to select th e shutter speed, point of view, and 。ther
Pr巳fαce
elemen ts that can ma!但the differen ce between an ordin血y
snapshot a n d m四citing p h otograph
1 Ch apter 9, Se凹ng Like a Camera, explores your ch。tees
in selecting a n d adjusti吨the image and presents ways to
p h otograph su同ects s u ch as people a n d landscapes.
1 An updated Chapter 10, T h e H istory of Photograph y,
traces t h e technical, social, and artistic development of the
mediu m since its incepti。n.
New in this fourth e d ition are:
1 The latest o n camera techno logy an d software, integratio n of
workfl ow applications-includin g Capture On e Pro-at every
step, and expanded coverage of a Camera Raw workfl ow.
1 Newph。tographs by g陀at con temporaiy artists, including
Edward Bateman, Ian van Coller, S副11 Come1飞John Divola,
Filip D ujardin, Adam Ekber忘Kate Joyce, David Leven ti,
Marti na Lopez, Ch ristoph Oberschneider, Todd Owyoun g,
Christia11 Richter, and Geoffrey Robins。n
1 The 1970s四plosion of color photography is四pl血nedin the
Histo1yofPhocography, Chapter 10.
1 Cu rrent produce and technical information throu gh o u t ,
with updated demonstratio n and example ph。tographs.
This b。ok is designed to make learn in g photograph y as easy 出
possible:
1 Every two fac ing pages completes a single toptc
1 Detailed s叩句-sαp instructi。ns clari今each stage 。f
extended procedu res
1 Boldfaced h eadings ma!也subtopics easy to spot
1 Numerous p h o tographs and drawings illustrate each topic
Acknowledgmen臼
Many people gave generously of th e ir time and effort in the pro-
duction 。f th is book. Feedback from ins tructors h elps con firm
the d irection of th e book and determ ine the new elements in each
edition. The a u thors are grateful to all th。se wh o reviewed pre-
vious editions and forwarded comments. At Pearson Educatio n,
Roth Wilkof』ky provided editorial su pport. Annemarie Fr剖1klin,
Steve Martel, a11d the team at SPi Global s u pervised th e produc-
tion of the book from manuscrip t to prir
treme ly few, of c。urse) errors. Atτ1ber, Jade, and Skye Ston e gave
their dad 口me to fin ish ct、e bo。k Ify。u have suggesti口ns, pl回se
sen d th em to Photograph y Editor, Pearson Educatio n, 221 Riv臼
Street, Hoboken,町07030. T h ey will be sincerely welcomed.
Jim Stone
Barbara London
PREFACE vii
ANN I E LE’80V,τz
Yo Yo Ma, 1998 Framing is a b,uic control you 阳时
in making a p加tograph. The two photofaphs on 曲is
page and opposi胆are about music. Would you
center your su句ect or use a corner? Do you want action
or ,它pose? Black and white or color? Ho巾ontal,
vertical, or勾uare? Candid or po且d? Viewed from
above, bel,酬,, or stra.以s on? More about framing
。” pages 154- 155.
Ge时ng Started ….. …… …… 4
Ge,时ingyo11r cam旷are叫y ••• •••••• 4
Fowsing and setting the exposure • ••• 6
Expomre reado11t •••• •••••• •••••• 7
Exposi,您images ••••• •••••• •••••• 8
What will yo11 photograph? • •• •••••• 9
T ypes of Cameras … …… ….. 10
Film cam旷-as ••••••• •••••• ••••• 10
D忽ital cameras ••••• •••••• ••••• 12
Basic Camera Controls …. ….. 14
More about Camera Con町ols … 16
Inside ad也ital single-lens
F吃卢四 cam旷·a •••••• •••••• •••• • 17
OOOOAU
’
且
·
且
句,
&
n o ez t
·
。
” ,
d
d
向
d
m
z
由
M
E
?-
t
p
h
#
Q
U
e
陋
。
由
贸..
叫
旷
”A
φ
ι
-
s
–
c
-Z
H
陪
e
铀
勾
肌
’
AM
咽
,“
A
吨
’
&
惜
,“
惜
,.
·
M
·
…
仰
…
–
tn
·
t
世
A
.,a …
时
’
即
d
aM …’
你
.
础
e
e
m
o白
H
..
叫
旷
H
U
φ
ι
-
s
叫
l
c
-
Z
U
元
’
可
句
刷
,H
U
ro
r0
9
&
咽
,
.
.
M e …叩p
d
d
m
啤
副
d
eu
b
et
t
p
n
ψ
se
d
M
句
“
md
w
ι
m
M
刷
刷
Ge时ngtheMost 命。m Your
Camer a and Lens . …… …… 28
In this chapter yo,i’Ll leαrn …
• the basic c。ntrols of your camera and what they d。
• the categones of cameras, and their charactenstics,
so you can ch。。se the right 。ne for your purposes.
• the first S四ps of ♀etting a came用 ready, focusing
an image, and adjusting the camera飞坦白,ngs.
Project:
EXPOSE SOME PICTURES
YOU Will NEED
Camera. We suggest one with a句ustable c。ntrols
Outpu t. To evaluate y。ur work, it’ s g。。d to
see exactly what y。u did y。ur digita l p ictures
can be viewed 。n the camera ‘ s small mon itor
but they a re easier to evaluate on a computer
screen . Pages 8 and 88 tell y。u h。w to d。wnload
photographs from your camera t。 a computer
Once they a re on a c。mputer, y。ur unedi四d
ph。tographs can a lso be displayed large with a
digital pr。,ject。r or on a wide-screen television s。
you can easi ly see small deta ils and imagine wh且
they might look like printed at a large s ize. If you
shoot 3Smn、 fi lm you can take it to the photo lab
in a drug store 。r supermarket cha in fo r 。vern ight
pr。cessing and printing
Pencil a nd ”。tepad 。r smartph。”e to keep
tra ck 。f what y。” d。. Optional, but highly rec-
omme
PROCEDURE See pages 4-9 if y。u a re j ust
beginning to photograph. Those pages walk y。u
thr。ugh the 自陌t steps of setting up your camera,
focus ing an image sharply, adjusting the camera
settings s。your ph。t。g日phs won’ t be too light 。r
too dark, and making y。ur first pictures. See pages
10-13 fo r more about the kinds 。f cameras
Have some variety in the scenes when you
sh。。t For example, photograph su同ects near and
far , indoors and 。utside, in the shade and in the
sun. Ph。tograph different types 。f subjects, such
as a poπrait, a landscape, and an action scene
Page 9 gives some suggestions
HOW DID YOU DO? Which pictures d id y。u
like best? Why? Were s。me d i民rent from what
you expected to get? Did some 。f your came日’s
operati。ns cause c。nfusion? It helps to read y。ur
instructi。n b。。k a ll the way through or ε。 ask 币or
help from some。ne fam iliar with your camera
Todd O吃young. Drummer Quest/oνe pe,作rmingwith
the Roots, Fox 7百eater, St. Louis, Missouri, 2008.
Cαmerα
All……伽i咿…m a n e-formi口内
light-sensitive surface (film or a digital sensor) to record the ligh t chat
forms a n image; a light-tigh t contain er (the camera’s body) to keep
other lψE。ut; and w。 important con trols to a句ust the am。Unt 。fp肌ire
ma!《i口g lig ht (theεxposure) d、at reaches the light-sensi tive surf汪ce.
T h is chapter describes those light controls and how you can ta!但charge
of them, instead of letting them control you. Almost all current cameras are
equipped with automatic 四posure and automatic focus, a n d many h ave
automatic flash. If you are interested in making better p ictures, however, you
s h ould know how y。ur camera m冰es its decisions, even if the automatic fea-
tures can’ t be turned off. If they can, you will want to override your camera’s
automatic decisions from time to time a nd m汰e your 。叭响 choices.
’ You may want to blur the motion of a moving su均已ct o r freeze its
motion sharply. Pages 18-19 sho即how.
• You may want a scene sharp from foreground to background or the
foregrou n d sharp but the backgroun d o u t of focus. See pages 44-45.
• Y。u may want to override your camera’s automatic focus mechanism so
that only a certain part of a scene is s h arp. Page 43 tells when and how
to do so.
• You may de口ide to s ilhouette a subject against a b rig h t background,。g
perh aps you want to make s ure that you don’t end up with a
s ilhouette. See page 72.
Most profi自sional phot o g r a phe rs use cam e ras wit h autom atic featu res,
but they know h。w their cameras operate manually as well as automatically so
they can ch。。se which is best fo r a particular situation. You will wane to do
the same because the more you know about how your camera operates, the
better you w ill be able to get the results you want.
3
Getting Stαγted
GETTING YOUR CAMERA READY
A c amera’s m a in “ n ctio n s are t o help you
v i e w the s ce n e so you can select what you want t o
p h otograph, focus t o get the scene s h a rp w h ere
you want i t to be, a nd exp o se t he picture so it is
n o t too l ig h t or t oo dark.
This illu stration div ides a came ra in half so it
s h ows p arts fo r b oth fil m a nd d ig ital cap ture. For
more abo ut s p ec i fic ca m eras, see p ages 10-13.
The lens mov田 ro.. 帽,d and back to
bring 。同ects at d,陆rent dis
UU
<
e
u
m
ω
ι
H
C
n
m
m
ω
d
m户
可
e
f
~
Ean
h
’s
i
口
c
m
n
m
m
d
A
r日
r
eeA 四
m
m
J旧
m
m
m呻
a
a
M
n
a
tN
ee
-kec
Keep cards protected when th町are not in
t he came阻 Mem。叩cards are vulnerable
to d ust and moisture as well as magnetic
fie lds, heat, and shock Try n。tto touch the
electrical c。n国cts
Open the 。pti。ns menu. Tum the camera
。n and p ress the butt。n c。display t he menu
。n the came阻’s monitor.
Review the defaul臼. In y。ur came阻’s
manual, read t hro ugh the hst 。f settings
t hat can be changed by the 。pe阻四r. Decide
wh,ch 。fthem r。u w。uld 1,ke to c hange
&om the camera ’s defaul白, the way th。se
。P"。ns have been 坦t by the factory.
臼 马叫(川·n r-.c ',H. 、
l节 Op:1厅 ,ze ,mag,
,-_; Image 阳川
|二一 Image 11Le
! 'I' 什l ’•e b;I矿山
凶 l)i_J ,i_' I"•'.''• 1 '、
四川 •p
面
Select a menu ite m with the c。ntrol wt四el
。n the came阻’s back, then u臼 the Jog d ,a l
(als。。n the back) to r凹四l a list of settings
。r choices for that item
R ’ di s
Getting Stαrted
FOCUSING AND SETTING THE EXPOSURE
.... Basic Men u Ooc10
I 那~马盯兰J
币 量M :~~
SM
Select the file type and resolution. 节、e
menu t田m may b e called ",mage q ua lity,”
b ecause visual 自del 1ty IS a伯cted byyour
choice. A lower resolut1。n 。rc。mpressed fi le
lets you store more pie阳陀s。n your mem。叩
card , but a t s。me loss 。fquality. SaVJ ng
pictures in the came阻’S 阻wform at, aεm
highest resoluti。n, kee ps t he quality highest.
Cho。se an ISO speed. It can be d,能rent
f。r each picture Higher n umbers let y。u
sh。。t 1n lower light b ut prod uce an image
with m。re no1四{四e page 75 )
:号: p
襟。
Sunlight Cloudy Shade
Select the white balance ( color 回mpe日-
ture)。f t he d。m inant light source 1n whict、
y。u a re sh。。ting, such as incand escent
(t ungsten) bulbs, sun hgh飞。r。utd。。r shade
A camera 四E。n automatic makes these a d -
JUStments fo r you. If your camera has a 阻W
for町、at 。pt1on, 1t lea ves t he wh1回 balance
choice u nt1I you edit 由e自le
More about ISO speed on page 75.
6 CAMERA
Focus
F。cus on the most impo rtant part of y,。ur
scene to m a ke su陀 1t w,II be sha甲in the
ph。tog阻ph. Practice focusing 。n 。bJects a t
d1能rent d略目nc白白you look t hroug h the
viewfind er so t hat you bee。me fa milia r with
the wayεhe camera focuses
Manual 也cusing. As y。u l。。k through
the View币nder, rota回 the focusing nng a t
the fi-ont 。f the le ns. The view币nder 。fa
single-lens refl四came阻 has a ground-gla臼
screen that shows w hic h paπs of the scene
a re m。st sharply focused. S。me came阻s
als。 ha回a m1cropnsm, a small nng at the
center。f the screen in which an 。bJect ap-
pears c。arsely d。民ed u nt1l 1t 1s focused. An
advanced 。r伊tem DSLRmay 。他r a choice
o f focusing screens
」二二2峭 Shutte, relem
队』n。n
. 丘马( 阳,z 'c'•ydαw n
-t--t- a u t 。阳ω '
兰乡削All z’、e w志Y
d<>w,、· shutter
”lea回d
Automatic f。cusing. Usually 由『S IS d。neby
cen回nng 由e focusing brackets (v1s1b le in the
m idd le of the 响ew击nder) 。n your s u bject as
y。u dep陀ss the shutter re lease p art w ay. The
came阻adjusts the lens fo r you to bnng the
bracketed 。bJect into focus D。n’t pushεhe
shutter re lease a ll the way d。wn until you
a re ready to take a p icture
More about focus and when and how to override
automatic focus on page 43.
Set the Exposure
Shutter speed Aperture s ize
@+@
γ125sec f/16
MENU
’ ISO 国、”’,
?lo..
至善
T。 get a correctly剧p。sed pictu陀, 。ne
th at 1s no t too light (。ver四p。sed) 。rto。
dark (u nde阳p。sed), you-。r the camera-
must set the shutter s peed a nd the apeπure
ace。rdmg to the selec四d ISO sens『t1V1ty
and h。w l 1ght 。r dark your su bject 巴 节咀
shutter speed determ ines the len阱。f t1me
th at hght stri kes t he sens。盯 the apeπure s『ze
determines h。wb nght the light 1s th at passes
through 由e lens and shutter to the light-
sensitive s urface
More about shut臼r speed and aperture on p四rges
18-27 and about 四户osure and
metenngon p鸣'es 62-73.
Expos ure Readout
A data panel appea陌。n t he b。dyofsome
cameras, d ,spla·户ng shutter speed and ape俨
tu吨 settings {here,始到sec. shutter speed,
f/ 16 aperture), as well as 。ther information
The shutte r speed and aperture settings
appear in the viewfinder of s。me came阻S
(he陀,始到 sec. sh utter speed , f/ 16 aperture)
A hist。,gram 1s an accu阻四 representation
。fexposure that m。st cameras can d isplay
。n the m。mtor a仕er y。u take each
ph。tog阻ph. lfy,。ur subject ,s n。t m。vmg
W目。therwise c。operative, make a test
exp。sure of the scene first. Over-。r u nder-
exp。sed tes臼can be deleted. M。re about
h istog日ms 。n pages 60-61
EXPOSURE READOUT
Manually Setti n
‘雪01曲:如=g•阳bj,由剧时曲”
Shu阳W叩曾4 ’/2SO 阳”、d
s,,gh, Mha,•,un l 』gh,Mha,y,un
O咱‘d o”n= I (do,untt向d-)
f/ 16 ,, …
– f/ S.6 fM I=“』,gh”ddo,o up剑bj”‘”· Su同ttt,h>d
D。 you want the wh。le wall of a bu ild ing,
o r was it only t he g日ffit i on it t hat caught
your attenti。n?
Get closer (usually) . 0丘en people photo-
graph from too fur away. What paπ。f the
scene attract ed you? Do you want to see
thewh。le deck, t he wh。le back 归rd, 。r a re
Where do y,。u start? One place to staπ is
by looking around through t he view币nder
A SU均ect 。ften l。。ks di仇rent isolated in
a viewfinder than it d oes when y。u see it
surro u nd ed by 。ther objects. What in te r-
ests you ab。ut this scene? W hat is it that
you want to make into a ph。tog阻ph>
t he setting? Is t here a d istract ion (like bright
su nlight 。r a sign d irectly behind s。me。ne’s
head] that you c。uld avoid by changing
posit ion? Ta ke a l。。k
lo。k at the background ( and 由e fo陀-
ground). How d oes y。ur su均ecε relate to
its surround ings? Doy,。u want t he su均ecε
centered 。r o仔t。。ne side t。 show m。re of
Try a di他陀,1t angle . I『,stead 。f always
sh。。ti『1g fr,。m 『飞。m、al eye- evel heig ht, try
getting up high and looking d。wn o n your
SU同ect o r kneeling and looking u p
More about backgrounds and the image 斤·ameon
P回,ges 154-157.
E
Au-
e
e
飞
句泛
resulting ph。tog日忡, darker parts of t he
scene may appear complet ely black, 。r the
subject itself may be silhouetted against a
brigh ter background.
D。”’t be afraid to experiment, t。。.
Incl ude a bright lig h t s。urce 。r bright sky
in t he p icture (just d。n’t sta re d irectly a t
the sun t h rough t he viewfinder). In t he
Check the lighting. At fi rst, y。u a陀m。re
likely to get a good 四”sure if you ph。回-
g目ph a m。陀 。r less evenly lit scene, n悦
。ne where the su均町 is against a v町l ight
background , such as a bright sky.
9 . CH A PT E R 1
More about lighting on pages 134- 151.
Types ofCαmerαs
FILM CAMERAS
W hat kind 。fcam-
era is best for you? For
occasional snapshots of
fami ly and friends, an
inexpensive, completely
auromar,c, nonad1usr-
able camera that you
just point and shoot will
probably be sa口sfacrory.
But if you have become
interested enough in
photography to take a
class or buy a book, you
will 飞wane an adjustable
camera because 1t will
g,ve you greater creative
control. If you buy a
camera with auromanc
features, make sure it is
one that al lows you to
manually override them
when you wane to maJ也
exposure and focus
choices yourself.
Film camera d esigns
evolved as too ls for spe-
cific tasks, and followed
the slow evolution of
film (see Chapter 10,
pages 184- 186). Here
are the m勾or styles,
which are useful to
know about because
many elements of these
designs have been incor-
porated into their digi-
tal counterparts.
Single-lens re向ex cameras
(SLRs} show you a scene
d irectly through the
lens, so you can preview
what will be recorded.
You can see exactly what
the lens is focused on;
with some cameras, you
can check the depth of
field (how much of the
scene from foreground
to background will be
sharp). Through-the-
lens viewing is a definite
advantage with telepho-
to lenses, for close-ups,
or for any work when
you want a precise view
of a scene
Very early SLRs used
large glass p lates or fi lm
sheets but since the
1950s almost all were
made co accept 35mm
film. A few models
aimed at (and priced
for) profess旧naJ pho-
E歹二、 刚刚 \ 件
、
A
川
人
Si” gle -lens Reflex Camera
·•
10 CA M ERA
rographers used larger
roll fi lm . Recent SLRs
incorporate auromanc
exposure, auromanc
focus, and automatic
flash but allow manual
control. Many different
interchangeable lenses
for SLRs are avai lable.
Dψtal SLRs (DSLRs)
resemble their 35mm
fi lm ancestors. Some
SLR cameras made
for 21,♀-it、ch-飞、~de roll
film (called n飞edium
f。rmat} may be used
with accessorγdigital
capture backs. Digital-
on ly models, also called
medium-format, are also
available.
SLRs have long been
verypopul盯with profes-
sionals, such as photo-
journalists or fashion
photographers, or with
anyone who wants to
move beyond making
snapshots.
Rang efinder earner目 are
viewfinder fi lm cam盯缸
This means they have
a peephole, or window,
separate from the lens,
through which you view
the scene Inexpensive
“pomt-and-shoot” view-
finder cameras simply
show the approximate
framing through the
飞叽ndow. A rangefinder
camera ,s more complex,
飞叽th a visual focusing
system that you use as
you look through the
viewfinder 飞川ndow. The
window shows a split
image when an object
is not in focus. As you
rotate the focusing
ring, the split image
comes together when
the object is focused
Range白”der Film Ca mera
sharply. Rangefind盯
cameras let you focus
precisely, even in dim
light, but you cannot
visually assess the depth
of field because all parts
of the scene, even the
split image, look equally
sharp in the viewfinder
Because the viewfind-
盯四 in a different posi-
口on from the lens that
exposes the 日lm, youdo
not see exactly what the
lens sees. This difference
between the viewfinder
image and the lens
image is called parallax
error, and is greater for
objects that are closer
co the camera Better
rangefinder cameras cor-
rect for p盯allax error
and have interchange-
able lenses, although
usually not in as many
foe.al lengths as 盯e av剖1-
able for SLRs. Mose use
35mm 自Im; ones called
medium formar 盯e for
wider roll fi lm, few are
digiral. Range日nder
C剖白盯as 盯e fast, reliable,
qu,er ,n operar,on, and
rel a口vely small.
P盯al lax error and a
viewfinder image char
is reversed le丘 ro righr.
Some now-discon口nued
TLRs had inrerchange-
able lenses; adjusrmenrs
on all models are com-
plerely manual
Twin-lens Reflex Camera
Twin-lens ref!四cam-
eras (TL时, excepr for
a couple novelty “rerr。”
digiral versions, are all
film cameras. New ones
a陀 made by a few com-
panies, bur secondhand
models are widely avai l-
able. They cannot easily
be adapred ro digital
capture. Each c剖白era
has rwo lenses: one for
viewing rhe scene and
another jusr below it
char exposes the film
A large fi lm format
(21,4 inches square) is
rheTLR’s advantage
!rs disadvantages 盯e
View臼meras have a lens
in rhe from, a gro山1d
glass viewing screen in
the back, and a flexible,
accordion-like bellows in
bec:ween. The camera’s
mosr valuable fearure is
i rs adj usrabili叩rhecam
era’s P盯rs can be moved
free! y in relation ro each
orh町, which lees you airer
pers~ecrive and sharpness
to swt each sc白世 You
can change lenses and
even the catηera’s back;
for example, you can
attach a back ro use selι
developing film or one to
record a digital image.
Each film exposure
is made on a separare
sheer, so you can make
one shot in color and
the nexr in black and
white, or develop each
sheer differenrly. Fi lm
s,ze ,s large-4 x S inch-
es and larger-for crisp
and sharp derail even in
a big print.
Using a view camera
can be a more cons,d-
ered process because
they are slow to use
comp盯ed ro smaller
hand-held cameras. They
盯e large and heavy and
muse be mounred on a
tripod. The image on rhe
viewing screen is upside
down, and iris usual ly
so dim char you have
to put a focusing clorh
over your head and rhe
screen ro see rhe image
clearly. When you wane
complere conrrol of an
image, such as for archi-
tectural or product pho-
tography or for personal
work, rhe view c剖叽era’s
advanrages ourweigh
whar some mighr see 臼
mconven,ences
Some cameras are made
宦。而II a specialized need.
Panoramic cameras
make a long, narrow
photograph char can be
effective, for example,
wirh landscapes. Some
of rhese cameras crop
our P盯t of rhe normal
image rectangle to make
a panoramic shape
Ochers use a wider-than-
normal secrion of roll
日Im; some may rotare
the lens from side ro side
during the exposure
Digiral pat10ramas
can be made during
editing by s口rching sev-
eral individual fr副咽es
togerher,白rher from
digiral caprure or from
scanned film, so special-
purpose panoramic
cameras 盯e no longer
common. Some digiral
cameras can display a
segment of rhe previous
fr剖叽e on the side of the
monitor to help align
the next shoe for more
seamless reassembly
lacer. Ocher cameras
(and smart phones) have
a飞weep” mode chac can
capru陀 a panoramic
image with one press of
the bucron when moved
across a scene
Ste陀o or 3-D cameras
ta!
What else changed?
j…·…用.
– 7:~; ”.. fi?t
忧国可
回
圃’
i , ‘
200mm I I 12°
focal len圳、 r I angle of view
(APS-C: 125mm) \ /
11 45==
FFF
,,
‘A
V
J尸’
’
’
’’
’5
4
5
4
机
E
Lf-
-
+
-m
o
g
-
卢ZE
F
H
m
E
z--
-d
r
·
-4卢
5
4E
问
E
h-
-
-w
-
『
H
Z♂S
S
E
LF
-?
..
,
川
…
…
-
M
N
-
,
L
E
E-g
回
It
50mm \ I 47°
focal length \.--一-『飞/ angle of view
(APS-C : 31mm) \ /
且当
」 : ...::且 [
· 竭而?
!?叮男ill"吨
lh
–
A俨
到
mMc mwm 5。
angle 。fview
What happens when you change lens focal length? If every-
thing else stays the SlJme, changing the focal le咆’,lh of the Jens
changesbo阶 the amount of a s臼ne included in the image (anue
of view) and the size of o侬出(magn币,cation). To make 阶市
sequence, the photographer cl时,啄~d only the 卢>cal length of the
tenseι the distance from Jens 阳SU句;ect remained the same. As
the focal length increases (fore.κample, from 24mm to 50mm),
the angle of view narrows and the size of objects increases.
7百ese illustrations are ac,阳rate for comparing anues of view
on a full-frame digi臼I or 35mm film camera or when using
何35mm equivalent” focal lengths. Focal lengths that match the
angle of view on an APS-C camera are shown in paren伪eses.
100mm I I
focal length 怡’一一叫
(APS-C: 62mm) 飞/
24。
angle 。fview
1000mm I I
focal len忡 忡一,l
(APS-C:“5mm) I f
2.s•
angle 。fview
R 2 e 33
NοrmalFocαl Length
THE MOST LIKE HUMAN VISION
A le n s o f normal focal len阱, as you m ight
expect from the name, produces an image that
see m s normal when compared w ith h uman
vis ion. T he image includes about the same angle
of view as the human eye sees clearly when looking
s traight ahead, and t h e relative size and spacing of
near and far objects appear normal. For full-frame
cameras (。r a 35 mm film camera), this e仔ect is
produced by a lens of about 50mm focal length.
Manu facturers that supply t hei r can1eras with a
prime lens usually fi t a lens 。f that length.
T h e size 。f t h e lig h t-sensitive surface used in
a particular camera determines what focal length
is n ormal fo r it; a normal lens has a focal length
34 L E N S
approximately equal to the diagonal of the sen-
sor or film frame. T he normal focal length for a
view camera wi th 4 x 5-inch film, for example, is
150mm. Most digital sensors are smaller than fu ll
frame so their n。rmal lens is shorter than o ne for
a full-frame or 35mm camera. See the s ize chart at
the b。ttom 。f page 45.
N orma l lenses h ave many advant a ges.
Compared wi th lenses of much shorter or m uch
longer focal length, normal lenses are generally
faster; t hey can be designed wi th wider maxi mum
apertures to admit t he maximum amount ofl igh t.
T herefore, they are convenient for use in d im light,
Alison Carey. Graze, 2009.
A normal-focal-length lens
is a useful all-purpose lens in
the studio. Carey fabricates
her imagined lands臼pes
indoors on a small scale with
clay and paint. Carefully
controlled art伊cial light and
a pain阳d切ckdrophelp
mimic reality. Her normal-
fo臼I-length lens provid,出a
com for臼blewo成ing distance
and opens to a wide aperture
when she wants shallow
depth of field.
especially where action is involved , as in cheater o r
indo。r sports scen es o r in low lig ht levels o utdoors.
T hey are a good choice if th e camera is to be hand
h eld because a wide m皿imum ap盯ture p凹mits a
shutter speed fast en o ugh to prevent blu r caused
by cam era m ovemen t during 田posure. Generally,
the normal lens is m o re compact and lighter, as
well 臼 somewhat less expensive, than len ses of
much longer o r much sho rter focal length.
Choice of focal length is a ma优er of p e rsonal
prefere nce. Many photographers with full- frame
cameras regularly use a lens with a focal len gth of
35mm rath er than 50mm because they like the
wider view and greater d epth of fi eld that a 35mm
lens has compared to a 50mm lens. s。me phorog-
raphers use an 85mm lens because they prefer its
nar rower view, which can concent rate th e image
on the central o均ects of interest in the scen e.
Henri Cartier-Bresson. Greece, 1961. A lens of
normal focal Ieng姊produ臼s an image 阶at appears
similar to that of normal human vision. Cartier-
Bresson made many of his best-known pho阳,graphs
with a 50mm lens on his 35mm Leica camera. The
amount of the scene included in the image and the
relative size and pla臼ment of near and far ot庐cts are
what you would 由:pect to see if you were s阳,,ding next
阳 the camera. The scene does not appear exaggerated
in depth, as it m也·htwi阶a short-focal-length lens, nor
do 伪eo句;ects seem compressed and too close together,
as sometimes happens wi阶a long-fa臼I-length lens.
R 2 e 35
Lo
TE l 隔EPHOTO LENSES
A prime lens of long focal l凹,h seems t o
bring things closer, just as a telescope does. As
the focal length gets longer, less of the scene is
shown (the angle of view narrows), and what is
shown is enlarged (the magnification increases).
This is useful when you are so far from the sub-
ject that a lens of normal focal length produces
an image that is too small. Sometimes you can’t
get really close-at a spmts event, for example.
Sometimes it is better to stay at a distance, as in
nature photography. An Olympic finish line, t he
president descending 企om Air Force One, and
an empting volcano are all possible subjects for
which you might want a l。ng lens.
How long is a long len s? A popular medium-
long lens for a full-frame camera is 105mm; t his
focal length magn ifies your view significantly but
36 LENS
not so much that the lens’s usefulness is limi ted
to special siruations. A lens of 65mm has a com-
parably long focal length fo r an APS-C camera
with a l.6x crop (or le阳conversion) factor (see page
32), so does a 300mm lens on a 4 × 5 view camera
The difference between a medium-long lens and
an ext remely long one (for example, a 500mm
lens with a full-frame camera) is rather like that
between a pair of binoculars and a h igh-power
telescope. You may want a telescope 。ccasionally,
but usually binoculars will do.
A long len s provides relatively little d epth
of field. When you use long lenses, you’II n。rice
t hat as the focal length increases, depth of field
decreases so that less of the scene is in focus at
any given f-stop. For example, when focused at
巾 same distance, a 200mm lens at f/ 8 has less
Ed)ones. Fisherman’s
Dragon Boat Race, Hong
Konι 2010. A long lens
can seem 阳 compr,白S
space. I引arced to shoot from
shore,Jones chose a 500mm
lens to fill his frame with
the action. The boats and
oarsmen seem to be s阳eked
on top of one another in a
jumble of action and color.
When do you get阶is effect
and why? See pages 48-49
to find out.
Andreas Feininger. 7百e
Ocean Liner Queen Mary,
New York Ci弘 1946
A long lens mag,”伊esa
distant subjec电 letting
you shoot from a distance.
Feininger used a 1000mm
lens to shoot across the
Hudson River from the New
Jersey shore, two miles aw.吨y.
Built as a luxury liner, the
Queen Ma叩served 伪rough
the war as a troop transport
beginning in 1940, and was
decommissioned sho时如after
this photograph was 阳ken.
t=:母汗』=-~缸’E需冒冒切冒冒冒需现:::r嚣=t~~~~.r.丽丽 叫.D. -‘”<
帽”’ 1 ’””··”……”. ”………·”””……………··”··”...... ,-一τ-
i画画画甲血-孟~
nudr
-
础
c
n
旧
m
n
😕
t
:
ts
u
·
耐r
:
帆
’
町
N
J
:<
lt
NdmAm
L
h
TEUMAF
i
、
n
m
M
L
A
U
L
u
e
KHmamm
-
civ
uvC
A
VI
<
t
uoumm M
m尸
叫
M
m
明
mfdU
JEDe
h
!
o
n
t
业
内
儿
出
r’
配
U
缸
川
叫
r
句
‘
C
咱
’
b
v
ι
而
川
v
a
’
t
u
v
’
’
ι川
川
岛
U
g
川J
ω
叩A
e
川
e川
》
[
a
‘
h
B
比
t
句a
v
a
舍
.
‘
,
t
t
n
《
.ω
n
d
配
川
川
;
a
-
2
口
m
四
山
h
E
队
H
u
C
nMOPLUX -
LMFyuph
M
m
A
p
b‘b
比
d
F
M
M
V
队
时
扩dE
d
m
h
b
卫
吨
阳
t
l
Y
A
C
S
-
w
J
川
n
u
u
,
、
·
·
仕
”
H
e
-
-
阳
盯m
m
DAeukutvrz
e
e
。
n
d
o
h
dbt1ap
A medium-long lens is use句l for portrai岱
because the photographer can be relatively far from
the SU均ect and still fill the image fram巳 Many
people feel more at ease when photographed if the
camera is not too close. Also, a moderate distance
between camera and su悖ct prevents the exagger-
aced size of fac ial features closest to the camera
that occurs when a lens is very close. A good work-
ing distance for a head-and-shoulders portrait is
6-8 丘(2-2.5 m), easy to do with a medium-long
lens-from 85mm co 135mm focal length.
A long prime le ns, compared with one of
normal focal length, is larger, heavier, and
somewhat more expensive. Its largest apei-ture is
relatively small; f/4 or f/5.6 is c。mmon. It must be
focused carefully because with its shallow depth
of field there will be a distinct difference between
o均已cts that are shat ply focused and those that
are not. A faster shutter speed is needed to keep
the image sharp wh ile hand hold ing the camera
(。r a trip。d should be used for support) because
the enlarged image magnifies the effect of even
a slight movement of the lens during 四p。sure.
These disadvantages increase as the focal length
increases, but so do the long lens’S unique image·
forming characteristics.
Photographers often call a ny long lens a tele-
photo lens, or tele, although not all long-focal-
lengt h lenses are actually of telephoto design. The
optics of a true telephoto make it smaller than a
conventional long lens of the same focal length. A
tele-extender, or teleconvert er, contains an optical
element that increases the effective focal length of
a lens. It attaches between the lens and the cam-
era. The optical performance, however, will not be
as good as the equivalent long lens.
ω…2 e 37
Short Foeαl Length
WI DE-ANGLE LENSES
L e nses of s hort focal len阱 are also called
wide-angle or sometimes wide-field lenses, wh ich
describes their most impo rtant feature-they view
a wider angle of a scene than normal. A lens of
normal focal length records what you see when
you look at a scene with eyes fixed in one position.
A 35m m wide-angle lens records t h e 63。 angle of
view that you see if you m ove your eyes slightly
fro m s ide to side. A 7.5mm fisheye lens records th e
180。 angle you see if you turn your whole head to
look over your left shou lder and then over your
right sho ulder.
A popular short lens for a full-frame camera
is 28m m . Comparable focal lengths are 55mm
for a medium-format film camera with 6 x 7cm
for mat, and 90mm for a 4 x 5-inch view camera.
38 L E N S
David Leventi. Opera de Monte-
Carlo,如fonaco, 2009. A shorte俨
focal-length lens lets you show a
more &omplete view of the s&ene
from any viewpoint. For his 切ok
Opera, Le时nti photographed the
world's great opera houses-this one
opened in 1879-al/ from the central
vantage point of a 目lo performer.
Usi,,飞g a wide lens he could ga伪eι 斤。m
his fixed lo臼tion, n臼rly阶eentire
ornate mtenor.
Wide-angle lenses are also popular
with photojournalist.ι feature pho-
tographers, and others who shoot 巾
fast-’”。ving and sometim由crowded
situations. For由ample, many pho-
tojournalists regula吵use 35mm or
28mm as their 、ormal'’ lens instead
of a 50mm lens 7百ese medium-short
lenses gi,时a wider angle of view than
do由a 50mm lens, which makes it
easier to include the setting in close
quarters. Shorter lenses also give you
more dep价。,ffield, which can let a
photographer focus the lens appro.刀-
mately instead of having to fine-focu
t. eve.吃y sho
Short lenses show a wide view. Short-focal-length lenses are
useful for including a wide view of an area. 7百eyare 臼pable of
gr,臼t depth of fi, Id so 阶at o向;ec臼bo伪 close 阳 the lens and far
from it will be in focus, even at a relative忡rge ape刷甩
Objects up close appear larger. A short lens can produce
strange perspective effe出 Be臼use it can be focused at 时可y
close range, it can make ot庐cts in the foreground large 巾
relation 阳those M伪e background. Wi阶 the lens close 阳 the
resting man's feet, they look monumental, making a pho臼,graph
M伪 an entirely different m臼ning 伪an the one abo昭
A short len s can g ive great d epth of fiel d . The
shorter the focal length of a lens, the more of a
scene will be sharp (if the f-stop and distance from
the SU均ect remain unchanged). A 28mm lens, for
example, when stopped down to f/ 8 can produce
an image that is sharp 台om less than 6.5 丘(2 rn)
to infin ity (as far as the eye 。r lens can see), which
often will eliminate the need for further focusing
as long as the su均已ct is wt巾n the range of dis
tances that will be shar p.
The focal length of what’s called a wide ( or
normal or long) lens depends on 巾 size or for-
mat 。f the fi lm or d igital sens。r you are using.
The light-sensitive recording chip in many digital
cameras is smaller than full frame and, if it is, it
will capture any given angle of view with a shorter-
focal-length lens.
Depth of field, on the other hand, depends
on the actual focal length of the lens; if everything
else stays the same, a shorter lens will always give
you greater depth 。f field. The compact camera
on page 12, left, has a fixed zoom lens (see page
40) with a focal length of 4.3-86mm. Because of
the small sens。r size, its 35mm equivalent is a
24-480mm zoom. Using that camera, you would
get much g reater depth of field for any photo-
g raph than you would using its 35mm-equivalent
lens with a full-frame camera
Wide-angle 吐istortion.” Aw由-angle lens can
seem to d istort an image and produce strange
perspective e自ects. Sometimes these effects are
actually caused by the lens, as with a fisheye lens
(page 4 1 bottom). But, m。re o丘e口, what seems to
be distortion in an image made with a wide-angle
lens is caused by the photographer shooting very
close to the su均ect.
A 28mm lens, for example, will focus as close
as I 丘 (0.3 叫,and shorter lenses even closer. Any
o均已ct seen from close up appears larger than an
o均已ct of the same size that is at a di ance. Whil
y。u are at a scene, your brain knows whether you
are very close to an o均ect, and ordinarily you
would not n。rice any visual exaggeration. In a
photograph, however, you notice size compari-
sons immediately. Our impression of perspective
is based on size relationships that depend on lens-
to-subject distance. See the photographs at left.
R 2 e 39
Zoom, Mαcro , αnd Fisheye Lenses
O ther lenses can view a scene in a new way
or solve certai n problems with ease.
Zoom lenses are popular because they combine
a range of focal lengths into one lens (see below).
The glass elements of the lens can be moved in
relation to each other; thus infinitely variable
focal lengths are available within t he limits of t he
z。oming range. Using a 50-135mm zoom, for
example, is like having a 50mm, 85mm, 105mm
and 135mm lens instantly available, plus any focal
lengt h in between. Compared to prime, or fixed-
focal-length, lenses, zooms are s。mewhat more
expensive, bulkier, and heavier, but one of them
w ill replace two or more fixed-focal-length lenses.
z。。m lenses are best used where light is ample
because they have a relatively small maxi mum
aperture. Older zoom lenses were significantly
less sharp than fixed-focal-length lenses but new
designs nearly march them. T he “ kit” lenses s。ld
as a package with DSLRs are usually zooms. Most
current zoom lenses are also autofocus.
“ D igital” zoom, a feature found on some
digital cameras marketed to amateurs, only crops
the image, enlarging the pixels in the part of the
image th挝、 left. Quality is less than you’d get by
using a longer lens or moving closer for the shot
--
40 LENS
Macro lenses are used for close-up photography
(oppos町, top). Their optical design corrects for
the lens abel'l"ati。ns that cause problems at very
short focusing distances, but they can also be
used at normal distances. Their disadvantages are
a slightly smaller maximum apertu叭。fren f/ 2.8
for a 50mm lens, and sligh由 higher cost. (More
about making close-up photographs on page 50.)
Longer-focal-length macro lenses let you magnify
an image, like t he one opposite, top, without dis-
rurbing the subject.
Macro-zoom lenses combine both macr。
and zoom features. They focus relatively close,
although usually not as close as a fixed-focal-
length macro lens, and give a range of focal length
choices in one lens.
Fisheye lenses have a very wide angle of view-up
to 180。-and they exaggerate to an 四treme degree
differences in size between 。均ects that are close to
t he camera and those that are farther away. They
actually distort the image by bending straight
lines at the edges of the p icture (。pposi te, bot-
tom}. Fisheye lenses, because of their ve1y short
focal length, als。 produce a great deal of depth of
field: objec臼刷刷n inches of the lens and those in
t he f缸 distance wi ll be sharp.
A zoom lens gives you a
choice of different focal
lengths wi伪M the same
lens. The re巾nues
overlaid on 伪epiaure
show you some of the
ve,y different叫rs you
could have made this
photograph by zooming
in to shoot at a long focal
length or zooming back to
shoot at a shorter one.
Stanley Rowin. A阳,punc·
ture, 1995. Tl』e therapist's
hands were shot with a
macro lens. ”,e切ckground
waspu’?出efi,lly rendered
dark and feature/,四to avoid
distracting from 伪e subject.
Donald Miralle. Woodlake
Rodeo, G,liforn巾, 2005.
A fisheye lens and unusual
van阳,ge point help capture
the fu,y of a bull breaking
卢·om the gate at the start of
a bu/I-riding competition.
The fen臼且bent into a curve
句y the lens. O与ects at 伪e
edge of the fisheye's image
circle are distorted more than
those at the center.
R 2 e 4 1
Focus αnd Depth of Field
只b
泣
’hw也
-g
S h a rp fo cu s a忧阳也 the eye. Sharp focus
acts as a signal to pay a ttentio n to a particular
part of a photograph, especially if o ther parts of
the im age are no t as shar p. If part of a picture
is sh arp an d part is our of focus, 忧 is n amral
to look fi rst at the sharply focused area (see
p hotograph s, pages 158- 159). 飞.Vhen you are
ph。tographi ng, it is also natural to foc us the
camera sharply on the most importan t area. You
can select and, to a certain extent, control wh ich
parts of a scene will be sharp.
phot,怨rapher actually focused on the dots eye.
For another pictun电 abo昭 r也·ht, 阶e photog-
rapher wanted shallow depth of field, 时阶only
some of the scene sharp. Here the only sha’?
part of the picture is the eye on which the Jens
was focused.
Depth of field h伪e part of a scene that
appears acceptably sharp in a pho阳•graph.
Dep阶offield臼n be deep, 时阶eve,ything
sha’p from near 臼far. In the photograph above,
le~, it缸tends fro’”阶e dots paws in the fore-
ground to the fluted column behind him. 7百e
Depth 。ffield where the
E川e is accep阻blysharp
一”一,,,- -,,-
‘ 、‘ 、‘ 、、
‘ 、.
Whe n you foc us a cam er a o n an o均ect, the
dis tan ce between lens and fi lm (。r d吸时 image
sensor) is adjusted, au tomatically wi th an inter-
nal motor or m anually by your rotati ng a ri ng o n
the lens barrel, until t h e 。均ecr a ppears sharp o n
the viewi ng screen . You fo cus man ually by turn-
ing that focus ing ring until t h e 。bject appears
sharp in your viewfin der or a m ark o n t h e lens
barrel conesp。nding to its distance aligns wi th
a foc using m ark. If you are using an auto matic-
focus camera, you fo cus by ai m ing the foc us
ind icator in your viewfind er (us ually a spot in
the cen ter) at t h e 。均ect an d partially depressing
the shutter-release button. T h e m otor in the lens
moves the lens elements away fro m o r closer to
the fi lm or sensor u ntil t h at spot is in foc us.
圃,
Imagine the p归ne of critical focus (the distance on which you focus the lens) to be some-
thing like a pane of glass stretched from one side of the scene to the other. Objects that lie
along that plane will be sh呻归front of and behind the plane of critical阳,s Ii,自由depth of
field, the area that 嗣ii/ appear acceptably sharp. The farther objects are from the plane of criti-
cal focus in a particular photograph, either toward the 臼mera or away fro’”也向 less sh呻
they will be. If o与ec臼are far enough from the plane of critical focus 阳 be outside the depth of
field, they will appear notic,臼均out offocus.
Notice that 阶e depth of field extends about one-third in front of the plane of critical focus,
two thirds behind it. 7百is ι true at normal focusing dis阳nces, but when focusing ve,y close 归a
sut庐饨 the depth of field is more e时nly di,时ded, about half in front and half behind the plane
of criti,臼I focus.
D e p t h of 行eld . In theory, a lens can o nly focus
on a fla t plane at o n e single dis tance at a ti m e an d
o均ects at all oth er d is tances will be less sharp.
T he distan ce fr。m your lens to that p lane, the
pla肘。fcηitical foe剧, is called t h e 。与ect distance
and is usually indicated by a distance scale o n
the lens. In most cases, howev,凹, part of the
scen e will be acceptably sh arp both in 命。nt
of and behind the most sharp ly focused p lane.
O悖ccs will grad u ally become more and more
out of focus the farther th ey are fro m the m ost
s harply fo cused area. This region with in wh ich
objects appear acceptably sharp in the image-the
depth of field-can be increased o r decreased (see
pages 44 -45).
L E NS 42
Au阳 focus can mean out
of focus when a scene has a
ma时SU句;ect (or subject,沙off
to one side and at a differ-
ent distance from whatever
。与ect is at the center. Most
autofocus cameras will focus
on 伪e。与ect at the center of
the frame, here within the
small bracketed area, 。时r
the shoulder of阶e subject.
To correct this, first choose
the focusing distance by p归。
ing the autofocus brackets on
the main subject and partial如
pressing do附the shutter-
release button. Lock the focus
by keeping partial pressure
on the shutter release.
Reframe your picture
while keeping partial pressure
on the shutter release. Push
the shutter button all the way
do附to make 伪e臼-posure
Automαtic Focus
A u t om atic focu s used co be found only o n
point-and-shoot snapshot cameras. But now it is
s tandard equipm ent o n alm ost all cameras. When
you push do叭响 the shutt er-release bu tton part
way, the camera adjusts t he lens to focus sh arply
on what it th inks is you r subject- us ually what-
ever 。同ect is at the cen ter of t he viewing screen.
Someti m es you will want to focus the cam-
era m anually. J us t as with automatic 四posure,
there will be ti mes when you will want to oven-ide
the automatic m echan ism and focus th e camera
yourself Most single-lens reflex and full-featured
compact cameras wi th automatic focus will also
let you focus man ually.
The most common pro b le m occurs when your
SU均ect is at the side 。f the frame, not at t h e center
(see pho tos, le丘). A camera may also have prob-
lems focus ing t hrough glass, or if a subject h as
very low contrast, is in ve1y d im ligh t, or consists
of a repeti tive pattern.
Moving subjects can also cause problems.
The adjustment 。f t he au co focus m echan ism can
someti mes ta!忧 l。ng eno ugh for a fast-moving
SL问ect, such as a race c缸, to move 。ut of range.
The lens may “ hunt” back and forth, u nable to
foc us at all or may make an exposure wit h t he
SU均ect 。ut of focus.
Some cameras h ave more soph isticated
electron ics co deal with these problems better .
Automatic foc us is more rapid, for example, when
the focusing motor is located in t he lens instead
of the camera body. S。me cameras can be set so
the lens, once it is focused o n a m oving o均ect,
will keep it in foc us for a series of exposures. Read
the instructio ns for your camera and lens so you
know how the au tofocus mechan ism operates.
Take a mome nt to evaluate ea ch situ a tion.
Over ride the au tomatic system when it is better
to do so, rather t han assume that t he right pan of
the p icture wi ll be sharp si mply because you are
set for automatic foc us.
E R 2 e 43
Depth of Field
CONTROLLING SHARPNESS IN A PHOTOGRAPH
D e p t h of 而eld. C。mple呻sh呻 from fo陀
ground ro background , to tally out of focus
except fo r a shallow zon e, or sh arp to any extent
in between-you get to ch。。se how much 。fy。ur
image will be sharp. Wh en you m冰e a picture,
you can manipulate t h ree facrors that affect the
depth of field (the d istance in a scene between
the nearest and fa rt hest points t h at appear sh arp
in a phorograph). Not ice in the illustratio ns
opposite t hat doing so may change the image in
other ways.
A p ertu re size. Stopping down the lens ro a
smaller apenure, for example, from f/ 2 ro f/ 16,
44 L E N S
increases the depth of fie ld. As the aperm re gets
smaller, more of t h e scene will be sharp in t he
photograph.
Fo c al len阱. Using a shorter缸al-le咿h lens
also increases th e depth of field at any given aper-
ture. For example, more of a scene will be sharp
when ph orographed w油a 50mm lens at f/ 8 than
with a 200mm lens at f/ 8.
Lens-to -subject distance. Moving fanher away
from the subject increases the depth of field most
of all, particularly if you started o ut very close to
the subject.
Marc PoKempner.
Rev. Ike, Chicago, 1975
Shallow dep伪。ffie/d
lets you draw immedi-
ate attention to one
area; we tend to look fi.市t
at阶esha’pest o向;e,出ina
pho吨•raph. 7百e刷刷,ge
of preacher Re时rend欣e is
that God is generous and will
s问you exact/ what you ask
foι includinι fore.κample,
a diamond-studded watch,
ring, and cuff/inks, on which
the photographer focused.
。@
The smaller the aperture (with a given lens), 伪e greater
the depth of field. Using a smaller aperture for 伪e picture on
伪e (arr,也·ht increased阶e depth of field and made the image
much s阳’pero时raff. M斤阶 the smaller apertu鸣 the amount of
l也·ht entering伪e camera decreased, so a slower shutter平时d
had to be used 臼 keep the 阳阳l exposure 阶e same.
回
The shorter the focal Ieng份。f the lens, the greater the
depth of field. Both of these photographs were 臼ken from the
samep由此ion and at the same aperture. Notice that changing
阳a shorter focal length for the picture on 伪e far r,也·ht not on如
increased伪e depth of field but also changed the an~e of view
(the amount of the scene shown) and the magnification of
。句iects in the scen
回函 国回 ~
The farther you areρ·om a subject, 伪e greater the depth
of field, at any i时n focal length and aperture. The photog-
rapher stepped back to take the picture on 阶e far right. If you
focus on an object far enough awa民 the lens will form a sh呻
image of all objects from 伪at point out to infinity.
Small Sensor 昌 Great Depth of Field
Digital camer as with s m a ll sen so rs can give
you unexpected d e p t h of fi e ld. T he sh。rrer a
lens’s focal length (at the same apertu re and d臼
tance fro m the subject), the greater the depth of
fi eld. T he size of a camera’s sensor affects what is
considered a norm al-, sh。rt-, or long-focal-length
lens for that camera.
A “ normal” lens for a camera (see page 34)
is o ne with a 岛cal length ab。ut the same as the
length 。fa diag。nal line across the light-sensitive
su rface in the cam era A full-frame digital o r 35mm
fi lm camera has a 24 × 36mm light-sensitive sur-
face: a normal lens for th at c血11era is 50mm.
Sh。,t Lens
Far由er Back
T h e sensor in m ost digi tal cam eras is small-
er-i n many cases, considerably smaller. A normal
lens for that type of cam era will be shmter than
the 50 mm lens chat is no rm al for a full-fram e
camera, and so will have more depth of field. The
compact digital camera pictured on page 12, top,
f。r example, has a sensor of 6.2 × 4.55mm. The
nor mal foc al length is 8mm. If everyth ing else is
equal, the 8 mm lens will give you much greater
depth of fie ld t han the 50m m lens.
Small sensors use an obscure naming
system devised for TV camera tubes in the
1950s Here are坦·nsor diagonals-hen臼
normal lens lengths-for拙,,e common sizes.
Sensor Name Diagonal
飞 /2" 8.0mm
1/ 1.8’ 8.9mm
2/ 3 ’ 11.0mm
F。ur Thirds " 22.5mm
1 .8’ (AP5元C) 28.4mm
R 2 e 4 5
Mοre αbout Depth of Field
HOW TO PREVIEW IT
K now the extent of 由e d e pth of field when
ph otograph ing a scene-how much of the scene
from near to far will be sharp-to ma!也 better pic-
tures. You may want to be sure that certain objects
are shat p . O r you may want something deliberate-
ly o ut of focus, s uch as a distracting background.
To control what is sharp, it is useful to have some
way of gauging the depth of fiel d.
C h ecking the d e pth of field. 飞.Vith a si ngle-
lens reflex camera, you view t he scene throu g h
t h e lens . No matt盯 what aperture setting you
have selected, t h e lens is o rdinarily w ide open for
viewing to ma!忧 the viewfinder image as bright
and easy to see as possible. However, t he large
aperture s ize m ean s that you see t h e scene w ith
depth of field at it s sh allowest . Wh en you press
t h e shutter release, t he lens automatically closes
down to the t aking aperture. Un less yo u are tak-
ing a picture using t h e widest apercure, the view-
fi nder image will n ot have the same depth of
field as the final p hotog raph . Some single-lens
reflex cameras have a previewing m echanism
t hat lets you, if you wish , stop down the lens
to view t he scen e at t he taking aperture and see
how much will be sharp.
Unfortunately, if the lens is set to a very small
aperture, the stopped-down image on the viewing
screen may be too dark to be seen clearly. If so, or
if your camera doesn' t have a preview feature, you
may be able to read the near and far limits of good
foc us on a depth-。ιfield scale o n the lens barrel
(this page, bottom). Many newer autofocus lenses
don’t have them, but you can use tables showing
the depth of field for diffe rent lenses at vari。us
foc using dis tances and f二stops. Such tables were
origi nally printed in books, now 。n l ine and pore-
able calculators and smartphones provide the
same infc口rmati
A rangefinder 。r viewfinder camera sh。叭,s
you t h e scene throug h a small window in t he cam-
era body throug h which all o同ects l。ok equally
sharp. S。me digital cameras without a viewfinder
w indow let you zoom in to a test shot on the
m。nitor to judge depth of field verγaccurately.
You can also use a depth-of-field scale o n th e lens
46 LENS
barrel, a printed table, or a calculator to estimate
depth of fie ld with these cameras as well. An elec-
tronic vie叫nder can preview depth of fie ld.
Zone focusing for action. Know the depth
of field in advance wh en you want to preset t he
lens to be ready for an action s hot wi thou t last-
m inu te foc using. Zone focusing uses a table o r
the depth-of-field scale o n the lens to preset
manual focus and apenure so that the action wi ll
be ph。tographed well with in t he depth of field
(see below and吨ht).
Depth of fie ld
,_叫
Aperture ring lines up
opposite the p。incerco
show the aperture to
which the lens 咀 S旺
Distance scale lines up
。pp。site the pointer co
sh。W the distance from
the came阻 to the most
sharply focused obj旺E
Depth·of-field scale
lines up 。pp。site the
d略目nce scale to sh。w
the range 。f distances
that 叫II be sharp at
咀rious apertures
Chris阳•ph Oberschneider.
Dolomi胆ι /ta仇 2015.
With zone focusing you con
be ready for an action shot句y
manual.ψfocusing in ad时nee,
if you know a~pro刀mate如
where the action will take
place. Suppose you are on
a ski slope and you want to
photograph a skier coming
down the hill. 7百en阳的回t
point at which you m也•ht
want阳阳ke the picture is 1 5
作 (4.5 m) from the action;
the farthest is 30 fi. 伊m).
Line up the distance scale
so that these t附dis臼nces are
opposite a pair off stop indico-
阳rson阳depth、offield scale
(wi伪 the lens劝own at Jefi,
the two distances fall opposite
伪e f/ 16 indico阳rs). No吨扩
your aperture is坦t to f/ 16,
例伊fiing(rom 15/i. 臼 30/i.
(4.5-9 m) will be wi伪的价e
depth of field and in如us. It
doesn't matter阳彷呻ere
伪e subject is when you shoot,
aslo,结as it is somewhere
within th田e distances. Pre-
facus an autofocus Jens 句yaim
ing at a spot the same distance
the actio, will be and holding
the shutter but缸,,down half
way until you frame and pr,由
此then田t of the way.
Ansel Adams. Te阳nsand
the Snake River, \,\少·oming,
1942. Tl』e smaller the
aperture the greater the
depth of field. Every伪ingin
the picture at r也·ht is sharp.
Adams usually used a ν'iew
臼mera (page 11 ), which
offers additional control over
focus, and he preferred i缸
la’y,e-format film for making
prints of greater clarity.
View cameras are a/w.φe
used on a tripod. Even if you
are using a small camera, a
tripod is a good idea to avoid
motion blur when the aper-
ture is small and the shutter
speed且corre.与pondingly slow.
Focu sing fo r the g reatest d e p t h o f fie ld .
When you are shooting a scene t hat includes
importan t objects at a distan ce as well as close
u p, you will want m axi mum depth of fie ld.
Sh own in t he box a t righ t is a way of setting the
lens to p凹mit as m uch as possible of the scene
to be sh arp. It is easy if you h ave a lens that h as
a depth-。ιfield scale. If n ot, you can look up the
depth of fie ld in a printed table or by using a
depth of fie ld applicati
Depth-of-field tables list,
for each lens focal length,
向using distance, and
aperture, the near and far
limits of good focus and the
hype,而cal distance 仰e the
box at right). At one time
on/ya时ilable as a lengthy
book, a full set of depth-
of-field tables can now be
downloaded as an app (a
soft,.彻·are program) for your
smartphone You can have
complete focus information
han咿whe陪同ryou are.
At lefi 且 Simple D·。-F
Calculat。r on an iPhone.
°"'"'°'"'" - ' I -一-·· 一· ·
[ 可 :‘飞飞飞 、..飞】
! ‘ :.‘叫“咱啕1
. 非,oo -雷; -
u,到一 m ' •
.- ' ' πτ-m宁?斗: 11
• 2'" B“回唱……a "'山 ·.. ............ ..
When the lens is focused at infini飞y ( oo on the lens
distances臼l纱, everything at some distance away and farther
will besha’p: with this lens at f/22 everything will be sharp
斤。mSOβ (16 m) to infinity ( as far as 伪eeye 臼n see).
。剑”hol蝠,e
”- ”
’ 一,
飞川、‘喝喝喝’‘
飞 :.呗飞飞咱也 w
m: 望 臼咽.”
" 口 。5 到吁,啊
: ' .,,,.『仲,...,-+
E二二二二二二二3
You can incr时M伪e depth of field even more if, instead of
focusing on infini,饥you set the infinity marlc ( oo) opposite伪e
point on 伪edep仇。of-field scale (2勾thatsho昭 the f-stop you
are using (f/22). 沟uarenow向W盟donadi剧nce(SO仇 16m)
sl,拗tly closer伪an infinity (,缸chni,臼l世臼fled 伪e hyperfc。由I
distanc钞 Noweve,ythingfrom 23 ft. (7 m) to the far切ck
ground is within the depth of field and will be sharp in the image.
R 2 e 4 7
Perspecti-℃e
HOW A PHOTOGRAPH SHOWS DEPTH
Perspective: 由e im p r ess ion of d e pth . Few
lenses (except t h e fis heye) n oticeably d istort t h e
scen e t hey sh ow. T h e perspective in a ph oto-
graph -th e apparent size an d shape of 。同ects
and the im pressio n of dept h-is what you wo uld
see if you were standing at t he camera position.
Why then do some photographs seem to h ave an
exaggerated depth , wit h the su bject appearing
s t retched and expanded (th is page, cop), wh ereas
oth er photograph s seem to sh ow a compressed
space, with objects crowded very close together
(t h is page, bot tom)? T h e brai n j u dges depth in a
ph。tograph m ostly by compari鸣。均ects in t h e
foregro u nd with those in the background; t he
greater t h e size differences perceiv时, the great盯
the im pressio n of depth. 飞:Vhen viewi ng an actual
scen e, t he brai n has other clues to t h e d is ta nces.
Bu t, when looking at a ph otograph , t he brai n
relies primarily on relative sizes.
P e rs p ective can b e cont ro lle d in a p hoto -
g ra p h . Any lens verγ close to th e fo reground
of a scene increases the impression of depth by
increasing the size of foregroun d o均ects rela-
tive to objects in the background. As shown o n
the opposite page, perspective is no t a仔ected by
changing t h e focal length of the lens if the camera
rem副ns in the same posit ion. Ho,,四ver, the rela-
tive sizes of objects do change山he dis tance from
lens to su均ect is changed
Perspective 国n b e exa ggerated if you change
both focal length and lens-to-su均ect distance. A
shore-focal-length lens used close to the su均ect
increases di仔erences in size because it is much
closer E。 foreground o悖cts th an to those in t he
background. T h is increases the impression of
dept h. D is tances appear expanded an d sizes an d
shapes m ay appear distorted.
The opposite e仔ect occurs w it h a lo ng-
focal-lengt h lens used far from the subject.
Differences in sizes are decreased because the lens
is relatively far from all o均eccs. Th is decreases t he
apparent depth and sometimes seems to squeeze
objects into a sm aller space than t hey could
occupy in real ity.
48 L E NS
Walter looss. Ali 昭. Terrell, Houswn, 1967. Expanded perspective seems w
result from the very wide lens. But using a’!Y阳s 伪h close to a su协ct stretches
distan臼s because it magnifies objects near阶e lens 巾 relation 臼 those that are
far from the lens
Walter looss. 100 m s扭’变, Los Angeles, 1983. Compressed perspective is
usual归阴阳tedwi阶a long-focal-阳,gth lens. It is because the lens is relati时#
far from both foreground and background that size differences between near and
far parts of the scene are minimized, as is the impression of depth.
Changing focal length alone does not
change perspective-the apparent size or
shapeofo侬础。r阶eir apparent position in
dep伪 In the photographs above, the 臼mera
was not moved, but the lens focal length was
increased. As a result, the size of all the ob-
jects increased at a comparable rate. Notice
that the size of the fountain and the size of
the windo附in the background both change
the same amount. 7百eimp用坦ionofdep阶
remains the same.
Lens·阳-subject distance controls perspec·
tive. Perspective is changed when the distance
from the lens 阳。向;ects 巾伪e scene is changed.
Notice how the size of the fountain gets much
b也u while the size of the windo附remains
about the same. η,edep阶seems 归 increase
because the camera was brought closer to the
nearest part of the su向;ect.
di
.盖章
ER 2 e 49
Lens Attαchments
CLOSE-UPS AND FILTERS
A macro lens is your best
choice for sha’p c/ose·uf鼠 If
you don’t have one, there are
other w咿S归get dose.
C rose-up equipm en t, some of which is shown
on the right, will let you m ove in ve1y close to a
SU均ect. T h e closer your camera is to a su均ect, the
larger the image on the sensor or film. A close-up
is an i mage 。n the light-sensitive surface from
about V10 life size ( 1:10) to life size ( 1: 1). Macr萨
photograp吃y refers to an image that is anywhere
fro m life size (1: 1) co as big as ten ti mes life size
( 10: 1 ). Photo-micrograp抄 uses a microscope to get
an image larger than 10: 1.
D epth o f fie ld is s h allow in close-ups. T h e
closer the lens comes to the subject, the narrower
the depth of field (the more the background and
foregro und go o u t of focus). Focusing manually
and moving the camera slightly forward o r back
may help to get precise focus ing. Smaller aper-
rures for increased depth of fie ld will increase the
exposure time; a t ripod (used with a cable rel ease,
remote trigger,。r self-timer) will prevent camera
motion during exposure.
Incr eased exposures a r e a lways n eed ed fo r
close-ups. Regardless 。f the m ethod-a macro
lens, extension mbes, 。E a bellows-the lens must
move farther from th e sensor o r fi lm to focus
50 L E N S
closer to a subject. Bu t the more the lens is
extended, the d immer the light that reaches t h e
lig h t-sensitive surface, and the more exposure you
need so t h e result will n ot be under口posed.
A camera that meters through the lens will
increase the exposure automatically. But if the
close-up attachment breaks the automatic coupling
between lens and came问 you must incre臼e th e
exposure m臼mally, follow the recommenda口。ns
given by the manufacturer of the rubes or bellows.
Lighti ng close-ups. D irect ligh t on a subject can
let you use smaller apertures fo r greater depth of
field. To bring out texture, angle light across t h e
subject from the s由 to pick 。ut eve1y ridge and
crease. D irect lig h t can be ve1y contrasty, t h o ugh,
with bright h ighligh ts and coo-dark shadows. If
this is the case, fi ll lig h t can h elp ligh ten th e shad-
ows (pages 142- 143). C lose-up subjects are small,
so usi ng even a lett er-sized p iece of wh ite paper as
a reflector can lig h ten shadows significan tly.
To copy a fla t su均ecr, such as a page fro m
a book, lig h ting sh ould be even. Two ligh ts of
equal intens呵,。ne o n each side of the subject
an d at the same d istance and angle, will illumi-
nate it uniformly.
如
A close-up lens at·
tach由to the front of a
camera lens. They come
in strengths measured
in diopters; 阶ehigher
阶e diopter number,
the closer you can
focus. Close-up fen蜘are
relative.仙e略地·nsiveand
small, but image quality
will not be as good as with
other methods.
Bellows ( and similar臼-
tension tub出:) fit between
the lens and the camera
to increase the distance
from the lens to the sen-
sor or film, the greater
this dis臼,,ce, the closer
you 臼n bring the lens
M阶e SU句ect. Extension
tubes come in fixed siz,臼J
a bellows is more adapt·
able be剧,se it can be
由:ponded to any length.
Usingei阶er will require
increasing the a平由ur电
see伽缸剧协ve left.
Laurisa Calvan. Cold teeth, Dallas, T,田:as,
2011. Cetting close can o~en make the
strongest photograph, as in thι image
。fa man showingo厅his “'grill" in South
Central Dallas. Although not then a resident,
Gal阳n began to document the notorious
neighbo础。od for an assignment in her college
photography class. Now a dai.非fixture on the
street corners and accepted as a local, she has
continued the project for several years.
With。”愈 polarizing filter
A fi lter can b e a useful camera M醋。早
Glass filters attach to the front 。f the lens and
are made in sizes to fit various lens diameters. T o
find the diameter of your lens, look on the ring
eng raved around the front of the lens. The diam-
eter (in mm) usually follows the symbol 0. Less-
expensive, but fragile, gelatin filters are available
that can be cut to size with scissors and taped in
place over the lens or held with an adapter.
Expos ure m u st increase when fi lters a r e
used. Filters work by removing some of the light
that passes throug h them; you must increase the
exp。sure to prevent underexposure. A thrnugh-
the-lens meter sh。uld compensate accurately, but
check your camera’s response with a test shot.
Look at 巾 histogram (pages 60- 61) and a中lSt
the settings manually, if needed. Using a hand-
W抽 polarizing伽.,
Wiren shooting /andscap吨 using a polar-
izing filter mak臼dis阳nt o向;ects clearer and
the sky darker, 町的伪e由ampleabo昭r也•ht.
The effect is stront出t when you are shooting
ata 90。 angle to the sun
Reflections are a distracting element in
this photograph (above, lefi) ofa dimetrodon
inside the museum case. A polarizing filter on
the 臼mera lens removed most of the re flee-
tions (above, 鸣•ht) . The filter works b臼tat a
30°-40~nt}e to the reflecting surface.
held meter, read filter instrnctions for a rec。m
mended exposure increase in stops or a filter fac-
tor that tells how many times the exposure should
be increased
A polarizing fi lter can remove re何ections.
If you have ever phot。graphed through a store
window and got more of the reflections from
the street than whatever you wanted to photo-
graph inside the store, you know how distracting
unwanted reflections can be. Using a polarizing
filter is a way to eliminate some of these reflec-
tions (see photographs at left, bottom). The filter
eliminates or decreases reflections from glass,
wat凹, or any smooth nonmetallic surface.
Lands国pes c四 be s harper and clearer w ith
a polarizing fi lter. Light reflected from particles
of water vapor or dust in the atmosphere can
m汰e a landscape look hazy. A polarizing filter
will decrease these minute reflections and allow
you to see more distant details. It may also help
to make colors purer and more vivid by dimin-
ishing unwanted col。ring such as reflections of
blue light from the sky. And using a polarizer will
darken the sky (see the photographs above lefr).
A polarizing filter works best a t certain
ang les; it attaches to the front of the lens and can
rotate to increase or decrease the effect. Changing
the angle E。 the subject also affects the polar iza-
t
through the lens lets you see in the viewfinder d飞e
effect 。f the filter; a test exposure 、飞lilt sho即 it i n
a m。nitor. Adjust your position or the filter until
you get the results you want.
Neutral-d ens ity (ND)何lters remove a fixed
quantity of light from all wavelengths, conse-
quently reducing the overall amount of light that
reaches the lens. These filters make it possible to
use a slower shutter speed or larger aperture than
you othen•飞.,ise could. For example, 还you want to
blur action but can’t use a slower shutter speed
because you are already set to the lens’ smallest
aperture and your camera's lowest ISO, an ND
filter over the lens has the effect of dimming the
light, letting you then set a slower shutter speed.
Similarly, if you want to decrease depth 。f field
but are already set to your fastest shutter speed
and lowest ISO, an ND filter would let you 。pen
the aperture wider.
R 2 e 51
J,w’ER MANZANO I Sensors and Pixels .. ...... ..... 54
Two rebel 皿ldiers in秒巾guarding their I
sni,严内 nest in the Korme协bl ne伊bo呻时, I Pixels and Resolution .… …… 55
Alepp乌勃巾, 2012. I Color in Photography. … …… 56
Color systems ....... ...... ..... 56
Color characteristics . . ...... ..... 57
Overriding an Automatic
Exposure Camera .......... ... 66
Making an Exposure
of an Average S cene ........ ... 68
Exposing S cenes that are Lighter
White Balance ...... ...... ..... 58
or Darker than Averag e .... ... 70
Using Histograms .. ...... ..... 60
Exposure Meters ... ...... ..... 62
\Vhatd.好'erent types do ...... ..... 62
Ho即to calculate and叫;"st
an expo闲时man11ally ..... ..... 64
Backlighting .... ........... ... 72
Exposing S cenes
witl卫 High Contrast ........ ... 73
HDR ..... ...... ........... ... 74
HigJ叫ynamic range .......... ... 74
3 国。Ur u su o p-- X
E
αnd Light
Y~'~! sor 阻四posed to light, a change oαu臼 that can be 阳orded and saved Light is rt、e visible P盯t of the elec口咀ma』口1etic ener窃F that 阻is臼 m a
con口nuum from radio w寇vεs巾oughv阻ible lig归E to cosm rays. T hese energy
forms differ only in thei r "咀velength, the distance from the crest of one wave
to the crest of the n四E T he visible p缸t of this spectrum, the light that we se妃,
阳1ges between 400 and 700 nanometers (billio n ths of a me阳) i n wa町length.
Expos ing your piαu陀s correctly (that is, setting the sh utt er speed and
aper叽tr s。 they let in the correct 副11ount of lig如E fo r a given ISοand scene)
m冰es a big difference if you want a rich image with realistic tones, dark but
Light is energy. When certain 附时l时,gths of ene’-gJ strike the detailed shadO\凹, and brigh t, delicate highligh巴, inst四d of a too dark, murky
human 。毡, th吃yarepe明白ved as Jig由t Digital血nsors (and fi阳J picture or a picture that is bar叶y visible because it is too light.
。h回nge when struck by 伪市归叫ofthe e仰tromagnetic ene~
spect,阳m. 5-0阴阳n re.平ond 阳additional附ve.阳,gths阳t the eye At the simplest level, you can let your automatic camera set the sh utter
臼nnot s,时, such as ultraviolet and 巾(rared 炮声t speed and aperture for y咀U If your camera has manual settings, 归u can calcu-
late t hem by us ing a hand-held or builr-i口口posure meter to make an o四时l
reading of the scen e. You can even use a simple chart of general exposure rec-
ommendations like the 。neon page 7. In many cases, th ese standardized pro-
cedures wi ll give you a satisfactory exposure. But standa rd procedures don’t
work in all 剖ruations. If the light source is behind t he su均ect, for example,
an overall reading will 剖lhouette the s ubjec t against the brighter background.
T h is may n。E be what you w n t.
You will h ave more cont 1 ol ov盯 your piccures-and be happier wi th the
results-if you know how to nterpret t he information your camera or m eter
1 ai provid臼 andαn adjust the e们mmended 口posure to get any variatio n you
... choose. You will then be abk tc select what you wan t to do in a specific situa-…. ti。n rather than exposi ng at ·a1 dom and hoping for the best.
·;卢--…”…111111""'’-.
rd
In th is ch apter yo,i'Ll ie
。
Center响i垫ted Meter
A center-weighted meter favors the l也’ht
level of the central ar,臼ofan image, which
is often the m出t important one 阳meter.
Cameras with built-in meters usually use
some form of center we也•hting.
A multi-segment meter is the most
sophisticated of the meters built into a cam-
era. It divides the scene into areas that are
metered 巾dividua似 then analyzed against
a series 。fpatterns stored in the 臼mera’s
memory. 7百e resulting exposure is more
likely to avoid problems such as under,呻0-
sure ofa su向;ect against a 时,yb斤。tsky.
3 自 63
EJ.;posure Meters
HOW TO CALCULATE AND ADJUST
AN EXPOSURE MANUALLY
H o w do you calculate a nd 叫ust a n expo –
s ure m a nua lly? Even if you have an automatic
exposure camera, it will help you to kn。w how
to do so. Many automatic cameras do not 口pose
correctly for backlit scenes or other simations
where the overall illumination is not “ average,’’
and you will need to know how much and in what
direction co change the camera’s settings co get
the results you want.
This page shows the way a hand-held meter
works. It is likely you will never use one or even
hold one in your hand. But once you grasp its
operation, you will know how any meter func-
tions, whether built into a camera or separate
and hand-held. It’s also useful to understand that
the functi。ns of your camera and those of a light
meter, even the one inside your cam盯a, are inde-
pendent from one another. Pages 68-73 tell how
to use any meter for different types of scenes.
Exposure = Intensity × Time. Exposure ts a
combination of the intensity of light that reach-
es the light-sens山ve surface (controlled by the
size of巾 apert旧e) and the length of time 巾
light strikes it (c。ntrolled by the shutter). You
can a句ust the exp。sure by changing the shutter
speed, aperture, or both.
Exposure changes are m easur ed in s tops, a
doubling (。E halving)。f the exposure. A change
from one aperture (ιstop) to the n四E larger aper-
mre opening, such as from f/ 5.6 to 帆, doubles
the light reaching the sensor (or 日lm) and results
in one stop more exposure. A change from one
shutter speed to the next slower speed, such as
from 1/2so sec. to 1/12s sec., also results in one stop
more exposure. A change co the next smaller
aperture or the next faster shutter speed halves
the light and produces one stop less 四posure.
Doubling the illumination in a r。。m would als。
be referred to as a one-stop change.
It is worth your effmt co mem。rize theιstop
and shutter-speed sequences, at least the whole-
stop ones (see the box on page 2份, so you know
64 LI G ” T A ND EX P OSU R E
Pow理r Switth
M。de Switch
Changes fi-om
continuous light
(like dayl唱ht) to
elecct。nic fl ash
The f-stop se国ngs
a吨。ne stop apa". 印S
lets in half as much light
asη5.6. Rememberchat
the lower the f•number,
the larger the lens
apeπu吨, and so the
mo,e l唱H let into the
can、era
ISO but宜。”, speed
阳tings double each
cime the sensitivity
。fthe sensor (。rof白Im)
doubles. A seccing of ISO
400 险。ne stop 龟sterchan
a seccing of ISO 200 It needs
only half as much l唱k as does ISO 200.
which way to move the controls when you are
faced with an exposure you want co bracket or
otherwise adjust.
Bracketing helps if you are n o t sure a b o ut
t h e exposu re. To bracket, you make several
photographs of the same scene, increasing and
decreasing the exposure by adjusting the aper-
mre or shutter speed. Among several different
exposures, there is likely to be at least one that
is correct. It’s not just beginners who bracket
exposures. Professi。nal ph。tographers 。fren do
it as protection against having to repeat a wh。le
shooting session because none of their exposures
was quite right.
To bracket, first make an exposure with the
aperture and shutter speed set by the automatic
system or manually set by you at the combination
you think is the right one. Then make a second
shot with one stop more 四posure and a third
shot with 。ne stop less exp。sure. This is easy to
do if you set the exposure manually: for one stop
more 口posure, 的ther set the shutter to the next
Shutter speeds
are 。内e stop
apaπA shuccer
speed of Vm臼C
lets in 队.vice as
much light as a
shuccer speed 。f
Viso sec
Reads 份-actions
in between the
wh。le f-stop
seccings
A hand-held exposure
me缸瓦 L吵t striking this
meter’s /,也•ht-sensiti,昭
pho阳electric cell ,,由ults in
the di.平lay of an fstop and a
shutter speed on i臼electronic
disp/.咿l window. You set the
ISO and shutter speed, and
it calculates the correct ap-
erture for a normal exposure
in l也ht of that intensity. An
au阳mat,cexp出ure camera
performs the same calcula-
tion for you, using a light
meter built into the camera
Most current hand-held
meters will also calculate
exposures when you are using
electronic flash (s四pages
146-149) or mixing flash
withdaylighι
Bracketin又 Exposures
e -nc h
E
O
o
m
M1
0
·“ 别
e
r
‘-
m
a口
UUE e jmM a3 ·nu
rh
J
U
它
nu ase r
o
w
-m
呻
m
emo
–
P
–
J
川
剧
a
Ee6 csi u0
1
·
n
u
n
V俨?
”
。
n
v
t
wua FSd ge H
eE
M
响
P
’
t
es
h
EH
c
e
工
m
mM
B
E
计
Original exposure
1/ 8 1/ 15 1/30 1/ 60 1/ 125 1/ 250 1/ 500 sec.
f/ 16 f/ 11 f/8 f/5.6 例可2.8 们
T。bracket for 。ne stop less exp。sure, which would darken
the scene, keep the shutter speed at l也o sec while changing
to the next smaller aperture, f/ 8. (Or keep the original f/ 5.6
aperture 、而ile changing to the ne班faster shutter speed,
]i\2s sec.)
Bracketed for 。ne stop less exposure
1/ 8 1/ 15 1/30 1/ 60 1/ 125 1/ 250 1/ 500 sec.
可16 町11 f/8 f/5.6 例可2.8 们
T。bracket for 。ne stop m。re exp。sure, which would
lighten the scene, keep the shutter sp四d at 驰。sec while
changing to the next larger apertu吃仰(Or keep the origi-
nal f/ 5.6 aperture while changing to the next slower shutter
speed,均o sec.)
Bracketed for 。ne stop more exp。sure
1/ 8 1/ 15 1/30 1/ 60 1/ 125 1/ 250 1/ 500 sec.
f/16 可11 印8 f/5.6 例可2.8 们
s lower s p eed o r th e a p e rture to th e n ext la rger
open ing ( the n ext s m aller f-nu1巾er); for one s t op
less 四posure, e ither set the sh u tter to the n四t
fas te r speed or the a perture to t h e n ex t s maller
open ing {the n ext larger ιnumber).
How d o you bracket w it h an autom atic
exposure camera? I n autom atic operati。n, if
y。u change to the n ext larger aperture, the camera
may s imply sh ift to the n ext faster s hutter speed,
resu lting in the sam e overall 四posure. Ins tead,
you have to override the ca m e ra ’s a u tom ati c sys-
te m . See p age 66 for how to do so. Som e cameras
can be set to m ake th ree bracke ted exp osures in
s uccessio n when you p ress t h e shutter 。nce.
Jack Delano. Union Station,
Chicago, 1943号 Bracketing
your臼:posures is useful
w由enyou are not sure 扩
an 臼:posure is correct or if
you want to see the results
from different exposures of
the same scene. Judging the
由:posure for this kind of
自tremefy contrasty s臼ne 臼n
be ve,y difficult; bracketed
由:posures give you a choice.
With more 由:posure in the
photograph at /efi, detail 时
the interior would have been
more visible but the beams
ofsunl敏t would lose their
drama. L阳已啡阳sure would
darken eve伊hing so people
on the benches would disap-
pear entirely.
3 自 65
οverriding αn Automαtic
Exposure Cαmerα
M any came r as w ith automatic 叫osure
h ave a m eans o f o verriding 由e a u tomatic
system when you wan t to increase th e exposu re
to ligh ten a picture or decrease the exposu re to
darken it . The ch ange in exposure is measured in
stops. A one-stop change in exp。sure wi ll double
(。r h alve) the amount oflight reaching the sensor
or fi lm. Each apenure or shutt er-speed setting is
one stop from t h e next setting.
Exp osure lock. An exposu re lock or memory
swi tch temporarily locks in an 四posure, so you
can move up close o r point the camera in a d能r
enr direction to cake a readi ng of a particular area,
lock in the desired setti ng, step back, and then
ph otograph the entire scene.
Exp osure compe nsation. Moving th is dial or
indicator to + 1 o r +2 increases the exposure by
one o r two stops and lightens the p icture. Moving
it to – 1 o r -2 decreases t he exposu re and darkens
the p icture. (Your camera may have a button you
m ust h old down whi le making th is change.)
B ack ligh t button . If a camera does not have
an exposure com pensatio n dial, it m ay have a
backlight b utton . Depressing t he bu tton adds
a fixed a m o u nt of exposu肥, 1 to 1 1在 stops,
Exposure I田k
Film speed/ ISO dial Manual m。de
66 LIG ” T A ND EX P O SURE
an d lig h tens the p icture. It cannot be used to
decrease exposure.
ISO se忧ing. Ch anging the ISO semng o n a
digi tal camera will change either apert ure o r sh ut-
ter speed bu t will n ot make the pictu re lig h ter
o r darker. Instead you will need to use th e but-
ran, dial, or men u item that controls exposure
com pensation. You can set the can1era to 四pose
all your photographs at a fixed amou nt more o r
less than th e m eter indicates, or you can make an
exposure change for o n e picture at a t ime.
Setting the ISO o n a fil m camera doesn’t
change the light sensitivity of the fi lm, so you can
change the 口posure (if the camera allows you to
set an ISO manuall沙 by changi ng t he fil m speed
setti ng. The camera responds as if the fi lm were
slower or fas ter t han it really is. Doubling th e fi lm
speed (for example, fro m ISO 100 to ISO 200)
darkens t he picture by decreasing the exposure
o ne stop. Halvi ng the 在lm speed (say from ISO
400 to ISO 20创 lightens the picture by increasing
the exposure o ne stop.
M a nua l mode. Wit h an au tomatic camera that
has a man ual mode, you adjust t he sh utter speed
an d apert ure yourself. You can increase or decrease
the exposure as you w ish.
One or more means of changing
the exposure are found on most
臼meras. 7百ese features let you
。时rrideau归matic exposure when
you want 阳d。如. Don’t forget to
reset伪e camera to its normal mode
of operation after the picture is made.
AdamEkbe’-g. Vacuum on a Frozen lake,
Maine, 2005. Low I也-ht exposures can be
difficult to z时right. You 臼n use manual
’”ode to set the shut胆r写peed and aperture,
but be sure 归bracket if you can. Ekbe.吃gu且da
meter, and then made 由posures from b告臼 30
seconds 阳be certain he 臼p阳red阶e balance
of warm incand,配制t I,吵t from the vacuum
时阶thecool l缺t of dusk. He tossed his family’s
Eureka on阳the surface of a frozen 归kefrom
outside the frame so there would be no foo月pri,,臼
to disturb this absurdist image.
3 自 67
Mαking αn Eχposure
of αn A℃erαge Scene
W h at e xactly d o you n eed t o do t o pro-
duce a good e xpos ure? How do you choose
one that lets just enough light into the camera s。
that the image is n ei ther underexposed, making
the picture m。 dark, nor overexposed, making the
p icture too light? All meters built in to camer缸,
and most hand-held meters, measure reflected
light: the lighme目。r darkness of o均ects (but not
their color). In many cases, you can si mply point
the camera at a scene, activate the meter, and set
the 四posure (or let t h e camera set it) accordi n gly.
A re何ected-light m eter averages t h e ligh t
enteri ng its angle of view. The meter is calibrated
on t he assumptio n that in a n average scene all the
tones or values-dark, medi um, and light-will
average o ut to the value of a medium gray. s。
the meter and 1cs circuitry set, or recommend, an
exposure that will record all of t h e lig h t refle.c-
tances that it is reading by centering them around
a middle gray.
This works well if y。u are p hotographing an
“ average” scene, o n e that has an average d is tri-
68 LIG ” T A ND EX P O SURE
bution of light and dark areas, and if the scen e is
evenly illuminated 臼 viewed from camera posi-
tion, that is, when the ligh t is coming m ore or
less fro m behind you or when the lig h t is even ly
diffused over the entire scene (like巾ph。rograph
above). See opposite for how to meter th is type 。f
average 。r low-contrast scene
A m eter ca n b e foo le d , however, if your subject
is illum inated from behir (backlit
by a much lighter area, s uch as a bright sky,。E by
a much darker area, such as a large dark s hadow.
Even a flarly lit scene can present an 口pos ure
challenge if it is n o t a good balance between lig h t
a nd dark areas. See pages 70-73 for what to do in
s uch cases.
Deborah Willis. Trail of
Tears, 2001. Scenes in dif
fused l’.ght can be exposed
well with an overall read-
in』L for田·ample, an o时r臼st
day, outdoors in the shade
like 伪is, or indoors when the
light is coming from se时rat
light sources. Di,庐sed light
is indirect and soft. Shado附
are not as dark as they would
be 巾direct l也ht.
比Ii/Ii.ι a long-time
resident of New York City,
m写ponded to 阶espon阳ne
ous memorials around her
city with her series 911 节咀
Day A仕er, 9/ 12/2001 , 阶at
includes this photograph.
A d也·ital camera’s
preview or an editing
histogram of the scene
on this page would look
like the one at left. A
histogram is a visual dispi吃y
of the w吧y tones are distrib –
uted in an image. Aat, even
illumination usually makes a
histogram that fi臼all tones
comfo刷blywi伪巾 the avail-
able latitude. 7百is one sho昭
a decline to the baseline at
both ends indicating伪at
all the tones have been
captured. The rise at the left
indicat,由slightly more dark
阳nes than middle or I,也·ht
ones. O昭ra/1 it is relatively
fla电 characteristic of an a时产
age subject in soft I.也•ht, the
result of an almost equal
distribution of tones斤。m
dark to l也ht.
Using a meter built into a camera for exp。sure of an average scene
1 臼leer an ISO and set it in the camera. Some 白In neras d。 th…。
marically when you load the 白Ir>1
2灿ct 巾 exp… mode: a…aric (ape…prior
priority, 。r programmed) or manual. Activate the meter as you look a t
d飞e subject in the viewfinder.
3 In aperru陀-pri
select a shutter speed; mal
The most common in digi tal ph otography is the
RGB mode in which all colors are made by com-
bi ning the prima1y colors red, green, an d blue
(more about pri mary colors on page 56). CM而
m。de (cyan, magenta, yellow, and K for black),
used by graphic artists, combines the ink colors
used in commercial print ing.
Three numbers a re e no ugh t o d escribe the
color of any pixel in 四 RGB colo r image.
In t hat mode, o ne nu m ber (between O and 255)
is a measure of th e amount of red in a given
pixel, o n e is the amount of green, and o ne is
the am。unt of blue. A pixel t ha t is part 。f the
im age of a slightly warm -toned concrete bu ild-
ing in afternoon sunlight m ig h t be described as
202, 186, 144. T h at pixel contains some red,
somewhat less green, and even less blue. (If all
three n u m bers were t h e same, t he color would be
a neutral gray.)
You can ’ t p r int a ll t h e colo r s you can see.
All digital capture o r display devices-cameras,
scan ners, m on itors, and p rinters-are slig htly lim –
ited when compared to h uman vis io n . T h e color
gamut (a color space) of a device is the total of all
the colo rs it can accept or produce. Kn owing the
extent of th is gamu t is usefol because it is always
82 DIG ITAL WORKPLAC E BA S IC S
smaller than the gamut of h uman vision; it tells us
what col。rs we can see bu t can’t reproduce. More
importantly, the gam uts of various devices and
m aterials are different from each other. F。r exam-
pie, you can capture some colors with your can1era
that a m o nitor can ‘ t d isplay. And your screen can
show you some colors you can’t reproduce with a
pri nting press (or your inkjet printer).
Each im age carries with it a w orking s pace,
a gam ut that sh ould be slig h tly larger than all t h e
o ther gamu臼(mon ito飞 printer, etc.) to allow for
t ranslatio ns fro m o ne to ano ther w ithout loss.
Software (in its Color Settings or Pr.价rences d ialog
box) assigns or lets you assig n each docum ent a
colo r space-use Adobe RGB (1998) or Pro Photo RGB
if you expect to print the image, sRGB for the Web
or han d-held devices.
Profiles trans late one g amut into ano由er.
No two prin ters, fo r example, have t h e san1e
gamut- they can’t reproduce exactly t h e san1e
range of colors. In ord盯 to be able to print the
same photograph on two diffe ren t pri nters and
ma!也 the two prints look as m uch alike as possi-
ble, you need a profile t h at describes each gamut.
An outp ut profile accompanies each fi le you send
to a p rinter and adjus臼 that photograph to t h e
individual colo r ch aracteristics of th at printer.
A mo nitor profi le standard izes what you see o n
your screen so your picture I。。ks the same ( o r very
cl。se to the same) o n any profil ed mo nitor.
A gamut is all the colors
a device can render. 7百h
伪ree-dimensiona/ uaph
represents the gan”’t ofa
’”。nitor, white at the 阳p and
black at the bottom. Colors
farthest out from the vertical
axis are the most saturated.
l缸outer edges, p句iected be-
lowi电 are the limits of what
此时n accurately reproduce.
Three channels contain the visual
information in a color photograph. 7百e
record ofbr也’htness (or luminance) in each
primary回归r channel (here red, green,
and blue) lets you see the image in full color
(belo吵, each color separately, or臼ch
individual color image converted to black
and white (below r,也·ht).
Three channels produce three
different black-and-white
photographs and iν·eyou more
choices when you want to conve时
a color image to black and white.
The red channel (r,妙。 is the
smoothest and most flattering
rendering of the man’s face. Green
and blue have more contrast and
gi,时 the face more texture.
X
Layers Channels
。 脯’
。 阳“
。 e”’由
·•阳
口
“
噩
”2
篇S
”4
X5
也 由
CHANNELS
A digi时 color im age is m a d e up of seve ral
black-and-white ones. A p hotograph o n cradi-
tion al color fi lm or a colo r print in a darkroom
is recorded on three superimposed layers; each is
actually a black-and-white ph。tograph rendered in
one pri m ary color by a dye. A d igital im age fi le in
color is t he same; every pixel h as a separate lum i-
nan ce (lightness) fo r each of three primary colors.
The lu m inan ce values of a single primary color in
a p hotograph can be viewed as a monochrom atic
im age (le丘). Image-editing software lets you see
and edi t each pri mary separately.
Digi tal cameras and scan ners capture in t he
red, blue, an d green addi tive primaries. Un less
specified otherwise, th is bo。k o n ly discusses imag-
es in the RGB mode. Software can convert t hose to
CMYK (the cyan, magenta, an d yellow subtra
pri’naries wi th black) in preparatio n f口E com mer-
cial printing i口 ink.
Your RGB photog r a ph h as three chan n els ;
each com prised of the values of a single prim缸y
color. A s ingle ch annel can be displayed as a m o no-
chrom atic photograph, usually in black an d wh ite
(called grayscale). Photosh op uses a channels palette
(see le丘, top), wh ich gives 归u the option of see-
ing t he red chan nel, for 四ample, in shades of red
instead of grayscale as sh own . In addit io n to seeing
each chann el separately, you can perform most of
Ph oroshop’s image adjustments on any one chan-
nel independencly. Workflo即 programs divide an
im age into channels o n ly in a histogram and allow
on ly limi ted s ingle-chan nel adjustments.
M o re ch a nnels can a dd m asks . When you want
to apply an adjustment to o ne part of an image an d
not an other (for example, maki ng someone’s face
lighter but n o t t h e backgroun d), Image-editing
software needs a m ap that tells it which areas you
wane adjusted. A n ew chann el called a m ask is
created and saved as part of t h e image file. Masks
are ordinarily no t visible but you can ch oose to
d isplay t hem for edi ting. Ph。tosh。p shows a mask
as white wh ere you want the image adjusted, black
wh ere you don’t, and gray wh ere you wan t o nly a
partial adjustment.
CHAPTER 4 ,( 83
Digitαl Color
CALIBRATING FOR ACCURACY
Y ou r monit or s hould b e calibrated, or made
co display colors in a s tandardized way. After cap-
curing a photograph, you will make most 。fyour
color and luminance decisions when looking at it
on your mo nitor. Bue monitors vary considerably
in the way they reproduce any specific set of color
numbers. Mon itors from different man ufacturers
will display colors differently; there are di仔er
ences even between m odels and sizes from the
same m冰er. In addi ci。n, the color response of an
individual mo nitor changes over time, the colors
drift. You need co know that the colors you see are
the right ones.
A p rofile alig n s a d evice t o a known standa rd.
In the case of a monitor, calibration generates a
profi le; the device is first characterized, mean ing its
color display behavior is measured. Th is measured
behavior is converted into a m。nitor profil e, a
data file that-once it is installed in the operating
syst凹n-corrects yom mo111tor’s uniq u e charac-
teristics so it matches a standard. For example, if
your monitor displays 202R, 186G , 144B darker
and more blue than it sho uld, the computer will
use the profile co make pixels with those nu mbers
appear the righ t amount lighter and more yellow.
Choose one stand ard fo r w hite point a n d
g amm a and calibrate your monitor to that. T h ere
are two common choices for each, used fo r dif-
ferenc casks and in different industries. Un less
y。u have specific workgroup requiremen臼, set a
gamma of2.2 and a 065 white point; they are best
for photograph ic printing.
Color m an agement is t he practice t hat assures
you o f consisten t a nd pred ictab le colors
throughout your work, from capture to o u tput.
Calibrating your mo nitor is an important starting
point; do so at least o nce a m onth , more often fo r
critical work. If you can, set up your workspace so
the environment and the lig hting are consistent.
Changes in ambient light while you are working
and even the reflections fro m colored walls and
clo thing can affect your perceptions of the colors
on a screen
84 DIG ITAL WORKPL A C E BA S IC S
Moni旬,骂, like televisions, should display
阶er,也ht colors. The wide-sc.附nW扭曲
on displ,吧yabo时are all being fed the same
s也ignal and should, in an ideal world, show the
san
the r也·ht colors). Your monitor can show ti与e
For more accura阳 resu/1缸,“se a伪ird-par飞r
ca/,汕m“ng program with a ho民dware “puck”
(a spectr。ph。t。"
res臼on!our sc,陪en and r,臼ds directly斤·omiι
Its supplied so卢、ψa,弩s声,,erates a measured set
ofcolo白, compares these,,如r垃 reading of what
isdispl,吧y,叫i and generates a monitor profile to
r也ht co/o町, d町urate colors, on如ifit has
been 臼librated-adjusted with a profi也阳
displ吨ycolors and归n由in a standardized
way. For casual picture-maldn阜 it is enough to
use the calibration utility that is part of your
computer’s operating system.
be swred in the computer垃operating system.
Make sure your moniwr is thorou1f,ly warmed
up (at least 30 minutes) before 臼librating.
Some 写pectrophotome阳句, like the one
shown belo吨 can also be used w genera阳an
output profile for a specific combination of
printe吃 ink, and paper (see page 11刁
Working with CαmerαRαw
LJ n derstan d ing a nd u s ing Cam era Raw何les
can make your photogr aphs better . A digital-
ly captu red picture is only abst ract data (see box
below) until it is 川erpreted co look like the scene
you ph。tographed. If you set your camera to save
p ictu res as TIFF or JPEG files , th is interpreting,
o r processing, is done by the camera. Most digital
cameras can only save in one or b。th of those
formats. Bu t if you rs can save Camera Raw fi les,
you can interpret t h e data you rselfl a ter. It is easy
to 巾, gives you m ore control, and can produce a
higher-quality final image.
to guide it fro m this startin g point. 飞:Vhite balan ce
(pages 57 and 58), for example, is n o t part of t he
sensor data, but of the in terpretation. The raw
fi le saves the settin g you (。r the camera in auto
mode) chose for each s h ot. That c h oice a仔ects the
p review, b u t you may pr。cess it to be d ifferent.
So食ware does the job . Most cameras marketed
to professionals and serious amateurs can record
and save raw files, a n d are sold wi t h software to
process and interpret t h em. After processin g, the
software will let you save the interpreted fi les in
another forma t (usually TIFF) that can be read by
。ther programs.
A work何ow application (page 8ηsaves your
interpretation along with (or in) the 自le as a set of
adjustment decision s, a n d leaves the raw data unal-
tered. Photosh op u ses a separate application called
Adobe Camera Raw (ACR) to in terpret and convert
th e fi le into Ph o toshop’s native PSD format. O n ce
a raw file is convert ed and saved in another format
1t cann o t be returned co its raw state
Cons ider con verting your raw 何les to O NG,
especially if you plan to use a work flow program.
Adobe’s Lightroom and Bridge will do th e con vert –
ing, 臼 will th凹r free ONG Converter program, if
you ch oose to manage and edit your files with other
s。frware. ONG preserves original sensor data in a
form more likely to be readable in the fu ture than
your camera’s proprietary raw format.
For most scenes, there is no absolutely “ cor-
rect” interpretation. The firs t im age you see of any
p ictu re is a preview that is only a pre programmed
guess at a n accurate in terpretation. It is u p to you
Processin2 a Raw Fi le
Se””’
photo sites
are m时,ed with
an a”ay of colored
filters in what is called
a 付Bayer array” or
’它吧yer filter mosaic.”
A digital 国何回阳’s sen目,曰”’t 飞回” color.
Instead, it captures an array 。f pixels that
is essentially a black-and -white photo-
graph. Each pixel’s value is based
。n the light that fell on 。ne
tiny photodi。de (see
page 54) . T,。 rec。rd
col。r, each 。f these
sensor cells is c。vered with
a red, green, or blue fi lter. Our
eyes are more sens’”ve to green, so
the array has twice as many green 而lters
as it has red 。r blue
Tod白play color, a new array is made h。m
the raw data. S。仕ware c陀ates a new pixel at
each intersecti。n of fou r photosites by calcu-
la ting ( called in缸,polatin!,) its brightness and
c。lor fr,。m the surrounding area (right)
Pixels showing a gray cat’s fur,而or
example, should have an RGB value in which
the three primary col。陌 are 。f approxi-
ma回ly equal brightness, even though each
photosite measures only red, green, or blue
With。ut processing, the cat’s fur would
appear speckled in primary-c。lor pi四Is
Luminance (lightness and darkn四s) must
be pro但ssed al。”gwi由 colo陌 for captured
data to look like the photog日ph y。u visual-
ized The sensor’s cells d。 not respond to
changes in illumination in the same way 。ur
eyes do, especially in highlights and shad-
。ws In四rpreting the raw data must reshape
the brightness values considerably, as y。u
might byυsing Ph。toshop’s Curves adjust-
ment (pages 96-97), in a more extreme 四F
si。n 。f the curve on page 96, top.
A ” image m出现e 伪rowgha
Bayer a”ay must be processed
阳g时each pixel a fi,/1-Ctllor value.
lnterpreti~g the Ct1lor is called
dem。坦icing.
C H A PT E R 4 ,( 85
Sti1,y οrgαnized
SETTING UP A WORKFLOW
A workflow is an oψnized s e rie s of steps
leading to a desired result. The image-editing
WO此flow o n page 110 is an example of the a司just
ment seeps using Ph otoshop chat lead fro m a raw
scan or camera file to an image with the desired
colors and tones. Follow t h e more comprehen-
s ive series of steps below to ensure that you get
through th e entire process of digital photography
with t he results you want.
Capo.』 re your p hotographs: expose t h e image
sensor or film. Capture is wha t most people t hink
ph otography is all about-shooting an d camera
wor k-but there’s more to it than that.
Down lo a d (also called impo时 or ingest) y。ur
im ages from the mem。1y card of your camera
(。r from a scanner) in to a computer so you can
c。mplete t he rest of t he steps. T h e computer is
the comman d center for all th e operations of your
wor kflow. D。叭吼loading the im ages to your com-
pu ter’s hard drive also frees the camera’s mem ory
card E。 be reused. Scan ned im ages are sent directly
fro m the scan ner to t he computer.
C onvert your Camera Raw files to ONG (option-
al). As part of a Cam era Raw Workflow, you may
wish to convert your d igital camera’s proprietary
raw fi les into the m ore generic ONG fo rmat
(pages 81 an d 85).
Organize your images, keeping in mind t hat you
may soon have thousands. Pages 131 and 132 d is-
cuss ways to ma!世 sure you can fi nd the needles
in your haystack. In formation can slip from your
m臼n。1y if there are l。ng delays between sho。ti ng
and o rgan izing, tty to ma!
ph otograph; y。u 、、,,ill see a screen that looks like
the one on the page opposite. You can also start
by open ing an image file directly (an im age is a
data fde; your so丘ware is an application fi均 The
computer will usually recogn ize t he fi le type (see
page 81) and open the appropriate application
automatically. 飞.'Vith work flow software, open t he
application, t hen navigate to the photograph you
want in its catalog or libra1y. The following pages
refer more specifically to Photoshop, but m ost of
the a句ustmen臼 and controls they describe are
avai lable in any image editor o r photograph er’s
wor kflow program.
Tools and commands a r e used to m a n ipu-
late your phot ograph in image-edi ting soft-
ware. Tools appear as small symbols called icons,
displayed in a toolbox {t he series of small boxes
shown at t he left side of the screen, opposi te) or
in an onscreen panel. Word commands, such as
Transform, Sharpen, and Prine, can be reach ed
from p ull-down menus across the top of t he
screen or as m。dules wi thin a panel. Palettes, like
the Layers palette or Info palett e t hat appear o n
the screen in Photosh。p, provide inform ation in
additi。n to more tools and word commands.
Ph otoshop’s menu commands often require
navigating through several n ested levels. Click
on a menu heading, then o n each level in tum·
or hold t h e mouse d。叭响 as you d rag t he screen
cursor to the command you want. The com mo n
notation for such a sequence is, for example,
Im age> Adjustments> Cmves.
B ack up your fi le before you m a ke a ny
changes to it, see page 133. In Ph otoshop, use
File>Save As and give the wor king fi le a slightly
di舵rent n ame. Then you can experi m ent and s till
have the original to go back to.
n
V
J
S
U
—
G
M
陀
心
O
U
A
DEt 人〈
C
Jmp e
le
g
m
h
啤
配
E
啊
。
-
h
.
”
z
匹
E
I
h
tm
ow
t
充
n
M
m
川
u
o
m
副
M
a
en
r
g问
e
ur
u
α
-M
g
mrT
自
e
n
a
r
>
n
n
eM
、,
”
副
z
ec
-
-
5
户
口
响
b
m
副
t
g
E
ea
」
冶
n
1
52
92 IMAGE EDITING
displayed can fill the monito内screen or be any size
smaller, and you can d isplay or hide palett es, pan-
els, and tools. It helps to have a large monitor (or
two, as shown below) so you can make your image
large enough to make accurate adjust ments and
not have part of it covered with palettes and tools.
Workflow programs make excellent use of
a d u al-mon ito r secup. You can display all t h e
images from a recent sh oot or project o n o n e
screen (small previews called thumbnails in a
fil阳的ip or grid 机ew) and a fu ll-screen versio n of a
selected im age o n the other. You can also display
larger versio ns of two or m ore images on the sec-
o nd screen in o rder to compare si milar shots, for
example,。f th e same port rai t su bject to select t h e
best express ion.
Start by making t h e im age t h e right sha pe.
Rotate the ph otograph and crop it if needed. You
can us ually undo a command,。r several, if you
change your m ind Raw-forma t workflow pro-
grams lee you go back one step at a ti m e, all t he
way to t he unadjusted o riginal file; Ph otos hop
lim its how many edi ting steps you can un巾, but
you can always start over fro m your backup fi le.
Don’t h esitate to do so; you can learn by si mply
open ing an image fi le an d experimenting with
vanous tools an d com man ds
More is be时eη when it comes to monitors. You don’t have 归 be working with
panoramic image毛 as shown here,阳 make good use of more “screen real-臼阳饵” as
it is called. U喀•er screen鸟 or multiple disp阳, letyou isolate an image and keep it
separa阳from menuιμ脱出, and other soβware di.早均每e
Palettes provide information as well as
various w.伊阳 modify images. Click on the
menu icon at the 阳p right to re时al other
commands and options.
0 " 叫甲l嗣n 剧,
.. U T @
日
飞
E
刷
刷
…叫一
-
叫
\们-
m
川
口
w
m
/ +.、.
• ll” S0 ,-啕
• rA; s口阳…
. 盯口°""'-f伊H
.圆”J一.
’ ,. :
….
r. :
Menu headings open to reveal commands.
Here, the Window menu is open; it lets you
display different palett臼on the screen. Click
on a checked (open) item to close it扩your
screen seems cluttered. ~
::.::i:罩 ’恰Ip
N呻呻@
怕阳幅PIC…
-曾Exten-。而睛”·
., … 隙”。咱 ..
抽
趾tlo帽
崎ntments
S阳’h
’叫拍脚·曾..
a,.,w隐隐
Olaroetor
Ct,a,拟只ws刷幅
Clone Soun:•
。“衔
。剧团向栩栩
Gly回回
Hist咱ram
His理OIY
,I ln!o
IAYO
Levels co gen erate a histogram that g u ides your
Levels adjustments; they can later be a ltered or
discarded (see Adj u stment Layers, page 100).
Settin豆 and Usin2: the Eyedroppers
-w
1
P
Z
N
Y-
-
川’
川Ar
r
u
p
tγ
川
,
好,
,
,
,
ν
-h
R
叫
‘
p
e
d
f
d
e
h
j
p
h”
F
鸣
,h
J
r’
‘
,
川
崎m严
d
尸
’J
hhykv
vf
?
f
h1jp
巾
’
’i
g
r
4
3
;
j
h
γ
I
A
E
二
知
炼一
吧
,
’
、$7
川
’
!
”d
4
-P
.
A
.,,
..
,
,.一哩
’
-
J
:
f
e
〉
·
’
霄
,
d
夕
’
h
u
四
A
A
y-
-
,
.
,
,
V-
J
-
’
气
,
‘
‘
了
’
J
J
·
-
d
气
’
V
U斗
d
‘
y
·
川
J、
h
-
h
J
w
d
L
K鸣
,
‘
川
u
v
h
·
,
·
·
a
同
A
F
J
.,
.
·
·
申
V
恤
,
·
-3
岛
、
’
jh,
, .
..
,,
非
勺
-4
\
b
i
‘
ed
\
..
t
J
~
巩r
·、
b
w等
M
·
,
,e
o
-
-
n-4
1
、
二
态
礼
!
-‘
The photographer wanted more contrast 巾伪is s臼nned image
of a road through a forest. He used Levels to叫“川e咖amic
阳nge 侧目如by setting white and black points (s田opposite page)
that附re just right for阶eprin阳r he used.
Ph。t。sh。p lets you d efine spec而c
white and black poin臼 soy。u can keep
detail easily in higMir,hts and shad。ws
节回 settings remain on place as the
default setting for any file y。u 。pen
until y。u change them; these values
should apply to most in均et printers,
butte目前rst and set your own values.
Open the Levels dialog box ( sh。wn
。pp。site, top) for a~y image. Double-
~一_ click on the black-
I J’ I 川 p川eyedro~per at
吨g-‘-ζ—Lζ---' the bo眈。m right of
the d ialog box. This will open the c。lor
Picker box (right). Set the Red, Green,
and Blue 旧l ues aε10 to define the dark-
est black with some detail. (Zero in each
color would produce a black with no
detai l.) Click OK.
D。uble-cl ick 。n the white- p。int eye
–
萨伊1刻 d r。pper t。陀
I $ I I I .Jll1I the C。l。r Picker b。x
‘ι一~吨=矛』 Seεthe Red, Green,
and Blue values at 244 to define the
brightest white with detail. Click OK.
Once these values are set, you can
quickly adjust highlight and shadow
values ( and simultane。usly neutralize
their color) in any image. Open Levels,
select the shadow eyedropper, and click
it 。n the spot in your image you want to
be the da巾st black with detail ( see b。x,
ri?,ht). Repeat for the highlights using the
highlight eyedropper. T而is three-eyedrop-
per icon is repeated for s目ting values in
several other Photoshop dialog boxes.
..』叩F阳
Black p。int White p。int
‘
协飞J
94 IMAG E E DI TING
Ph。t。sh。p lets y。u
see your white and
black p。ints s。 you
can ch。。se where to
use the eyedroppe目
Open the image and
then the Levels dialog
box. Hold the Option
key and move the high-
light slider (。pposite,
阳的 The lightest pixels
a陀 the firs t to appear.
At any position, the
pixels to the right of the
slider will be displayed
as white, the others
black (left , center).
H。ld ing the Option key
and moving the shadow
slider reveals the black
point (le仕, b。ttom)
At each slider
pos’”。n, you can see
e阻ctly which pixels will
be set to white or black
if you leave the slider in
that p。sition. See 。ppo
site, top center
U四Is
,.,.,.. I Cu11om ,: 1″‘ C王ζ3
Chann New Adjustment Layer >Curves opens a
dialog b。x like the 。ne shown 。pposite, rig h t; its
main featu res are a square g raph with a corner-to-
corner diagonal line and a h is togram overlay of
the im age. T h e graph p lots input (existing bright-
ness values) on t he horizontal axis, against output
(those same values in your pictu re after t h e 呻ust
m ent) o n the vertical axis. Shadows are at t he bot-
tom and left, h ig h lig hts at th e top and rig ht . T he
exact center of the graph is 128/ 128: middle gray
inp ut , m iddle gray o u tput. A 45° diagonal line
means that the 。utput values w ill be the same as
the input values, n o tones change.
You 国n p u t a n adjustm ent p oint anywhere
on t h e line an d m。ve it . The line becomes a
smooth cu rve t h at passes throug h that point. If
you click o n t he m iddle (128/ 128) and m ove t hat
p。int straight u p to 128/ 140, the “ after” (output)
value of anyth ing t hat was a m iddle value increas-
es (gets ligh ter) and so do all th e o ther cones al。ng
the cu rve. See the top p hotograph on this page.
T he middle values have moved the fart hest from
the origi nal diagonal; darker and lig hter cones will
change prop。rtionately less.
T he s ha p e of t h e curve (or o f any section)
in dicates cont r ast. A steeper slope is h igher
contrast; m o re h o rizontal means lower contr皿E
Increasing contrast in one part of the cu rve means
losing it somewhere else. Up to sixteen poin臼 can
determi ne h ow the tones are altered If you want to
remove a poinc, j ust pu ll i t 。ffthe side of th e graph .
Like Levels, Curves can be applied directly
rather t han as an A句ustment Layer (see page 100)
but the changes are perman ent. A si m ilar a句ust
ment can be fou nd in any workflow program.
96 I M AG E E DI TIN G
Move the curve up to
lighten all the tones in
the image. Middle 阳nes are
displaced阶e most.
Move the curve down to
darken all the tones 巾 the
image. U也qdark areas don’t
change much
This S -curve makes light
tones lighter and dark
tones darke巧 raising阶e
contrast
This S-curve makes light
tones darker and dark
tones lighteη lo附ring the
contrast
Several points can be
added to the curve to ad-
just the tor四ν'e,y precise如
The ω阿·es for each
channel can be adjusted
independently. Here the
blue c,阳nnel is lightened
m阶eh也Mights-visible
in the road-and dark-
ened in the shado叫the
red and green channels
remain unchanged
Reducing blue ( dark –
enini) is the same as add-
ing its complement, yellow.
In the shadow areas this
is most noticeable in the
green of the trees.
In practice, 时可ysma/1
adjustments of this如d
are the most useful.
Lawrence McFarland.
Farm entrance near Assisi,
/ta如, 2002.
Curws
m o t e, ” ,
、
, -e s e 价 fil~ C主主3
一「 C豆豆D
71 1 』旦
~
~
a, ….. ,~二二二B
回刁-r–「
阴阳
PureWhice
o I 12s 255
8/ack-poin电 white-poinι and neutral eyedroppers
are available to make important settings rapid如that
臼n be adjusted with more precision a卢:erward.
Exact Input and Outp时numbers are
shown as you add or move points on the curve.
R 5 圄 97
Adjusting Pαrt ofαn Imα,ge
SELECTIONS
S electing an a re a le也 you ed it o r a djust p art
of a n im age instead 。fall of it. All the pixels in
a subject may be sel ected or j ust one. You may
choose to select pixels in a geom etric shape like
a square or to follow an outline to select all the
pixels that fo rm a particular image, fo r example,
of a bird. Your selection may enci rcle one shape or
be formed of several separate pieces. And impor-
tantly, pixels can be partially selected, in additio n
to entirely or not at all selected. \Vorkflow pro-
grams allow basic adjustments of a selected area
(calling the selectio n a masked area that is chosen
by brushing or painting) and can au tomat ically
identify edges to h elp you create a precise mask.
A selected a re a is like a sep a r ate p icture.
It can be made darker or lighter-called burning
or dodging, as in a conventional darkroom. In
additi。n, its color, contrast, o r saturation can be
changed. 飞.Vith Photoshop, a selected area can be
made larger or small凹, i t can be rotated or dis-
torted, or it can be moved to another part of the
picture or to another picture entirely. Selecting is
the firs t step toward compositi ng-邵阳mbling an
image 丘。m separate p町es (see pages 106- 107).
The selectio n itself can b e e d ited . You can
add to and subtract fro m a selection, 四pand 。g
shrink it, or feath er its edges. Inver讶’您 a selection
changes the selected pixels to unselected and vice
versa. Selections can be saved wi th the document,
to be broug h t back, o r loaded, later. P hotoshop
provides many different tools for making and
altering selections (opposi te) because it is such an
im portant part of the digital editing process.
Adjustmen臼 will be m a d e o n ly to t h e select-
ed area. For example, if you select an ar白, then
apply a I且vels 硝u沉tment, it will only affect 巾
selected P阳ls. P缸tially selected P阳ls (such as
those made by fea thering an edge) will be part以ly
adjusted. Making an adjustment layer (see page
100) when pixels are selected makes changes o nly
to those selected pixels and lets you later adjust
those changes. The selection, saved as a mask
(。pposite, bottom), may also be later a句usted.
98 IMAG E E DITI N G
The se/ecti,。”。fan
。bject can be inverted
to select the back-
ground. Once the
切ckground 且selected,
any of its characteristics,
including its colo几臼n
be changed, below. It ι
also possible-and very
frequently useful一阳
eliminate the 切ckground
ent阿萨, 也ht.
Selecti.喀 the object
makes it possible to
adjust its tones separately
from the background. Once
the oν'era/I colors and 时lues
look good in 阶e photograph
at left., 伪e glass butter dish
in the middle of the scene is
too dark and has a color臼•st.
Following its outline with
the La目。tool 白白 opposite
pag,θ turns 阶eo向;ect in归d
selection and lets a separate
Curves adjus,阳ent make it
an eyecatching臼nterpie,臼
Lasso Tool
Magic Wand
Quick Mask
令,牛-;.
/ ·.
4’
~ -~-
.1.. 写~-
~- CJ.
fµ. ”
If). τd
h 口-
。- Cl
白.
Mo,呵uee Tool臼luts
geometnc shop田 Its op·
lions include square and
rectan?)e, αrcle and o阳l
Pe” Too/ mak国smooth
and precise 0111/ines called
B创er curves that are the
刷instay of drawing and
illustration software. Its
use ,s less intuit’”e than
other selection tools and
takes a bit longer 阳learn.
回
Selecting with the
Lasso tool is like
drawing with a
pencil. A computer
mouse makes a some- II p ,.
what clumsy pencil; ..
drawing tablets are
available if you do a
lot of direct selecting.
Subtract from an
existing selection.
Selut an area that is the in·
tersection of two selections.
Use the Lass。”。I to oudine the area you want to
select You must g。 entirely a round the a陀a w hile y。u
hold the mouse butt。n d。wn lfy。u 时ease ,t b efore
reaching t he point 。f。rigm, a straight line will auto·
mat,callyc。mple四 εhe circuit . y。u can 自X It, a d d 。ther
·. , ..
|”、 l
Magic Wand selects pixels by color. It is
most useful where a background is relative如
uniform or where foreground and background
colors or values are stronyy contrasting.
unc。nnected areas,。r sm。。th a ny u nwanted jlggles
using t he add to 。r s11btract from butt。ns (ab。ve)。r by
sw,tchmg to Quick Mask m。de (b。眈。m) toc。rrect 1t
With d阻wing tools
Add, subtraα,
intersect f坦e
above)
E油rmin田how
close in value selected
pixels will be.
Alie川崎 pixels
to be partially
selected.
代 · 回巴 巴巴山Sue: I 川阳峭 : I To’,rv,c-;; l}Q 日Anti·血, el臼叫川 口h
The Magic Wand tool is much faster ,n some s阳-
a tions than drawing. A chck of the Wand 目。ne spot
selects all t he p ixels of t he same c。l。r由at are c。n-
tiguous E。(touching) that sp。E The Tolerance semng,
Quick Mask mode
lets you use draw-
ing tools to make and
modify a selection.
Quick Mask changes a selection to a mask, like a
sheet 。fglass c。venng y。ur ph。E。•graph 。n wh1chyou
can brush 。paque paint (the mask IS usuall y d ,splayed
,n red). You can u四d用wing t。。ls-pencil , brush , air·
brush-to reshape t he mask and then change ,t back
in the T。。IOpti。ns bar sh。wn here, ,s an essential
vanable. It sets the range (h。wfar fro m the samp怡’s
c。l。r。r咀lue)。f the p1Xels that will be selected. The
size 。f由e sam ple can a lso be adjusted
to a selemon. It ,s m。st useful m 『mprove a select,。n
made with an。ther tool Dra wing w,由 wh,te 回归nds
( add s to) the selectio n ; black s ubtracts Partially
select ed P”‘els w ill result 府om painting with gray 。r
using a feather-edge t。。l
R 5 圄 99
Mοre Techniques
LAYERS
L ayers may be Photoshop’ s greatest仿制m
and one that most clearly sets its abilities apart
from photographer’s w。rkflow programs. Adding
a layer to your image is like putting a sheet of
clear glass over a print. You can draw on the layer
or make alterations that change the image below
the layer, but you can still ta!但 it away to reveal
the unchanged picture. And you can add anoth凹
layer and ano ther (Photoshop lets you add thou-
sands) that are individually editable, rem ovable,
and-except for what you put o n t hem-com-
pletely transparent.
Layers make it easier to composite a picture,
assembling elements from more than one image.
Each part of your picture can si t o n an individual
lay凹, 咄咄 you can then move and change and
move and change again, until your fi nal image
looks the way you want (see pages 106- 107).
Adjustment layers let you make tonaJ chang-
es, using Curves, Levels, o r other tools, with-
out permanently altering the original, underlying
image. Use Layers> New A刽ustment Layer; t hen
you can revisit 归ur changes and modi今 them at
any time, the way you can in a workflow applica-
tion. \Vhen you need to finalize your decisions, to
prin飞 for example, you can flatten t he file to make
the adjustments permanent, but you can-and
should-keep a copy of t he unflattened file.
The direct use 。f Levels, Cmves, or almost
anything else that alters a picture, causes the soft-
ware to discard som e informa tion wh en it applies
the change. If you darken a picture, for example,
and later you de口ide it should be even darker,
more information is d iscarded. Each tim飞 the
image is further degraded.
Using an adjustment layer for such changes
avoids this problem; the settings you choose affect
the image that is displayed or printed bur they
don’t change the pixel values in the 。riginal fi le
until you choose to flatten it. All settings can be
changed-or discarded-without loss. Photoshop’5
“ smart” fi lters are also o n the list of non-destruc-
tive adjustments. The most important of these
filters is sharpening; you can change the amount
you apply to an image for each different o utput.
100 IMAGE EDITING
The second /ayeηa Curv,由
adjustment layer shown at
right, adds contrast. Each
additional layer affects o吵
those that appear below it in
the Layers Palette, far r,也·ht.
C.,….,C)
.!t=.)
U向··
Peter Vanderwarker. Peter 8. lewis Building, Case \II々 ather
head School of Management, Cleveland, Ohio, 2003
Two layers make all the
adjustments 伪ispho阳·
graph needs. 7百e first layer
(shown below left) makes
如me areas l也•hter and others
darker, the same way you
m也•htapp如burning and
dodging if you were printing
巾a darkroom
To make it, Layer>New>
Layer was opened. In the
dialog box Mode: α,erlay
was selected, then Fill with
Overlay-neutral color was
checked. 7百e Overlay layer
fills with middle gray but
no伪ing but its e庐ct is vis-
ible unless you turn off the
background I.钞er’s display by
clicking its eye icon. Making
the Overlay l吨yer’s neutral
gray I,也·hter or darker wi阶
anytool-e时,, ifyou don’ t
see it-l也htens orda巾ns
the underlying image. The
foreground roof is lightened.
A gradient darkens the sky
gradually toward the upper
hβcorner.
盹 囚 J令晶 阳E至曰
.曰…
·回口ω
·园时时晶
曲 ,知目。. c, Q a
Mark Klett. View斤。m the tent at
Pyramid Lake, 7:45 AM, Nevada,
9/ 16/ 00. Adjustment layers control
individual areas when they are applied
through a mask. A selection ( made wi,阶
the tools on pages 98-99) er,臼阳Sa
layer mask如an adjustment 臼n affect
O吵the area you choose. Layer masks
are shown as a small image M阶e layers
palette, left., 时th an icon for the type of
l吨yer. Naming 伪e I.吨yers helps keep track
of what they are for. By creating several
different mask鸟, each filtering a坦parate
叫“stment /ayeι Klett l也'htenedparts of
the tent floor (the坦lected layer at right),
made the sides of the tent appear阳 be
the same br吵Ines皂剧d deepened blu目
的伪e sky and water阳accentuate the
ea吵mornings川l也·ht.
Each layer-and its mask一臼,, be
changed or deleted at any time without
a侨cting settings of an other layers.
A卢:er building a final image like this, one
l吨yer at a time, Klett makes a small proof
print to see if any of the layers need to be
further modified before making a final
print at full size.
叫
E
E…
…
m
L
r
一
口口
圃
口
-E
E圃
口
…
E
51
…
:
…
…
囚
<>> Ix. a c. ca Iii 古
..
·霄
The original scan from Mark Klett’s large-format color negative looks
passable but it needs some work 归 bring out its full potential, shown above.
Klett began with a curves layer to set black and white poin臼and the overall
color balance. A luminosity layer mak出small adjustme础阳the tones an
contrast without afl♀cting the 臼lor. Other layers are added for 再,rthe, :
more subtle, adjustments
c…ER 5 圄101
Techniques More
RETOUCHING
To retouch “sing Photo-
shop’s patch tool, select it
from the Toolbox (it may be
behind the Healing Brush or
Spot Healing Brush Too。
Select Source in the Tool
Options Bar. Wi.阶 the cur-
sor, draw around the area
needing repair队J Drag the
selection onto an undamaged
area similar in value, color,
and texture (B ). The pixels
from the undamaged area
will combine with those in the
selection to make a natural-
looking repa扩(C)
|因ID画…(h; e Sou«• 0 OubROlion 川剧··
曰
广
1
执
川
j
s
川
回
D igital ca p t ure a vo id s a lmost a ll unwant-
ed s p ecks generated by the process. Only if you
get dust or a scratch o n the sensor sh ould you
need to cover u p such fla ws thr。ugh retouching,
essentially painting over part of an image. Scans
require this kind of attention; it is n early impos-
s ible co keep a negative o r print (and the scann er
itself) perfec tly clean during scanning.
“ Improving” someone’s complexion in a por-
trait is also called retouch ing. Regardless of the
reason for retouchi吨,y。u make changes o nce and
S町e them. For minor (but careful) retouching of
small areas in Ph。tosh。p, you can alcer your back-
ground layer directly-assuming you have saved a
copy. For m句。r alcerations, such as those o n the
ph otograph below, make a new d uplicate layer to
retouch. Go to Layers> D uplicate Layer, and then
perform your corrections o n the new layer. 1···、、飞
.
·电
、
-Z
E
e
-
z
f
s
叫
‘
4
·!
J
V
A
,
I
、
,SE
iz
— To repa ir d a m aged pho tog r a p h s or to remove
u nwanted specks and scratches, vat ious tools are
available in Photoshop, such as the clone stamp,
healing brush, smudge, focus, coning, and sponge
tools, along with the patch tool shown at right.
Before 归u begir飞 adjust the image for contrast,
brightness, and, if working in color, color bala11ce.
Work何ow p r o g rams includ e ret ouc h ing
t ools that are especially useful when dust o n
your camera’s sensor marks each image in the
same location. With in an y catalog of images you
can instantly apply one pic ture’s retouching to a
selected grou p of。thers.
伪e巾,age. Adjustment with Curves brought the
阳n由back 阳an approximation ofi臼unfaded
state. Some drawing skill臼n help in replacing
a la嗯B damaged area; the key is to borrow bi缸
斤。,”。theι similar areas 巾 the picture.
For best results, build up a repair slowly.
Work in layers to protect the original image.
Found at a fl,臼market, 伪is torn and faded old
photograph was s臼nned, then re阳uched户st
enough tor,由阳,写伪eo斤iginal appearance of
IMAGE ED ITING 102
Michael Schafer. Au{iug (HGB ), 2002. Retouchi.咯can
work miracles. He.,在5 伪e photographer remoν·ed e时可y tra臼
of himself and his 臼’”era from the mirror inside an elevator,
时th its door clo叫阳叫出时aha川tfoiy surreal ima~e
that suggests a journey-up or down-into the 缸istential.
c…ER 5 圄 1 03
More Techniques
SHARPEN I NG
S harpe ning impro ves m ost digital images
bur won’t save a p hotograph that was made our of
foc us. It is an import ant adjustment that sh ould
be applied to all scans a nd d ig itally captured
p h otographs, us ually j ust before printing or o ther
export. Gen erally, more sharpen in g is needed for
d ig ital captu re than for scans from film. JPEG
fi les are s h a rpened by the camera b ur you s h ould
sharpen all captured TIFF and Camera Raw files.
The amount of sharpeni ng fo r best results
depends 。n a n umber of factors,。ne of wh ich
is the resolu tion used for a particular o u tput.
Because you may want to p u t your file o n a \Veb
site as well as ma king a print (or m:u世 different
s ized prints from t h e same image), sh缸penin
should pr。bably n ot be applied as a perma nent
alteration. If you a re using a workflow application
or Phoroshop CS3 (or la ter), sharpening can be
ch a n ged each t ime you sen d an image to a differ-
创刊 。utput. Wi th earlier versio ns of Phoroshop,
save an u nsharpened versio n of your file.
U nsh a rp m ask in g ( USM) means s h a rpe n ing.
T h e seeming ly con t rad icto1y nam e is a legacy
from darkroom photography, a way of improv-
ing sharpness by placing a sligh tly out-of-focus
negative in contact with a film positive, or slide,
during e nlargi n g. T h e resu lt of t h is film sand-
w ich is increased contrast at the edges of o均ects,
the same effect you introduce to an image using
digital s h arpen ing.
The s harpen ing cool or filter identifies areas
of transiti。n, for example, fro m dark to light
or fro m red to yellow, wh ich our eyes te ll LIS are
edges. Then it exaggerates the transi tion. 如faking
dark p ixels darker o nly wh en t h ey are near light
p ixels, a nd vice versa, creates a s ubtle halo around
edges t h a t we perceive as enhanced sharpness.
S harpe n fo r t h e out put. Higher outpu t res。-
lu t io n, usually fo r a larger pri n t , requires more
s harpen ing. A fi le p rinted o n an inkjet printer
needs different sharpening than you would apply
to t h e same fi le sen t to an offset press. Even th e
paper matters; uncoated papers a nd matte surfac-
es n eed a little less sharpen ing than g lossy paper.
Always judge the sharpe ning by displaying your
104 IM A G E E D ITING
All scans and digital cap阳res need sharp-
ening. The Unsharp Mask filter increa且S 阳ne
differences between adjacent pixels 阳make the
image appear sha’per.
The right amount of sharpeni.略makes
details and e旬出cri.写p without sacrificing
smooth 阳nes. Different pictures and different
us,臼need different amounts.
Too much sha’pening is as bad as not
enough. When you see obvious halos around
fine details 巾your imag~, you have gone too
far. Use 伪e preview option on screen 阳com
pare before and aµ风 ν-iewing at 100%.
o nscreen in吨e at 100% (als。 called 1: 1 ); even bet-
E町, m:u《e a proof o n the printer and paper you wi ll
be usi ng for your fi n al print.
Some photographers prefer to use a two-s tep
s h a rpen ing process for digitally captured files:
inp ut sharpe ning based o n the specific camera
a nd o u tput sharpening based o n t h e s ubject and
the fi le’s destination.
Sha rpen for im age content. A landscape may
require d ifferent t reatmen t tha n a cityscape.
Sharpeni n g for a portrait will need a d ifferent
approach than for a fo rest scen e. Facial skin is
a special concern becaLISe sharpe ning en hances
textu re a nd blemishes, us ually u ndesirably. For
portraits, y。u may have s uccess using an increased
radiLIS and lower amou nt, o r by sharpen ing 。nly
the red channel in RGB or the black channel in
CMYK Phoroshop’s H驴-Pass filter is useful for
confinin g sharpening to prominent edges. You
m ay want to apply sharpen ing throug h a mask, as
was done in th e photograph opposite. And there
a re several ways to apply sharpen ing by hand,
brush ing it in around eyes and hair, for example,
while leavi n g the rest of a face unsharpen ed.
σ3
.. 哩··
E份“··
〈这"" e良
……. u …..
n,, .. ”… ..
Select Filter>Sharpen>
Unsharp Mask •.. in Photo-
shop. Its dialog box lets you
set the filter’s three variables,
Amount, Radius, and
7百用hold, and to vi,阳a pre-
ν-iew to see how your choice of
values a.ffec臼the image.
Radius controls how close
阳an edge 伪e sharpening
oc,阳’可 use values 斤。’” 0.5 阳
王 h也•her numbers for h钞町
的回olution files Amount
a{/♀c臼the contrast of sharp-
ened pixels, valu由between
50 and 200 are common for
photographs. 7百reshold de-
termines how different a pixel
must be from its ne也hbors 阳
comprise an edge pixel. Low
values sharpen more of an
image. S,阳,twith 3-5.
Similar controls are
i时n in workflow programs;
Aperture has Intensity and
Radi时, with a且parate
control for edge sha’pen-
ing. Lightroom uses sliders
for Amount, Radius, and
Detail, with a fourth slider
for Masking-the equivalent
ofedgesha’pening.
Jim Scherer. Fork with
Peppers, 2006. Sharpening
must be applied carefully
when out-of-focus areas
are particularly important.
Scherer wanted just the
in-focus areas to s阳,,dout
crisp段, so he used a soft-
edged selection as a mask to
sharpen only the two pepper
slices in the center. Sharpen-
ing out-of-focus areas in digi-
臼l如captured photographs
like thιone risks enhancing
granularity and noise.
c…ER 5 圄 1 05
More Techniques
COMPOSITING
D igital editing w臼 invented for composit-
ing, or so it m igh t seem . T he ki nds of images that
have become most closely associated wi th digital
pho tography are the invented spaces and impos-
sible situations that we see eveηrwhere in adver-
tising. It is n o t t hat such composited (combi ned
fro m several sources) images werer p。ssible w比
conven口onal ph otographic techn iques (see photos
below and o n page 112), but it was always ve1y diι
ficult and often prohibi tively ti me consum ing to
do so. Assembling an image fro m parts requires
complex and extensive editing tools; workflow
programs do no t provide featu res fo r composi ting.
Mastering the composite takes some e仔。同
even w ith a computer to help. Leam ing the tools
ta!也s some ti me, but is n。E the real challenge.
Learning to think ahead an d to create an d assem-
ble parts t h at fi t togeth盯 visually-that requ ires
practice, clear thinking, and att ention to detail.
Francis Frith. Hascombe, Sur句y, ι 1880. Tire composite
photograph is not new. To “'improve"伪is 19血century
EnDish land:阳,pe, F刷刷ta horse and 臼rt-along with
their convincing shadow-from ano伪erphot,络raph and
pasted it onto the original photograph.
1 06 IMAGE ED ITING
Consistent illumination is most importan t to
ma!忧 eve1ything in your image believable. If you
take people from a photograph made on a s unny
day and drop them into an overcast lan dscape,
it won’t look right no ma tter what you do. Few
viewers wi ll be able to tell 四actly what the prob-
lem is, bu t eve1yone will find viewi ng the image a
little uncom fo rtable.
Display several images a t once when yo u com-
bine elements from multiple p ictures. A large (or
second) monitor helps when you wan t to have sev-
eral files open and still see your tools and palettes.
The Info palette provides useful measurements to
maintain c。nsistency among d iffe rent elemen“, as
do the rulers that appear o n rwo borders of each
win dow. Keep each element on a separate layer.
You can make an adjustment layer (see page 100)
that is linked (attached) to each and won’ t affect
any other layers.
julieanne Kost. /sos阳cy, 2007. To create this surreal mon-
tag鸟 Kost combined a scanned painting with d饭ta/.ψcaptured
photographs of unrelated landscapes and t臼tures.
I sos阳cy (or Isostatic eq uilib ri u m) describ由剧 。与ect in
切lance between two media, the way scientists would describe
an iceberg wi阶its portion in the air betr,吨ying a hidden mass in
the water below.
Kost began by s甜,iningan
encaustic (wax) painting she had
made (abo时L and darkening its
edges with a mask (bel,。” She
keeps 臼ch element and its adjust-
men ts 巾separate I吨yers as the
piece is being出血时间 it allows
each to be further altered as the
work becomes more complex
The douds come from this
pho阳•graph, with the 切rnand
its foreground and background
maskedouι7百et,甩出。但•ht)
were also masked to fit.
The landscape is a separate /aye巧
as is the mask that blends its edges
into the background. 7百e mask臼n be
di.早均,ed in red or in black and white.
The final 阳,chesare t四阳F自
added from pictures of rust (abo时
r也ht) andbubb阳。{sea foam (r也ht).
Both were incorporated as layers with
reduced opacity so they don’t o昭俨
whelm the image of clouds on a layer
beneath. The finished composite image
has twelve layers.
–
I
c…ER 5 圄 1 07
More Techniques
COLOR INTO BLACK AND WHITE
C olo r c h ann e ls ca n b e b le nde d t o geth e r
in image-edi ting software. W ith Capture One
Pr的 Black & White tool and Ligh troo m ’s Gγψcale
Mix you get s liders si milar to those you can call
up in Photos hop by choosing Black & White, an
adjustment u nder the Image m en u . In each of the
programs you can control the prop。rtion of each
p rima1y color channel that will be incmporated
into the resulting b lack-and-white image w h ile
you watch th e on-screen preview change.
Yo u c a n s et man y digital c ameras to c a p t ure
in b la c k a n d w h ite. T h e camera will produce a
grayscale J P EG o r TIFF image, and the camera’s
monitor w ill show a b lacl• and-white p review. If
your camera is set to capture a C amera Raw file,
however, a b lack-and-white image w ill s how o n
the can1era’s monitor but all the color info rma –
tion will still be present in th e saved file. You
can th en control the conversion to grayscale, as
described above, w ith image-editing so日i:ware.
Infrared B lack a nd White
Digital camera s回sors are covered with a 制-
ter that bl。cks in命are Filter
Gallery to browse th roug h them at random . Each
gives control over several variables. For example,
the S tained Glass fi lter lets you set diffe rent values
for cell s ize, border thickness, and light inren-
s ity. T h e variations a re endless and , if you select
“Conven for S m art Fi lters,” re-edi table.
Be car eful, fi lte rs a re like cand y; restrai nt is
advised. T hey are appealing con fec tions but it is
easy to overindulge. Remember also that 缸瓦tly
the same zoomy special effects are available to t he
millions 。f other users of Photoshop, an d th eir
arbitra 1y use can easily appear to be a cliche. Many
fi lters belong in y。ur E。。lbox, especially if your
task is illustration, but don’t assume t hat because
you ’ve n ever seen t he results of t h e Craquelure
fi lter, n。。ne else has either.
Watere。t。r fi lter c…E R 5 圄109
An Editing W orkflow
Here is an 。udine of the basic steps t o a fi nished,
print ed digi阻l ph。tograph using Photosh。p.
1 Open 伽 而le and save a dupli叩 Use
File>Save As and give a new name to the
version with which you’H be working. Make
sure y。ur original, raw file is archived prop-
erly (see page 133.)
2 Rotate and aop the im咿叫eed萨of巾
frame are exactly where you want them. By
croppingy。u can choose an aspect ratio more
suited to your vision than the one dictated by
your car口e阻’s sensor or the film、 frame.
3 Retoucl’ (page 102
or spots. Scans generally require retouching ;
photographs captured with a digital camera
may not.
4 Add a Levels o r C…叫ustment layer.
Use it to set the black and white points
and the overall color balance (pages 94- 97).
Rem凹巾er that with a句ustment layers you
can make m。re changes later. Make general
adjustments first , then fine-tune them after
your other adjustments have been made.
5 Make o由町 ove时l 吨ustments AC…
adjustment layer in the Luminosity m。de
lets you a句ust tones and contrast without
affecting col。r A Hue/ Saturation adjust-
menr layer is often useful to reduce the color
bias of some scanners and digital cameras or
to increase the vibrancy 。fselected colors.
6 M挑e l归l 叫ustme附 Whe he ov
image has been improved, if certain areas
need individual attention, make a selection
and add an adjustment layer with the selec-
110 IM A G E E D ITING
tton m pl缸e (page 98). Both the selection
(automatically saved as a layer mask) and
the a句山tment can be later edited. Add as
many individual adjustments as you need,
but keep in mind each one adds to the file
size, ma1也s each successive step ta1也 a little
longer, and fills your storage space faster.
Save the full-si时, layered file before conrinu-
ing on to resize, the next step.
7 R臼ize h配essary. 川ps to know how
you’H be using a picture-on a magazine
page, in a 飞Xfeb display, 。r making it into
a poster-to know how big a file and how
much res。lution you need. Some printers
make the best print if the file matches their
native resolution, often 300 or 360ppi.
8 Sh叩n the b础gro川a阳印u叫
to use the ph。tograph for a different appli-
cation or print it at a different si时, go back
to the unsharpened full-size fi le with all its
layers, resize and sharpen a copy for each use.
See pages 104-105.
9 Soft proof and print your ph叫raph (see
page 118). Flatten the layers before printing,
emailing,。r exporting to the 飞Xfeb. Think of
your first print as a test. Are there changes
to ma1何? If so, use the History palette to go
back to the sharpened, layered version
1 Q Make 副y ne倒S町而时叫ustme附
飞J 如fa1忧a final print. Once you are satisfied
with the print, go back to the full-sized ver-
sion of the file if you resized it for printing,
make the same final changes, and save it.
Dionisio Conzalez. Pau·
listona乓iun阳da, 2006.
Digital tools let Conzal,曰
”怨自t伪efu阳reofa
city. He photographed the
irregular ne.也hborhoods and
chaotic shan伊·ownso(Sao
Paulo, Brazil that are giving
way 阳 demolition and re-
building by the goν·ernn
–
7古rough d饭tal man伊ula
tion, he prop。•ses a recycling
“intervention” that inserts
旦哩men缸 that appear阳be
modernist structures into the
thr,臼阳ned spaces
A workflow for thιkind
ofimagemaking mays阳,t
with workflow soβvare for
importing and organizing
the elements, but the final
assembly depends on the
l吧yers and compositing tools
available 巾 Photoshop.
Y o u r editing w o r k w m ay be mo陌 e俯cient
if you u se a wo忡f臼ow applica tion. Adobe
Photosh。P is used by professi。nals in many are缸
besides ph。tography; it se凹·es ct飞e graph ic 缸ts, the
p riming ind ustty, and video, as well as fields s uch
as medicine and science. As a resu lt, it h剖 numer
o us featu res that you probably won ‘t need. It was
constructed to let images become whatever anyone
can unagme, o ne at a ti me
Work何ow so仕ware h as b e e n tailor ed to t h e
b asic tasks o f pho tog raphe rs, so one of these
programs may do ever严hing your work requires.
Usi ng eit h er program, all editi ng decisi。ns listed
o n the opposi te page can be applied in any order
and re-adjusted a t an y ti me before you p rint o r
export a fi le. C hanges in such qualities as color,
ligh tness, and satu ration may be brush ed on
。r applied t h roug h a mask. Sharpen ing m ay be
applied in s tages, some during import, som e to
the im age you see and man ipulate o n the m on i-
tor, and m。re later fo r o utput. Size, shape, an d
resolut ion decisi。ns a re applied on ly to the fi n-
ish ed product, n ot to t h e o riginal file.
Adjustmen臼 and se忧ings may b e saved as
a preset and applied s im ultaneously to a grou p
of images. These presets may be applied when
you dm,,吼load your images o r later, co a selected
group . With 。nly a couple commands, a wedding
pho tographer may turn hund reds of pictures from
one m凹nory card into sepia-toned black and white
as they are imported, an d prin t them臼asequence
of two-by-three-in ch pro拙, twelve to a sheet of
letter-size paper, wi th a n umber un der each small
image and the photographer’s copyright and con-
tact information at the bottom of each sheet. Your
own workflow can be customized an d saved.
c…ER 5 圄11 1
Ethics αnd Digital Imαging
J ust because 归u ca n alt町 an im耶shou ld
you? Digital methods haven’t substantially
changed the laws or eth ics of ph。tography, it has
simply become much easier to violate them . Now
that alm ost anyone can make extensive changes
in a photograph that are som eti mes im possible
to detect, t he limits of acceptability are constantly
tested and debated.
Has photography lost any claim on accurate
representati。n of reality? For a 1982 National
Geographic cover, digital image editi ng was used
to m ove one of the Pyramids of Giza a little for
the cover photograph so it would better fit the
magazine’s vertical forma t. \Vhen some readers
o均ected, the change was defended剖 being m erely
” retroactive reposi tioning,” the same as if the ph。-
rograph er had s imply changed position before
taking t he shot. \Vas it different? T he magazi ne
eliminated th is practice.
Pho叫oumalists usu ally follow fairly strict
rules concerning p h o tog r a phic a lterations.
Generally, they agree that it’s acceptable to lighten
or darken parts of an image. However, many news-
papers don’t allow t h e use of d igital editing to,
say, rem。ve a distracting teleph。ne pole or, worse,
to i nserts。methi ng new.
Advertisers often take considerable leeway
with illustrations. We have come to expect exag-
geration in advertising, as long as t he products
are no t m isrepresented. Few people would o均ect
to the altered photograph, above right, even when
the advertiser doesn ‘ t mention a change. But
would the same image be acceptable with out
explanation if it ran with a news story?
Photographs in fash ion advenising are often
digitally retouched to make th e models appear
th inner. Is it possible that exposure to these ideal-
ized images contributes to eati ng disorders?
W o rkin g photo g r a ph e r s a r e conce rn e d
a bout fi n a n cial m atte rs, and reasonably so.
Wh en your efforts result in som ething you can
sell, you probably t hink it is stealing if som eon e
11 2 IM A G E E D ITI NG
uses what you have made wit h out asking. H。w
can you protect your rights wh en images are eas-
ily accessible electron ically? How can you collect
fees for use of your work wh en images, after t hey
leave your hands, can be downloaded or scanned
altered, and t hen incorporated in a publicat ion?
飞When, if ever, is it acceptable fo r someone to ta!忧
your image and use it wi thout permission 。r pay-
m en t? T h e law is continually redefined by court
cases. Each new copyright in台ingement lawsuit
m akes the line a little clearer but t h ere are s till
m o re questions t han answers
One of these photojour-
nalists is not really there.
7百is photograph of all the
members of the pho阳agency
VII was originally commis-
sioned for a magazine. By
the time it was selected for
the camera company’s ad,
one of the members had been
rep归ced. The new member,
“ the far right, was shot in
the same New York cafe in
the same position as the man
he replaced, then added to
the picture d饭tally.
. ”…’”’·.’‘._ …”’h.iob.8. t 41,”’””向·.。”“时,.. c.’”. :;;; ” —..
VIL二工艺工=:-:.注τ二』工翩翩_':..:工;-::=.画 ::二=~-·-::-- ..;:::;二-工画…·
-···叫帽E巾..四..~牛 目........坤”、.“”’跑 4 『…… -· ca””…帽 、. . ….
’”””’”’跚跚… 喃喃’”””啊’”’··
Matthew Brady. Sherman and his staff, 1865. Altering the guest list is not new. This widely
distributed photograph of William Tecumseh Sherman and all his generals (above 缸”, taken
just after 伪e Civil War ended, includes General丹·antis P. B阳市at the far right. Blaiι however,
missed the sittin阜 so Bra司y photographed him separately lateι pasted a 阳tout 巾归a print of the
group (abo时F也ht), and rephotographed 伪ecomp出ite to make a new negati,时
1:,“白, F肺、~《. Ila,伊
句., J时尚品旧自(u,;.户,d
,.,ψ.,“,.:.咽,,d /’,,n,.,,•’
Joan Fontcuberta. 舟。’” Sputn巾, 1997.
Many of Fontcuberta’ s works tamper with
reali纱. In Sputn战, he fabricated a gallery
installation and invented a booιlength s阳,yin
which the existence of a Soviet cosmonaut lost
巾平,ace duri,,飞g a shuttle mission 且coν-ered up
byem切rrassed officials.
Above, using a real So町etgo时rnment
photograph (bottom), the artist added the as-
tronaut (actually Fontcuberta himself) 巾归 the
image (top) . In his sto饥he redefines the top
photo as the or,也’inal one and the bot.阳mpho阳
as the one altered by the goν·ernment. 7百e 、町-
dence” appeared so real that the 时,ibitdrew
protests from a Russian ambassador. Reality is
whatever you can Pho阳shop it归be.
D igital editing r aises e由ical questions in the
fine ar岱 as well. It is easy to scan a p hotograph
fro m a magazine or d ownload o ne fro m the
Internet and to incorpo rate all o r part of it in your
own work. Perhaps you intend to cri ticize or com-
m en t o n consumerism by “ q u oting” recogn izable
pieces of advertisi ng in a mo nt age. Artists’ appro-
priation of copyrig h ted material-incorp。rating
an image as a form of critiq ue-has been a widely
debated to pic an d conti nues to be the su均ect of
legal battles.
Copyrig ht laws h ave certain built-in excep-
tions called j』ir use; amo ng them is ed ucational
work. Wh at you ma!也 for a class p roject by “ bor-
rowing” som eone else’s work m ay be protected ,
bu t if you t ry to sell it in a galle1y o r dis tribu te it
on your Web s ite you m ay be i n日i·inging o n som e-
one’s copyrig ht.
Remember 由at a ny phot og raphs you post
on socia l m e d ia a re avai lable to b e copied by
anyone. Copyright protectio n is broad and not
tenibly co mplex, bu t what is and what is n ot pro-
tected m ay not be obvious. In the United States,
your ph。rographs are protected by copyrig h t as
soon as you ’ve made t hem, bur th e protectio n is
s t ronger if you register you r copyrig ht wi th the
government. To use your ph otograph legally,
som eone must h ave your permissio n , and gen er-
ally you can 四pect to n egotiate and be paid a
ri:ryal,σfor an y commercial use. Be careful what
you agree to when you up load you r pictures o n
a ph oto-sharing site like Facebook o r Instagram .
如fany images posted o nline are defined as
气。yalty-free,” wh ich does n ot necessarily mean
that they can be used without perm issio口, but
that o ne agreement or fee wi ll cover all cur-
rent and futu re uses. T h e alternate is “ righ ts
m anaged ,” which m eans the copyrig h t holder
on ly releases a very specifi c use of an image, for
example, on the cover of one paperback edition
of a novel in English sold on ly in North Am erica.
Photogra p hs made fo r the U.S. government
are said to be in t h e p“bl』c domain, alo ng wi th, in
general, anything made before 1923, and may be
used fo r an y p urpose wi t hout permission.
c…ER 5 圄113
曰 际J
TeuN Hoc Ks I Printers and Drivers ………. 116
υ回归d, 2000. Dute,也 a而且 Hodes makes I
I Paoers and Inks . . . ……… 117 如协es first, 曲”。栩栩曲回首阳t I t’
sets in whi
can do all your editing wh ile in t he soft proof
mode. Both let you ma k e most of these san1e out-
p ut c h oices fo r printing.
1 '"阳
work 。n.
2 Ch。 叭刷>Pr s叫>Cust。m a n
select a profi le for your pri n ter and pape I
from the d isplayed lis t. Set Intent: Perceptual
and ch eck “ Use Black Poi n t Com pensatio n.”
蜀 ,)}-
h阳时』唰恤岳叩
价-c.、…,”
“唰M·-·U!豆豆坠旦
’…陶巾,
如蛐啊’倒-cs亟豆豆
s--阳喻’”相
。”阳,。”掏”“暴fl•Scr.”。
g纯阳“·-臼阳
“””J41’ … 确也
i画
二二二B
ξ3ζ3
C豆豆:〉
C豆豆〉
:!l C豆豆二〉
E呈阳鸭”
118 PRINTING AND DISPLAY
自筐-·当B
叩阳山 山…』』··
3 凶 y。ur image as needed. Turn o n t h e
printer a n d load th e paper selected in s tep 2.
4 Choose File>Pri叽 then select yo…叩E
settings. The Doc1m
s uch as Adobe RGB (1998), is your wor king
space (page 82). In Printer Pr吧卢’le and Inten.t
ma!也 the same selectio ns you used for y。ur
Proof Setup (step 2).
时阴阳 ’剧创阳”” 嗣曰
份.”旬,, 例”…附属……..协”‘ …
τ刷陈CJ回刷刷d
….. -@豆豆豆豆J!:i •..崎明白
f衡阳•ts.ti,刷 …
二十
~画面Z一丽岳阳ε楠,…;呻· ‘ -----『
”··’“……..
”….轩” ’ 酌”“唱··”·-,刷刷 峙’
’”制”“’• I ODolot 毛阳’
C.怜’”。de l Ofl’… Calor …..翻翻-赠’l ”
(M阳农 民·$确a躏睛 ’如”’嗡………而 ….
巳弘肺阳晰m
c…,,加世
已闹剧,_..
C肉”剑阳呻
(!)a[:)~ ~ζ至3
s Choose Print Settings ro 臼l…he pri
s paper si挝, and orientation. Ph otoshop use
icons t。 help you choose an orientati。n;
5。metimes W。rds describe the onentati。n
Lands,臼,pe for h orizon tal, Portrait for vertical.
6 由。。” Print S川臼for Adju伽ent un伽
ColorM,刷agemen; and Photoshop Manag臼Colo町
under Color Handling. T h ese tell the pri n ter
ro accept your profile and output sett ings
wi tho u t alteratio n. O t he1wise, your pri n ter
will mak e color and contrast c h anges based
o n an average. C h oose a pri n ter resolu tio n;
h igher 阳。lutions yield fi n er-lookin g prints
b u t lon ger p rinting times. Wh en eve1yth ing is
set, select Pηnt ag臼n, a n d enjoy.
例.唰..嗣.
-二丑 ,
胁” ‘ --咽cl
‘-ltlll
’白阳…
& -叫“… l .. ~呻
一…呵呵恤
“‘W崎--”崎陶蝇·忡,. ~
阳帽”翻”主哩·= -」~
. . ”司”….,
】叫』~可
叫-”··“曲”…·
’…… … 翩。”町·..
咄
–
-…叩阳.,,……….
J离
x Rez Studios, Inc. N也ht
View of Chi,臼,go from the
Penthouse of Hotel 71,
2007. Panoramic pho阳-
graphs can be assembled
from smaller elements.
This one-阳greatly increase
resolution-was made from
seve的’Of hundred separate
exposures made around
a 360’ field. Be臼use it
is pie出dt句;ether卢仰,
images made 巾a circle,
theendpoin臼are arbitrary
and parts of the scene may
appear more than once.
The original file 臼n make
a high如detailed print more
than five meters wide. It is
dis pi吧yed with other extreme
resolution photographs on a
M句b site that a/lo附却oming
in to see a close-up of a’!Y
part of the frame: xR,自由m
Pαnorαmic Photogrαphs
D ig ital p h o t o g r a phy h as m a d e pan o ramic
p hotograph y more p o p u la r . In the recent past,
还you wan ted to ma k e p hotograp h s in pan o ramic
sha pes you h a d only a few optio ns. You could
c rop away part of a picture and then enlarge the
rest, re d ucing its quality. You cou ld invest in a
specialized, and usua lly expensive, camera. O r
you cou ld take several p ictures a n d d isplay th e m
S由-by-side-either E巾ng to h陆 the ed ges o r
m a king t h e joi n in g a ppear intentional. Now the re
is a n o ther optio n .
So食ware makes it easy to pie c e tog e t h e r
in d ividua l exposure s to ma k e a si n g le larger
image. Called stitching, the proced u re can be left
to Ph otosh o p (File>Aurom ate> Phorom erge) or to
。ne 。f several aftennarl
Exif and IPTC mecadata panels). Bue Photoshop
can’ t help you get 。rganized or fi nd anyth ing.
File b rowsers like Bridge, a freestanding appli-
cation su pplied with Pho coshop (Fi le>Browse in
Bridge … ), help you organ ize an d locate in吨es.
Bridge can download p hotos from a memory card,
rename chem , display thumbnails (sm all versions of
the files)。fan entire fo lder or a full-screen preview
of a selected image,由1d apply m etadata, ke沪words,
and ratings co all or a selected group of files.
Photograph町’s w orkflow a pplications like
Lighcroom and Capture O ne Pro (page 87) d。
eveη11:hing most p ho tographers need. Like Bridge,
th ey will download raw fi les from a memo1y card
to a locatio n you speci今, and let you rename, ra风
and tag th em with ke叭’ords. You can m汰e image
adjustment皂白size, and pri nt the images, or upload
th em to a \Veb site. In additio n, t hey include most
of the functi。ns of a catalogi ng applica tio n, o ne
th at can help you find specific fi les across all your
storage fo lders with a search for specifi c metadata.
Cataloging appli日tions缸especially designed to
help y。u find needles in your haystack. Som etimes
called an image database or d igital asset manage-
menc program, a cataloging program o r image
database like the 。ne shown at right can keep
track of hund reds of t ho usands of images. Like a
browser o r workflow application , it can em bed a
selected group of images with ke沪words and oth er
metadata It can search for and display images
based o n multiple criteria (photographs of m o u n-
tains t冰en in 2012 anywhere 四cept in Mon tana).
It can q uickly assem ble groups of selected pictures
to p resent to a client o n screen, to p rin t, or to post
on a Web si te. But an image database program
does not usually provide any editing m。Is.
132 O R GA N I ZIN G AN D S TORI NG
A cataloging applicati。n keeps infonnati。n
abou t a fi le and its location in its own separate
database fi le, so you can use it to find files that
have been stored 明i肘, which means t hat t h e
storage m edium or volu me is not connected to
the computer. T his helps you fi n d backup copies
saved on, for 四an1ple, th e backup Blu-ray disks
you keep in your safe-deposit box. Because its
database is separate from t h e image files , you can
add some metadata to an entry t hat is n ot em bed-
ded in the fil e; if you distribute the fil e, s。me key-
words can remain private.
These appl i国tions let you disp lay your w o rk
as a “ s lide show.” You can select a group of
photograph s to be seen 。n th e mo nitor or a
digital projector one at a ti me, filli ng the screen.
y。u can automate a presentation and choose the
tim ing an d the transitions (like a fade or dissolve)
between images. 飞;t’ith some workflow programs
you can also superimpose selected text and play
your choice of m usic along with the show.
An image database,
or asset manager (the
one shown is Photo
Supreme), can di.写play a
selected group of stored
photographs and help
you 卢,,d由actly the
photograph or photo-
graphs you are looking
for among thousands
AN ARCHIVING
WORKFLOW
FOR RAW FILES
1 . DOWN LOAD FILES
direccly from che came阳 or
chrough a card reader.
2 . RENAME FI LES. Use a
logical syscem chac will still
be useful after y。u have
50,000 phocographs.
3. ADD BULK META•
DATA. Bulk mecadaca
(for example, your name,
concacc 川formaci。n,and
copyrighc) is whac goes on
all your ph。cog阳phs
4 . CONVERT CAM ERA
RAW FI LES TO DNG
ify。u ch。ose (page 85).
s。me applicacions lee y。u
d。 icall-c。nve町, rename,
and append mecada国-as
you download
5 . ADD IND IVIDUAL
KEYWORDS . With mosc
applicaci。ns you can display
a large number 。f image
chumbnails and apply a k町-
w。rd co a selecced group
6. APPLY RATINGS.
Decide which image,。f
se明白I similar 。nes,’S che
one w。πh recurning co.
Give a higher ra口ng z。 che
besc 。f che sh。。E
7 . SAVE TO A SECOND
HARD DRIVE lfy。u have
a mirror RAID (cexc, righc},
chis happens aucomacically.
After saving a s.,cond copy
。feve叩ching, you can re岛p
mac your came阻’s mem。叩
card co use again
8 . BACK UP ON TWO
OPTICAL D匹KS 。r a
chird hard drive. Score
disks in a c。。I , d叩, dark
place for maximum life.
Don气 SC。re your backups
in che same place as your
compucer Give each disk
a unique name s。 you can
file and fi nd ic eas,忡, for
example, Photos 2014-045
9. ADD TO YOUR
IMAGE CATALOGING
DATABASE as s。on as
you wrice the 制自由。pCt·
cal disks, so ic can keep
crack 。f che c。pies in your
。而tne scorage syscem
Archiving Imαges αnd Prints
W ith digital photographs you can have
more than one original. An d, because they ta!也
u p little a ctual s p a ce, it m akes sen se to have sev-
e ral copies of everythin g. Prints, slides, a nd nega-
t ives have always been vulnerable to catastroph ic
loss or dam age, as well as to d egradation over
t ime. Im age fi les that a re d igi tal can be stored
u nch anged fo r the fo reseeable fu ture and-impor-
tan tly-th ey c an be d u p licated exactly. You can
dramatically redu ce your chances ofl oss by k eep-
ing copies of all your image fi les.
Have a backup strategy t hat you can stay
with . D。n’t wait until you h ave lost som e impo r-
tan t images before you m ake and stick to a plan
for arch iving your work.
It is m ost conven ient to h ave all your fil es
。nline, which m ean s t hey are s aved o n one o r
m ore hard d rives tha t are powered up a nd con-
n ected to the co mputer wh enever you work. But
h ard drives can fail; to be s a fe you shou ld also
h ave a t least w。 additional copies of everyth i吨,
and p referably th ree or m。re.
The best syste m, a t a m in im u m, is to make a
second cop y of all your raw fi les on another hard
d rive as soon as they a re renam ed and tagged (and
Prints should be kept in archival如,xes.
Elegant archival portfolio boxes like the
clamshell design on the left make a beautiful
pr,出en阳tion but may be 阳oexpensi,昭for
regu归r storage. Simpl,电 acid-free, card·
boards阳rage boxes, shown on the right, are
as safe. L吨·er sizes are made from acid-free
corrugated臼rdboard 阳 be morer也’id.
before you have erased them fro m the m e mory
ca叫) a时, shortly thereaf町, make w。 more cop-
ies on external h ard d rives o r o n re movable m ed ia
s u ch as op tical-CD , DVD, o r BO (Blu-ray)-d isks.
A secon d copy of everyth ing o n a local h ard d rive
(。ne that ’s in t h e same locatio n as you r main
com p u ter) lets you resto re fi les q u ickly in case of
a primary d rive failure 。r o ther data loss; t h e cop·
ies on rem ovable or p ortable dis k s ca n be k ep t in
two di仔erent location s to p rotect you in case of
a disaster s u ch as fi re o r the丘 Cloud-based stor-
age, re m ote storage that is accessed throug h the
Internet, is a lso useful fo r keepi n g off-si te back-
ups. You will also wan t to have a naming, organiz –
in g, a n d b ackup strategy for fin ished d凹ivative
fi les a nd fo r th。se in p rogress.
A RAID array can help ma k e local storage safer .
RAID is a n a c ron ym for redundant array of inex-
pen s ive (or independen t) d isks. You can use your
com put町、。perating system to format, o r initial-
2时, two d is k drives for RAID level 1, ca lled mirror-
ing. Once fo rmatted this W吼 the two d rives a c t
like one-you see o nly one icon fo r the d rive, a n d
you write to and read fro m it n o rmally. Bu t, invis-
ibly, all data is written simultane。usly E。 both..
T h is ki n d of syst n is called fou
it creates red u n d ant data; if 。ne d rive fails, all its
data 口iscs, iden tically, on the 。ther drive.
Prints (and film) are more c hallenging t o
store than dig ital image fi les because they a re
p h ysical o悖cts and , most often , u n ique. A stable
environme n t, especially o n e with cool tem pera-
tures a nd low humid ity, will p rolo n g the life of
dig ital prin ts as well as t radition al p h otograph ic
materials. Paper must b e p rotec ted fro m acid ity.
Unfortunately, most paper made fro m wood p ulp
is left a cidic aft盯 manufacture; look ins tead for
acid-free in kjet printing paper and mat bo缸d
(u s ually m ade fro m cotton rag) that are ava il-
able fro m specialty re ta ilers. Those same reta il-
ers (search fo r archival s upplies) can also provide
s table, chemically neutral p lastic b ags, sleeves, a n d
boxes s ized fo r p rints, d isks, slides, o r negatives.
CHAPTER 7 H 133
PAU L D’ AMATO I Qualities of Ligh t. ……… … 136
Isela, αic:ago, 1993· I From direct阳d咖sed …… …. 136
Simple Portrait
Lighting …. ………… …. 144
Existing Light . ……….. …. 138
Use what’s available . ……. …. 138
Using Artificial Light ….. …. 146
Photolamp or flash ……… …. 146
The Main Light ……….. …. 140
The strongest source of light .. …. 140
Fill Ligh t ….. ……….. …. 142
Mor e about Flash ……… …. 148
How to position it ………. …. 148
切惚·hten shado削 ……… …. 142 Using Flash .. ………… …. 150
In this chapter yo,i’Ll leαrn …
• the qualities of natural light-the soze 。fthe source,
its direction, c。l。r, and ,ntens,ry-and the effect
that changing these qualities will have on y。ur
phot。graphs.
• to duplicate the qualities 。f natu甩l light with
aπifoc,al light that you can c。ntrol.
• to understand the differences between electronic Aash
and continuous light, and to use a camera-mounted
Aash unit to make correctly exp。sed images.
Carry Winogrand. Los Angeleι 1969. Light it叫'{can
sometimes be the subject of伪e picture. Winogrand often
photographed comp!<臼interactions that we all see e时,yday
but seldom notice. Here, in addition 阳the mix of people on the
street, a reflection from a s阳mwindow makes it appear there
are two suns. Winogrand said, “I photograph to see what the
photograph will look like. »
Usin ht 8
darken the sky, o r you change p。sition s。 y。ur su均ect is lit from ~;甜!~sc:
behind, or you move from a brigh t a rea to the s h ade, your p ictures will
ch a n ge as a result. Light chan ges indoors, coo: your subject may move closer
to a s unny window,。E you m ay t u rn o n overhead lig h ts or decide to use a flas h
to light your photograph .
Lig h t can affect 巾 feeling of the ph。tograph s。 that a subject appears,
fo r example, b rilliant and crisp, h azy a n d so丘, stark or romanci巳 Ifyou mak e
a point of observing the ligh t on your s u bject, you wi ll soon learn to p redict
how it wi ll look in you r ph。tographs, a n d you will find it easier to use existing
light o r to arrange the lig h ting yourself to get just the effect you wane.
135
Qi飞alities of Light
FROM DIRECT TO DIFFUSED
L ight can range from direct and contras句
to diffused 四d sof址, whether indoors or 。Ut.
A n d w h e ther you control the ligh t o n your s ubject
or accept w h at is th e re, you should recogn ize th e
d iffe ren ces. H ere’s how to identi今 these d ifferent
qualities oflig h t a nd p redict h ow they w ill look in
you r p h otograp h.
Direct ligh t is high in c ontrast . It crea tes
bright highlig h ts a n d d ark shad ows w it h har d ,
o r s h arp, e d ges. Ph otogra p hic m a terials, both
digital and fi lm , h a ve limited dynamic range
(latit叫e) a nd cannot reco rd d e t ails in very
ligh t a n d ver y dark a reas a t t h e sam e ti m e.
D irec tly lit a reas may a ppear brilliant a nd b o ld ,
w ith s hadowed o n es a lmost entirely black . If you
are photographi n g in d irect lig h t , you m ay want
to a dd fi ll ligh t ( p ages 142- 143) to ligh ten shad-
ows. Beca use direct lig ht is o丘en q ui t e brig ht,
you can use a s m all a p erture to g ive p lenty
o f depth 。f fi eld , a fast s hutter speed to stop
m o t ion, o r b oth , if the lig h t is b righ t e n o u gh.
T h e s u n o n a clear d ay is a commo n source of
direc t lig h t . Indoors, a flash or p h oto lamp p。int
ed d irectly at your su均ect ( that is, n ot bo unced
off anoth er s urface) also provid es d irect lig ht.
Direcεlight
Dorothea Lange. Woman of the High Plains, Childr,出sCoung,, 7注明, 1938.
Compare the qualities of light in th臼epic- Directional/d,狲sed light-definite shad,棚,
but softer edged than in direct I,也ht. Diffused
l也ht-indirect and soft.
tures and阶e effect it has on the su怡出 Direct
fight-contrasg,, with hard-edged shado附
Pro.iect: THE sAME su町ECT I N D I FFER ENT 川HT
PROCEDURE Photograph the same pe归。n in several d ifferen t
lighting situat i。ns. F。r example,。n a sunny day begin by photo-
graphi ng 。utdoors in the sun T叩n。t tow。rk a t noon when the
sun is directly overhead Light usually appears m。re interesting in
the m。rni ng 。r a仕ernoon when the sun is aεan angle to the su均ect
Make severa l exposu陀s in each situation.
Worl< 陀latively close: head-a nd-shoulders rather than full伦n寥hviews.
Fi陌t, have the sun behind your back, s。 it shines directly int。 the
person’s face Then move y。ur su同ect so the sun is shining on him 。r
her from the side. Then have the sun behind the pers。n, so he or she
is backlit. (Page 72 tells how to meter backlit scenes.)
Make several ph。tographs in di侃』sed natural light, for 四ample,
under a tree 。r in the shade of a bu ilding. Make some ind。。目, with
the pe归。n illuminated by light c。ming from a wind。w.
1 36 USING LI GH T
As a compa rison to sunlight in the morning or aftern。。n, y。u
could als。 make some photographs 目n。on w ith the su同ect lit by
the sun overhead to see why it is not recommend ed .
Select the best poπrait in each type of light .
HOW DID YOU DO? What d。 y。u see thaε is di仇rent
a mong the vari。u s ph。tographs? Is there m。re t四ture visible in
s。me sh。臼P Do the shad。ws seem too dark in some? (Pages 142-
143 tell h。w to use fi ll light to make shad ows lighter.)
How d oes the light affect t he mod eling ( the appearance of
v。lume)_ 。f the fa ce? Light not only changes the way subjects
a ppear in a p h。tograph, it can cha nge the way we perceive or 也el
a bo ut them . Do some 。f the portra its appear so仕er? Harsher?
M。re dramatic >
Tina Barney. Mom, 1996.
Di侃,sec! Ugh拿
Sage Sohier. Girl Being Prepared for a Horse Sho叫 Sandwich, NH, 2004.
D irection al/ d iffi』sed lig ht is interm ediate in
contrast. Ir is partly d irect an d partly di仔used.
Sh adows are present, bur t hey a re softer an d n or
as dark as those casr by direct light.
You will encou nter di recrional/ diffused lighr
。n a ha勾F day when the sun ’s rays are somewhar
scattered so light comes from the su1-r。unding
sky as well as fro m the su n. A shaded area, such as
u nder t rees o r along the shady side 。fa building,
can have direction al/ diffused light if the lighr is
bouncing o nto the scene primari ly from one di rec-
tion. Indoors, a skylighr or other large wi ndow
can give th is type of light if the sun is not shin-
ing direct妙。n the SU均ecr. Lighr fro m a flas h or
photo lamp can also be direcrional/ diffused if ir is
softened by a rranslucenr diffusi ng material placed
in front of rh e light or if it is bounced 。ff another
surface such as a wall or an u mbrella reflector.
Di佩』sed ligh t is low in contr ast. Ir bath es
subjects in ligh t from all sides so that shadows
a re weak or even absent. Colors are less br illianr
t h an they are in d irect ligh t an d are likely to be
pastel or m u red in tone. Because diffused light is
likely to be di m mer rhan direct ligh t, you m igh t
n ot be able to use a s m all apertu re with a fas r
sh utter speed.
A heavily overcast day creares diffused ligh r
because t h e ligh r is casr even ly by rhe who le
dome of t h e sky rath er rhan , as it is o n a
sun ny day, mostly by t he s m all d isk of t h e su n.
In doors, diffu sed ligh r can be creared with a ve1y
broad s。urce of light used close to t he s ubjecr
(such as ligh r bounced into a large umbr ella
reflector) p lus addirio nal fi ll light. (Page 143 top
shows a吵box-anorher broad sourc←u时 in
a lighting setup.)
CHA PT ER 8 I!’需 137
Existing Light
USE WH A丁’S AVAILABLE
D o n ’t w a it for a s u n ny d ay to g o phot o
g raphing . You can E丛《e p ictures even if t h e ligh t
1s d im: indoors, in t h e ram or snow, at dawn or
dusk. If you see a scene that appeals to you, you
can find a way co ph otograph it.
A h igh ISO is u seful when light is d im. It w ill
help you sh。。t a t a fast enough s hutter speed
to s top m。tion or at a small enough aperture to
give adequate depth of fie ld. A t ripod can steady
a camera for long exposures.
John Collier. Grandfather Romero, 99 years old,
Trampaι NewM时co, 1943. Use the light you
fi, d if you can; it usually looks the most believable.
T,y 阳make some伪ing out of what is already there
138 US ING LIGHT
before thinking of changing anything. The l信仰in this
room from one small window is simple and effective.
….
Ken”eth Josephson. Chicago,
1961. Available light 臼n also
mean available shadow. 0卢en, the
play of light and shadow alone 臼n
be enough 阳make a great picture.
Assu句“毛 the {igu -es here are not
as impo刷nt as the arra咿ment
。rshapes made钞bi缸。(sunlight
piercing the overhead structure of
Chi,臼,go’sele时ted train.
David Alan Harvey. Easter Celebration in the
Mixtec Reion, 0剧:aca,M白白, 1992. In 田tremely
dim I也h电 start wrth 伪ehigh自t ISO your 阔,,,era
o伊rs (or an ultrafast fi阳 like F可i Neopan 1600)
Only阶e臼ndles illuminate this scene, which was le~
reddish by the photographer e昭n though the white
balan臼 could be adjusted 巾p出I-production. Brack-
eting is always a good idea in marginal I,拚tingsitua·
tions. Make several extra sho缸ifyou臼n, increasing
the 由:posu鸣 then decreasing it.
C H A PT ER 8 I!’需 139
The Mαin Light
THE STRONGEST SOURCE OF LIGHT
T he most realistic a nd usually t h e most
p leasing lighting resembles d aylight, the
ligh t we see most often: o n e main source oflight
from above creating a s ing le set of shadows.
Lighting seems unrealistic (although t here may
be ti mes wh en you will wan t that) if it comes
from below or if it comes from two or more
equally strong sources t hat produce shadows
going in d ifferent d irections.
S hadows define 由e lig hting. Although pho-
tograph ers talk about the quality of lig h t com ing
fro m a particular source, it is actually the s hadows
created by the ligh t that can m汰e an image harsh
orso丘, menacing or appealing. To a great extent,
the shadows determine th e solidity or v。lume that
shapes appear to have, the degree to wh ich E四ture
is shown , and s。meti mes t he mo。d or emo tion of
the picture.
The m ain Ii拚t, the brightest Ii阱t必川1g 。n
a SU均ect, creates t he st rongest shadows. If you
are t巾ng to set u p a ligh ting arrangemen飞 look
at the su均ect from camera position. Notice the
way the shadows shape o r model the su均已ct as
you move t he main lig h t around or as you change
the positi口n of the su同ect in 阳lat
main light. .
Direct ligh t from a 500-watt incandescent
lamp in a bowl-shaped metal reflector was used
fo r these photographs, with no oth凹 light sources,
producing shadows that are hard edged and dark.
Di rect sunligh t or direct flash will produce similar
effects. The light would be softer if it were bounced
onto the su均ect from another surface, such as an
umbrella reflector (shown o n p咿 145), o r if it
were diffused Fill l胁t (see pages 142- 143) would
lighten the shadows.
140 USING LI GH T
科
叫
l>晶
Frontlighti,咯 Here the main light 且p归自d close 阳 the lens,因呻en
a flash unit attached to the 臼mera ispo巾ted directly at 伪e subject.
Fewer shadows are ν’isible from camera position wi,阶 this仰eoflighting
than with others, and, as a result, forms seem flattened and t臼阳res less
pronounced. Many ne附photos and snapshots are front/it because it is
simple and quick 阳 shoot with the flash on the camera
d国
High 45。 I也hti.咯 /(the main light is moν'edh妙and to the side of
the camera, not precisely at 45。 but somewhere in 伪at 时cinity, shado附
model the face to a rounded shape and emphasize t臼tures more than
时阶front l也hting. This is often the main l也•ht pos’ition used in comme产
cial portrait studio耳 fill l也ht would then be added to lighten the shado回
~卸
d国
Side lighti略Amain /也ht at about a 90。 angje to the camera will I,拚t
the SU句“ br也ht如on 。ne side and cast shado附across the other side.
When the sun is low on the horizon at sunset or sunrise, it can create side
lighting 伪at adds interest 阳归ndscapes and other outdoors臼nes. Side
l也•hting岳阳metimes used 阳dramatize a portrait.
4国
Backlighti,号 Here the light is moν·ed around farther to the back of
the SU怡ct than it is for side lighting. If the l也•ht was direc.吵behind the
subje,代价e entire fa臼would be 巾shadowwi.阶just the hair outlined
bya rim of也·ht. Back/.也htin阜 also called edge or rim lightin阜 is used in
mu/t,伊le-light setups 阳bring out texture or阳separate 阶e SU句ect from
the 切ckground.
--捆
Top lighting. With the l也ht direct吻。时rhead, long dark shado回 are
cast M阳eye sockets and under nose and chin, producing an effect that is
seldom appealing for portraits. Unfortunate少, top lighting is not uncom-
’”。,,-outdoors at noon when the sun is overhead or indoors when the
main l敏t市 coming from ceiling fixtures. Fill /,也•ht added 阳l也·ht,削阶e
sh ado阴阳n help β四 n田tpage)
m
川v:
一捆
Bottom lighting. 咿,ting that comes from below /,。由distinctly odd
in a portrait. 7百位ιbe臼use light on people outdoors or indoors almost
never comes from below. This type of light 臼•sts unnatural shado附 that
often create a menacing effect. Some produ巾, howe时r-gjassware,
fore.κample-are effectiv,吵lit from belo叫 such lighting is often seen in
ad时rtisingphotographs.
C HAPTER 8 I!’需 1 41
Fill Light
TO LIGHTEN SHADOWS
Fm lig h t m akes s h a dows less d a rk by adding
light to them. Photographic materials can record
detail and texture in either brightly lit areas or
deeply shadowed ones but generally not in both
at the same time. So if important shadow areas
缸e much darker than lit areas-for 四ample, the
shaded s ide of a person’s face in a sunlit portrait-
consider whether addin g fill light wi ll improve
your picture. T he fill lig ht should not overpower
the main light but simply raise the lig ht level of
shadow areas so you can see clear detail in the
final image.
W h e n do you need fi ll ligh t? Negative films are
very sensitive to contrast; digital capture is some-
what less so. With either, as little as two stops
d能rence between lit and shaded areas can make
shadows ve1y dark. HOR (pages 74-75) can help
control excessive contrast but the su均ect must be
absolutely stationa1y; it can’t help when you are
photograph in g people.
In most portraits, a partly shaded subject that
has shadows two stops darker than the lit side of
the face will be contrasty but will still sho即 full
texture and detail everywhere. But when shadows
get to be three or more stops darker than lit areas,
在II light becomes useful. You can control contr出E
between highlights and shadows later, in editing,
but results are often better if you can lig hten
shadows by adding fill ligh飞 rather than t巾ng to
lighten a too-dark shadow later.
F ill ligh t o u t doors. It is easier to get a p leasant
expression on a person’s face in a sunlit outd。。I
portrait if the su均已ct is lit from the s ide 。r from
beh ind and not squinting into the sun. These
positions, however, can make the shad。wed side
of the face too dark. In such c臼es, you can add fill
light to decrease the contrast between the lit and
shadowed sides of the face (see rψt). You can
142 USING LI G HT
a lso use fill light outdoors for close-ups of flow-
ers or other relati ly small o均ects in which the
shadows would otherwise be too dark.
Fill ligh t in d oors. A sin g le photoflood or flash
used ind。ors 。ften produces a ve1y contrasty light
in which the shaded side of the face (or any other
subject) will be very dark if巾 lit side is exposed
n。rmally. Such light is likely to appear more con-
trascy than in a similar photograph lit by sunlight
because light from the sky acts as 自II light out-
doors. Notice how dark the shaded areas are in
the single-lig ht portraits on pages 140-141. You
might want such contrasty lighting for certain
photographs, but ordinarily fill light should be
added to make the shadows lighter.
Sou r ces o f fi ll light. A reflector, such as a
white card or cloth, is a good way to add fill light
indoors 。r out. An aluminized “s pace b lanket”
from a camping-supply store is easy to carry and
hig hly reflective. Convenient collapsing “ bounce
cards” are available from camera retailers that
cater to professionals. Hold ing a reflector at the
correct angle, usually on the opposite side of the
subject from the main light, will reflect s。me 。f
d飞emai口 light into d飞e shad。叽,S
A flash can be used for fill light ind。口rs
or outdoors. A un it in 、、,hich d飞e brightness 。f
d飞e flash can be adjusted is much easier to use
than one with a fixed output. Some flash units
designed for use with automatic cameras (or built
into the camera bod份 can be set to prov陆白ll
flash automatically.
In indoor setups, light from another ph。to
flood can be used for fill light. To keep the fill
lig ht from overpowering the m副n light, the fill
can be far出er from the su均ect than the main
lig ht, oflesser intensity, bounced, 。r diffused. See
photographs opposite.
Front/,也-ht. The ma的face
is lit by sunlight sh巾ingdi
rectfy on it. Facing someone
M归 the sun usually臼uses
an awkward squint against
the br也ht I,也·ht.
Backlight. Here he faces
away from the sun and has
a more re归xed expression.
Increasing the exp出ure
would l也·hten the shadowed
side of his face but make the
lit side very l也ht.
Back/.也ht plus fill light.
Here he still faces away from
the sun, but fill I.也•ht has been
added归 Ii%),阳n the shaded
side of the face. A reflection
of the bounce card appears in
hisgla自由 Such reflections
臼n be controlled by angling
the h臼d slight,护
Using a reflector for fill I也-ht. A M也e white cloth or card
臼n lighten shado阔的切cklit or side/it portraits by reflecting
onto 阶e shaded side of the suψct some of the il/un
–
from the ma巾light. Sometimes n时earbyo句iects will act as natu
rat reflectors, such as sa叫 sno叫 wateι or a light-colored wall.
7百e reflector臼n be clamped to a stand, held by an ass.岳阳nt, or
simp如propped up. 7百edo.且r the reflector is 阳 the sut庐吃 the
more light it will reflect into the shado晒 Be careful to keep it
out of the picture.
In 阶e臼:amp/eon阳也h; themai,,,也ht is on your lefi-
the sitter’s riif,ι The light is inside a如卢box, used to sofien
shadow edges. Clamped to a s臼nd on the opposite side of the
阳怡,ais 伪e reflecto.ι且metimes called a bounce臼M
For a portrait, t,y to angle the reflector to add enough fill
l也•ht so the shadowed side of the face is one 归 two stops darker
than the sunlit side. Here’s how to count the number of stops’
difl♀rence. Meter only伪e lit side and note 伪e shutte俨speed
and aperture settings. Meter only阶e shado附d side and note
the shutter speed and aperture. 7百e number off stops ( or
shutte问:peed settings) between the t附 exposures equals the
number of stops’ di如renee.
Using a pho阳flood for fill I也·ht- The photographer pla臼d
the main light at about a 45。 angle 阳 the lef飞 then positioned
a second photoflood on the right side of the camera so it
increased 阶ebr也htness of the shado附 This fill l也ht was
placed close to the 臼mera’s lens so it did not crea阳secondary
shado附 that would be visible from camera position. The main
light was pla臼d closer to 伪e subject so it would be stronger
than 伪e fill light.
Meter the lit side of the scene and the shaded side; then
adjust 阶el.也hts until the shaded side is one 归 two stops darker
than the lit side. To get an accurate reading, you must me阳r
each area separately without including阶e background or other
ar,臼s of different br,也•htness. !(you are photographing_时少
smallo句;ec筒,you臼n use a spot meter or make substitution
readings from a pho归•graphicgray card positioned first on the
lit side, then on the shadowed side.
Using flash for fill light. To I.也•hten the shadows on the
subject’s face, the photographer attached a flash unit to her
camera. If the flash light is too bright, it 印,3 0时,power阶e
main /也•ht and create an 川,,atura/ effect. To prevent 阶is, the
photographer set the flash for manual operation and draped
a handkerchief over the flash head to decrease the intensity of
阶e light. She could also have stepped back from the sut庐d
(al伪ough this附uld ha昭changed 伪e framing of the s,四ne), or,
时阶 some flash units, decreased阶el,也ht output of the flash.
The handkerchief also cha怨自阶equality of伪e light. Like
a small version of the soβbox pictured abo吨 it increases the
apparent size of the source and如s/igh吵如卢·ens the harshness
阶at usually results from small 臼mera-mounted flash units.
Many flash at臼chments and light modifiers are available坦1Ja
rately to further alter the harshness 。fon-camera flash.
See your owner’s manual for instructions on how to set your
camera and flash for fill lighting. In general, for a subject that
is partly lit and partly shaded, decrease 伪ebr,也-htn醋。fthe
flash on the su侬d until it is one to two stops less than the 切sic
由:posure from the sun.
Simple Portrαit Lighting
M any fin e portraits h a ve b een made u s ing
simple light ing setups. You don ‘ t need a com-
plicated ar rangement of ligh ts to make a good
p。rrrait. In fact, the s impler t he setup, the m ore
comfortable an d relaxed your subject is likely to
be. (See pages 166- 169 for m ore about ph。to
graph ing people.)
Ou时oors, o pe n sha d e or a n overcast s ky
surrou nds a subject in soft, even lighting (photo-
graph opposi te, b。ttom). In open shade, the per-
son is o ut of direct s un ligh t, perhaps u nder a tree
or in t he shade of a buildi ng. Illu m ination comes
fro m light reflected from th e ground, a n earby
wall, or oth er surfaces. If th e sun is hidden by an
overcast or cloudy sky, ligh t is scattered over the
SU均ecr from t he entire sky. In sunligh t, shadows
may appear relatively bluish because t h ey are hid-
den from t he s un and illu minated o nly wi th light
fro m the sky.
144 USING LIGHT
Indo ors, window lig h t is a conven ient source
of light du ri ng the day (th is page, bottom). T he
closer your su bject is to the window, the brigh ter
the ligh t will be. If direct sunlight is sh ining
th rough the wi ndow an d falls on t h e subject,
contrast w ill be ve1y h igh: lit areas ve1y light,
unlit a reas very dar k. A small wi ndow will create
harder shadows than a large o ne. U nless you want
ext reme con trast, ir’s best to have the subject also
lit by indirect ligh t bounci ng off o t her surfaces. A
reflector opposi te t h e w indow can lighten sh ad-
ows by adding fi ll light to t h e s ide of t h e pers。n
fac ing away from the window.
A m a in light-photo何ood or 何ash-plus
re何ector fill is a si m ple setup when available
ligh t is inadequate (see opposi te top). Bouncing
the m ain light (s。metimes called the key ligh t)
into an u m brella reflector provides a softer light
than sh ining it directly onto the subject .
Amy Stein. \,\斤,,dow#2,
200S. Window light can
be contras飞y unless other
windo町, as here, a nearby
l也·ht-colored wa吧。ra well-
placed reflectoιprovide fill.
Stein’s series D。mest1cat
ed “e净lores our paradoxical
relation sh伊时阶 the ’wild. ” ’
Like the birds, the woman
looks at the world from inside
her geometric enclosure.
Sam Com en. Amy Adams for The New Y,。rkTimes,
Los Angeles, 2014. A main light plus reρector fill
is the simplest setup when you want to arrange the
lightingyourself. 7百e ma巾source of light here is from a
medium-sized如,ftbox pointed at the subject. A reflector
on 伪e。伪er side 。{the SU侬ct bounces如me 。fthe
fightback 阳也·hten the shadows. αmenwasiven
about tweno/ minu阳阳shoot the staro{Tim Burton’s
Big Eyes in a hotel’s conferen臼 room.
John Weiss . Carry Temple阳”, San Diego Padres,
1984. In open shade outdoors, a buildin阜 tree,
orothero协d blocks the direct rays of the sun.
So卢er indirect lif!),t bounces onto the su怡cι Here,
the ballplayer was shaded 钞the dugout roof ηe
photographer hung a black cloth on the dugout wall
to pro时de a plain background.
C H A PT ER 8 I!’需 1 45
Using Artificiαl Light
PHOTOLAMP OR FLASH
Ar训cial ligh t sources let you bring your own
light with you when the sun goes down, w hen you
ph otograph in a relatively dar k room, 。E when
you need just a little m ore lig h t t han is avai lable.
Arti ficial sources are consistent an d never go
beh in d a clou d jus t when you’re ready to ta!也 a
picture. You can manip ula te them to produce any
effect you want-from lig ht t h at looks like natu ral
sun light to underlighting e仔ec臼 that are seldom
fo und in nature. 01日erent sources produce light
ofdi险阻nt color balances, each requ iring a d iffe r-
ent wh ite balan ce setting.
C ontinuously burning ( incandescent) lamps
s uch as LED bu lbs, t ungsten ligh ts, and q uartz
(。r halogen) lamps p lug into an electrical o utlet .
Because they let you see h。w t h e lig h t a仔ects th e
SU均已ct, they are excellent for portr出“, sti ll l治s,
and other station ary s山,jects that give you t ime to
adjust th e lig ht exactly. Determ in ing th e exposure
is easy: you met盯 the brightness of t he light j ust
as you do outdoors. Professional ph otographers
often refer t。 continuous sources as hot I.也hts.
Electronic 何ash or strobe is the m ost popular
source of portable lig h t. Power can com e from
eith er batteries, a rechargeable power pack, or an
electrical o utlet . Som e un i臼 are built into cam-
eras, bu t the m ore powerfol o nes, wh ich can light
o均eccs at a g reater distan ce, are a separate acces-
sory. Because elect ronic flash is fast eno ugh to
freeze most m。tion, it is a good choice w hen you
need to light u nposed shots or moving subjects.
Flash must be s归chronized with 由e cam-
e ra’ s shutter so th e flash of light occurs when
the shu tter is fully 。pen. 飞With most single-lens
refl四 can1eras that have a focal -plane shutter,
shutter speeds of l/60 sec. or slower will synch ro-
n ize with elect ron ic flash; some models have
shutters t hat syn chronize at h igher speeds, u p
to V300 sec. At sh utter speeds faste r than t h at, the
camera’s sh utter curtains are open only part of the
way at any time so o nly part of t h e sen sor would
be exposed. T h e fastes t shutter speed d uring
which th e curt ains open all the way is called the
146 USIN G LIGHT
sync speed. Caiτ1eras with leaf shutters synchr。nize
with flash at any sh utter speed. Somεtop-oιthe
lir
speci白C camera m odel) can operate in h(坦b平时d
sync mode so the camera’s focal -plane shu tter
can be set for any sh utter speed. See your owner’s
m anual for details o n how to set the camera and
connect the flash ro it.
A utomat ic flas h units have a sensor that mea-
su res the amount ofl> 1t reflected by the su同ect
during the flash; the unit terminates the flash
when th e exposu re is adequ ate. Even if you have
an automatic u n it , s。metimes you will want to
calcu late an d set the flash exposure manu ally,
such as when the su均ect is ve1y close ro the flash
or very far from it and not wi t hi n the automatic
flash range. Like a utomatic foc us, automatic flash
units may give less accu rate results when your
su bject is not centered in th e frame. M。St dedi卜
cated flash models allow the came问 when set
fo r one of its auto-exposure modes, to control
the brightness of th e flas h automatically to add a
preset level of fi ll.
Determining your own exposu re with 何ash IS
different fro m doing so with o ther light sources
because th e flash of light is too brief to measure
with an ordi na1y light meter. Some professionals
use a h and-held light meter that can measure th e
brief burst of a flash, but you can also accurately
determine flash exposure using the histogram
display on the back of a d igital camera Use a
manual 四posure mode and test exposu res,
va1ying t he aperture, ISO, or flas h power set-
t ing. Because the farth er the su同ect is fro m a
given flash un it , the dimmer the light that it
receives, you can also calcu late y。ur flas h expo-
sure by knowi ng-or guessi ng-the subject’s
distance (opposite).
Automatic electronic flash is a standard accessory
for an au阳matic由p出ure 臼mera. The flash has a
light-旦时iti,时 cell and electronic circuitry that sets
the duration of the flash~ metering the amount of
light reflected by the sut庐dduring the 自:posure.
The inverse square law is the basis for flash
exposure 臼lculations. The farther that light traν岭,
the more the light rays spread out and the dimmer
the resulting illumination. 7百e law states that
at twice a gj时叫'istance, an 。收ct re出i昭sonly
o,陪fourth the I也•ht (intensity of illumination is
巾versely proportional to 阶e square of the distance
from l也’ht tO SU句iect). In the illustration here, only
one-fourth the amount of light falls on an o与ect at
10卢 from a l也'ht source as on an o向;ect at 5 ft.
from the sou町e
To calculate your own flash exposure,you need
to know two 伪ings: the distance the l也•ht travels 阳
the subject and the guide number (a ratinggjven
by 伪e ma阳{acturer for the flash when used with
a specific ISO) . Divide the distance that the l也·ht
travels from flash unit to subject into the guide
number to give you the lens fstop you should use.
Some flash units have a calculator dial that will
do the division for you. Dial in the ISO and the
flash-to-su句;ect distance, and the dial will show the
correct fstop.
Bounce flash travels an extra distance. If you
are 臼lculating a bounce flash exposure, measure
the distance not from flash 阳 SU与ect but from flash
to reflecting surface to subject. In addition, open
the lens aperture an 臼tra one-half stop or full stop
toallowforl也ht absorbed by the reflecting surface.
Open even more if the reflecting su彷ce is not white
or very l信仰in 阳ne.
Some automatic flash units ha昭a head that can
be swiveled up or to the side for bounce flash while
the flash sensor remains pointed at the s吻丽而h
type of unit 臼n au阳matica/,ψ臼lculate a bounce
flash exposure be臼use no matter ,.响ere the head is
pointe~'. 伪e sensor will read the light reflected from
the SU协ct toward阶e臼mera Some cameras can
measure flash light 伪rough the lens: these also can
be used au阳matica吵with bounce flash
。 5 仕 20 丘
X. the light
asat 5 丘
10 丘
14 the l唱ht
asat 5 丘
Manually Calculating a Direct Flash Exp。”re
Guide number is 80 with this fl ash unit used with ISO 100 fil m
曾三 布鲁 稽可
。 5 仕 20 丘1 0 仕
Guide number , 80
一一一一一- . 卜stop – • 16
Distance from
由ash to su均ect
80 — a x
10
80 .
– a n
20
@@ 0
可16 f/ 8 f/ 4
Manually Calculating a Bounce Ras h Exposure
/ ~ Re而ectmg surface
sY ~年
/ //\\
J仨,._、…….
Gu ide nu mber _
• t-st。。
Distance fr。m ’
flas h m陀fleeting
sur缸e tO SU均ect
~ • 8
10
Open lens 。ne stop 。rm。re to
c。mpensate fo r hght absorbed
by refl ecting surface
f/8一》 f/5.6
C h a n g ing t h e s hutter s peed d o es not a仔ect
由e exp o s ure from a 何ash, as long 曰:r is
wit h in the a ccep table ran ge for synchr。nization
(the sync speed 。E slower).
You can determine the amo unt oflig ht fal lmg
o n th e su均ect by d ivid ing th e d is tance to t h e su b –
ject into the flash u n it’s outpu t (its gi.ide nmnb旷)
T h en you set th e aperture accordi咆ly (see illustra-
ti。ns above). Som e manufact川rs overrate gu由
n umbers a b it (in o rder to m ake the ir prod u cts
s。und mo re power ful than th ey actual抄 are), so
it’s a good idea to t ry out a new flash u n it with
s。me test exp osures o r a professio n al flas h m eter
before you use it fo r a n ything imp o rtant.
C HA PT ER 8 I!’需 1 47
More αbout Flash
HOW TO POSITION IT
per haps you can change your own position to
have the same effect. You can also modi今 the
fl ash so it m ore evenly reach es vari。us parts 。f
the scene, such as by bou ncing the lig ht o n to t h e
SU均ect 。r you can use more than 。ne flash u n it.
If none of t h ese options is possible, you s imply
have to work w it h the fact that those parts of t h e
scene t hat are fa rt h er fro m the fl ash will be darker
than those that are closer. U nless it is extrem e,
you can effectively co m pensate fo r uneven expo-
sure in editing. If you know the light falls off and
gets di m mer t h e fa rther it t ravels, you can at least
predict how t he flash will illu m inate a scene.
lig h t ge岱 dimmer the 也rther it t ravels.
Lig h t fro m any source-a w indow, a conrinu。usly
burning lamp, a fl ash-follows t he same general
rule: the light falls off (gets d im mer) th e farther
巾 lψE source is fro m an o均ect. You can see
and measure that effect if, for 四ample, you meter
o均ects that are near a brig ht lamp compared to
those that are farth er away. But ligh t from a flas h
comes and goes so fast that you can’t see the effect
of t he flash on a scene a t the t ime you are ta!。ng
the picture.
同ash portrai臼. In one way, flas h is easy to use for
portraits: the flash of light is so fast that you don’t
have to wony about th e subject blurring because
it moved during the exposure. Bur t he ligh t fro m
the flash is so quick (1/1刷sec. o r shorter) 巾tyou
can ’t really see what th e su bject looks like when lit.
Howev凹, with some practice you can predict the
qualities 。f lig ht t hat are typical of different flash
positions. Sho叭响。n the opposite page are some
si mple lighti ng semps for portraiture.
A 何ash-lit scen e m ay not be evenly illumi-
n ated . Because light from a fl ash gets di mmer
the farther it travels, you h ave to use a smaller
lens apert ure fo r subjects close to th e fl ash, a
wider ap盯ture for su bjects farther away. There are
several ways to determine t he correct exposure for
a SL均ect at a given d istance (pages 146- 1 4乃 But
w hat do you do if different parts of t he same scene
are at different distances fro m th e fl邵阳
Someti mes you can rearrange the su均ect,
such 臼 the people in a group p。rtrait , so all are
more or less at the sam e distance fro m the flash;
When obje出 are at different distances
from a flash, those that are closer will be
l也ighter than those that are farther a协‘,·a
Notice how dark the back of the room i. ·s: ,
e时n阶e dots tail is darker than his head.
T,y 阳position the m出t important pa础。fa
阳·ne (or position the flash) so they are more
or less the same distance from the flash
Notice the dots unusually b时rght 电yes. In
a color photograph they would appear red.
Red-eye 且a reflection of the eye’s retina
through its lens and occurs when the flash is
mounted too close to the 臼mera’s lens The
retina’s surface 且covered with blood ve出·Is
that make 伪e reflected I,敏tred. Foran
自·ample of red吃ye in coloι see page 218.
只
伽
旱’伽
a
-3
US ING LIGHT 148
Direct flash on camera is simple and easy to use be臼use the
flash is attached to the 臼mera. The light shining straight at
阶e subject from camera position, however, tends to flatten out
roundness and gives a rather harsh look
‘阿
’
Flash bounced from above onto 阶e SU句iect gives a softer, more
natural light than direct flash . L也•ht can also be directed into a
large pie臼 ofwhite 臼rdboard or an umbrella reflector and then
bounced onto 阶e subject. Bouncing the flash cuts the amount
。fl也ht that reaches the subject. Some flash units au阳matically
compensate for this, or you 臼n make 伪e exposure adjustment
your四lf(see page 147)
气墨画
Direct flash o疗camera-usual如raised and 阳one side-
gi,时s more roundness and modeling than does flash on camera.
A 毛ynchronization ( or synφ cord lets you mo时 the flash away
from the camera To avoid a shadow on the wall, move the
subject away from it or raise the flash more.
@
Flash bounced from the side onto the su句;ect gives a soft,
flattering l也ht. You can use a light-colored wall, a large piece
of white cardboard, or an umbrella reflector. The closer the
subject ι to the reflector, the more distinct the shadows will
be. To avoid a shadow on the back wall, mo昭 the SU句;ect
away from it.
C H APTER 8 I!’需 1 49
Using Flαsh
150 USI N G LIGHT
Bruce Ci/den. Old Man at a Racetrack,
Ireland, 199丘 Flash can be unflatter-
ing, especially direct l也ht斤。ma built-in
flash or one attached 阳 the camera.
Gilden often shoo臼with his camera in one
hand and the flash in the other, connected
bya~nc白,d By moving伪el,吵tsource
away from the臼mera he creates shado削
阶at』归depth to his subje,ι
And, because of its 时可y short duration,
V,ooo sec. or I,阳,flash 臼,,al如呻阳rea
momentary expression. Gilden used this
image in A仕er the O ff, his坦ries on rural
racetracks in Ireland
Carl De Keyzer. GI.κ6. Krasnoyarsk, 2002. Flash fills
伪e shadows. Without the flash, shooting in阳阶e light like
this附uld put the su侬ct 巾silhouet.缸, the position of the
sun is revealed by 伪eshado附ofthe man and the building
coming toward the photographer. 7丁oe blur of movement
around the birds’ wings is the result of’”。ν·eme’” during the
由:posure and is noticeable here because the daylight provides
more of the overall exposure than the flash.
This photograph is from a selfassigned p.’可iect investigat-
ing Siberian prison 臼mpι former gulags, that was published
as 阶e book z。na
CHAPTER 8 I!’需 151
MARC PoKEMPNER I What’s in the Picture … …… . 154
Do附at T加e扭亏, 1974. I The edges or frame …… …… . 154
Formal: Setting them up . ….. … 168
The background …….. …… . 156 Photographing
Fo口皿…… ……….. …… . 158 the Landscape …… …… … 170
\Vhich parts are sharp . … …… . 158
Time and Motion
in a Photograph …… …… . 160
Photo.~raphing
the Cityscape ……. …… … 172
Depth in a Picture ….. …… . 162
Three dimensions become t阳o…. . 162
Photographing Inside …… … 174
Chaos into order . ……. …… . 163 Assembled
Photographing for Meaning .. . 164 to be Photographed . …… … 176
Portraits … ……….. …… . 166
I呐rmal: Findi哝them .. …… . 166
Responding
to Photographs ….. …… … 178
Seein~ Like αCαmerα 1重l 9
In this chapter you ‘LL leαrn …
• to break down your i ntu ,rive way of阻k, nga
pictu陀 i nto consci。us component parts-subject
and con四nt, framing and the edge, and the
fo陀ground/background relati。nshi p.
• to make considered dec凶。ns ab。ut h。wyour
camera settings, location, and subject will affect
the meaning of a photograph.
• h。wto discuss y。ur photog,目phs and those
。f others in ways that s。 beyond ” I like it”
。r “It’sg。。d ”
、--”守·
piαures t r…h e w o r ld y
d飞eW。rid outside thei r edges, and mal
HOW DID YOU DO? Whaεworked best? What would n’t you o rd i-
na ri ly have d o ne?
CHAPTER 9 • 155
Whαt ’s in the Picture
THE BACKGROUND
S eeing t h e background . When you view a
scene, you see most sharply whatever you are look-
ing at directly, and you see less clearly o均ects in
the background or at the periphery of your vision.
If you are concentrating on something of inter-
est, you may not even notice o ther things nearby.
But th e camera’s lens does see them, and it sh。WS
u nselectively eve1yching wi thin its angle of view.
Unwanted or distracting details can be ignored by
the eye l。oking at a scene, but in a picture t hose
details are much more conspicuous. Before shoot-
ing, try to imagine how the scene wi ll look if the
SL句ect and background are given equal emphasis.
To reduce the effect of a distracting background,
you can shoot so that the background is 。ur of
foc us or change your angle of view as sh own in
the photographs at right. There is no rnle that
says you sh。uldn’t have a distracting background;
sometimes that can be exactly the point, as in the
picture opposi te. Just be aware of the different
way the camera sees.
T h e r elations h ip of s ubject to b ackgr o und
is ca lled figure/grou n d, or positive and negative
space, and these terms give you a way to talk about
why a picture works o r doesn’t work. Having a
vocabula1y for the way pictures are structured
(thei r fonnal qualities) d。esn’t n ecessari ly make
you a better photographer, but does allow you
to discuss these issues with o thers and to analyze
what you might be doing subco nsciously. See
pages 178-179.
156 SEE I NG LI KE A CAM E RA
Where’s the subject? The c/u阳rofo吵巾
in the bac/cground attrac臼the eye at least as
much as do the man and bird in the foreground.
/{the picture is about 伪e lo臼tion, then the
A less-intrusive background resulted w由en
the photographer simply moved 归a lower
vantage point and changed the angle fro’”
building can make a u且·(i,I contribution. But if
伪epho臼,graph is supposed阳be about the man
and his bi叫then the busy background seems an
unnec1血sary distraction
which she shot. The p归巾sky provides a clear
separation bet附en figure and ground, and
doesn’t distract 斤。m伪e subject.
Lee Friedlander. New York City, 19 7 4. M ak e sure
you look at the background of a scene as well as the
main subject of interest. If you aren’t paying attention,
you may lose your subject entirely. Con卢,sion of the
background and foreground, however, may itself be the
SU句ect. Here,丹iedlander uses ch阳。scuro, as artists
call patterns of l也·ht and dark, to suggest the intensity
Project: u川G THE BACKGROUND
。f/ife-even for a statue-in New York. The picture
is visually chaotic and ambiguous, but intentionally so.
Remember that the camera records everything wi.阶m
its angle of view with equal impo巾,ice, even if you are
looking on如at one su向;ect. A photograph 臼n render阶e
relation between a foreground ol庐ct and a background
very differently than you perceive it.
PROCEDURE Make p hot ographs in which the bac kground either
complements or contrasts with the su均ect For example, some。ne
descri bed in t he Pr。,ject b。x 。n page 155) as y。u t ry d i仇町、t posi-
t ions from which to photog日ph.
drinking coffee in fr.。nt 。f a large ornat e espress。 maker, an argu ing
couple in front 。fa smiling-face p。ster; a child by a “Library Closed ”
sign; a shopkeeper stand ing in front 。f a store.
Look through the viewfinder ( o r a viewing aid, like the 。ne
HOW D ID YOU DO? Compare several ofy。ur most successfu l
prints. c。u ld the ba句round be seen as clearly as the su均ect? What
d id the background c。ntribute?
CHAPTER 9 • 157
FψC us
WHICH PARTS ARE SHARP
Whe川ou see a scene y,…y…叫ly fo cus
on only o ne d istance at a ti me; objects at all oth er
distances are n o t as sharp. Your eyes automatically
adjust t heir focus as you lo。k from one 。均ect, 。g
pan of an object, to another. If you were at th e
scene sho叭响。pposite, bottom, y。u m ight look
at the wire rack and n o t notice you were seeing
the sai lors much less sharply. If you lo。ked at th e
sai lors your eyes would instantly refocus to see
them sharply. Bu t in a ph。tograph, differences in
the sharpness of o均ects at diffe阳1t distances are
immediately evident because focus relatio nships
are froze n at the ti me of exposure. Su ch differen ces
can be distracti ng o r they can add interest to th e
pho tograph , depending o n ho回y。U use t hem .
158 SEE I NG LIKE A CAMERA
Controlling 由e depth o f field. In some p hoto-
graphs you have little choice ab。ur depth of field
(the area 丘。m near to far w ith in which all 。均e.cts
appear acceptably sharp). For example, in di m
lig h t, or with a low ISO, or un der other condi-
ti。ns, t he depth of field may have to be very shal-
low in order to get any picture at all. But usually
you can control the depth of field to some extent,
as sh own o n pages 44-45. It is not necessarily bet-
ter to have everything sh arp, or th e background
o ut of focus, o r to follow any oth er rules, but it is
important to remember that in t he p hotograph
you wi ll notice what is sharp and what isn’E You
get to choose, and it is one 。fthe most importan t
choices you have.
Ian van Coller. Eastern
lcefield, Mt. Ki/iman-
jaro, Tanzania, 2016
Landscapes are o~en
photographed so that
everything is sharp from
foreground to background.
In this case, land in the
distance is rendered sha’?#
e时n though it is so斤ened by
low clouds.
Van Coller endured
an arduous five-day trek
阳 reach these remaining
ice fields at 19,000 feet for
hι series Th e Last Glacier,
that records par缸。fthe
earth ‘s environment threat-
ened by climate change.
Pro_ject:
USING DEPTH
OF FIELD
PROCEDURE As you
look at various su均ects,
t叩 to anticipate h。w
much depth of fie ld y。u
want, and how you can
increase (。r decrease)
the depth 。f fie ld t o get
more ( o r less)。fthe
photog日ph to appear
sharp. Page 45 sh。ws
how to use aperture
size, 而ocal length, and/
。r d istance t o do this
Make several phot。-
graphs of each scene,
using depth 。f fie ld in
d i民rent ways. See for
example, the landscape
on page 47. You m ight
have the entire scene
sharp, as shown, o r
for the same scene, the
river in 府。nt sharp and
the background out of
focus . How ab。ut j ust
the mountains in the
d istance in focus? Is
there some 。均ect you
can call attention t。
using shall。w depth 。f
fie ld that m ight be over-
looked with 凹e『γthing
in focus?
Kee p n。tes 。fy,。ur
aperture size, foca l
length, d istance, and
why you chose them, to
rem ind y。u later what
y。u d id
HOW DID YOU
。O? C。mpare your
results. Were you able
to get everyth ing sharp
when you wanted it that
way? When you wanted
something out 。f币OCUS,
was it 。ut of focus
en。ugh? Now that y。u
look a t the p时nts, do
you see a nything you
m ight try next t ime?
Elliott Erwitt. Metropolitan Museum of Art,
New York City, 1949. The illusion of depth is
enhanced when the foreground ι in sharp focus
and the background becomes gradually softer.
The gentle transition from near to middle
distance 归 background in this pho阳,graph
emphasiz,臼its realism
R吨y K. Metzk er. The
Loop: Chicago, 1958.
Here the background
is out of focus-but the
photographer wanted the
out-of-focus figu_n田阳be
come the most impo刷nt
element. We naturally
g,ve more attention to
what is 巾阳,sand what
is close but there are
alw,吵怨自出ptions. 7百is
photograph pushes its
subject toward the edge
of recognizability. Even
further toward that edge
is the photograph on page
163, 叩 Both re时m
ourexpec臼t,。叫 putting
the foreground out of
focus and leaving the
background sharp
CHAPTER 9 • 159
Time αnd Motion in α Photograph
A p h o t ogra ph is a s lice o f t im e. Just as you
select the section that you want to photograph
out of a larger scene, you can also choose th e
section of time you want to re.cord. You can chink
of a photograph as ca1ving through rime, caking
a wide slice at a slow shu tter speed or a narrow
slice at a fas t shucter speed. In chat slice of rime,
th ings are movi ng, and, depending o n the shutter
speed, direction of the morion, and o cher factors
discussed earlier (pages 18-2 1), you can sh ow
o均ects frozen in mid-movement , blurred u nti l
they are almost unrecognizable, or blurred to any
extent in between
160 SE E I NG LIK E A CAM E RA
Blur p art of a picture for e mphas is . If t h e
SU均ecc moves a l川le d uring the 四posure (or if
by panning-see page 19-you keep 巾 subject
still and m ove t h e background) you create visual
in terest wi th t h e com parison. Use a t ripod to
keep the background ve1y sharp w hile your sub-
ject moves, as w臼 done in th e photograph below.
Rarely is it effective to have the entire image
blurred by motion, t h e way it wou ld be if you
used coo slow a sh utter speed or didn’ t h old t he
camera s teadi ly. But even a photograph that is
everywhere our of focus can be a visual treat; it is
up to you to m冰e it work.
Mik e M andel. Emptying
the Fridge, 1985. Expo-
sure time controls the
suggesti。”。fmotion. In a
reference to motion studies
made 良ye伊ciency experts
Frank and Lillian Gilbreth
early in the 20
tography was most po,户’缸, for its ability 阳
record a person For most of the 19伪 cent妒
,y, portraits were made only by pro向sionals
or very serious amateurs. George Eastman’s
1888 Kodak camera gave t阳general public
” w吨y 阳 memorialize themselves and others
nearly a’,y time, but getting the prints meant
sending 曲e r.amera away阳加e the film
inside it p”由:essed, and t./rat took time
The photobooth’s inventoηa Siberian immi·
grant named Ana归IJosepho, opened the first
~hotobooth on New Yo础 City’s Broadwa!
in 1925; it made eight portraits on a strip
。{paper, in a阳时 e阳 minutes, for 25,
j出epho’s Pho阳•maton Studio was a sensa·
阳•n, there, over a quarter-mil/ion people
d伊•pedbehind 曲eα川·ain o( one of its
pho阳booths in 曲e first six months,
as many as 7, 500 a day
Daguerreotype ……….. …. 182
咀自igns on silver b咆ht”•••• •••• 182
Calo巧rpe ….. ………… …. 184
Pictures on paper •••••••••• •••• 184
Collodion Wet-Plate …… …. 185
Shaψand reproducible • ••••• •••• 185
Gelatin Emulsion/
Roll-Film Base ………. …. 186
Photograp.抄卢r everyone • ••• •••• 186
Co lor Photogr aphy ……. …. 187
Early Portraits ……….. …. 188
Early Travel Photograp h y . …. 190
Early Images of War …… …. 191
Time and Motion
in Early Photographs …. …. 192
The Photograph
副Document. ……….. …. 193
Photogr 3:phy
and Social Change … …… .. 194
Pho叫ournalism ….. …… .. 196
Photography甜Art
in the 19由 Century… …… .. 200
Pictorial Photogr aphy
and the Photo-Secession … .. 201
The Direct Image in Art ….. .. 202
The Quest for a New Vision . .. 203
Photography画Art
in the 1950s and 1960s ….. .. 204
Photography画Art
in the 1970s and 1980s ….. .. 206
Color Photography
Arrives-Again …… …… .. 208
Digital Ph otography .. …… .. 210
P陀·decessors •••••••••• •••••• •• 210
Becomes mainstream ••• •••••• •• 212
His tor Photo 10
In this chαpler yo1L’ll learn …
• ab。ut the unique era on history into which
photography was b。m
• the l i mi臼 that early photograph ic materials and
processes placed 。n the ki nds 。fphot。graphs that
c。uld be made.
• how ph。tograph_y_grew as an art form, and
。vercame opp。白tion from many d,rect,ons
Joseph Nicephore Niepce. View from His M币,,dow at Le Gras,
Saint-Loup-de-Varennes, France, c. 1826. Niepce produced
伪e world’s first photographic image-a view of the cour切rd
buildings on his estate in about 1826. It was made on a sheet
of pewter covered wi伪 bitumen of Judea, a kind of asphalt
that hardened when exposed to /,也•ht; he 臼/led it a Heliograph
7丁oe unexposed, still-soβ bitumen was then dissolved, leaving a
permanent image. The exp出ure time was so long (eight hours)
that the sun moved across 阶e sky and illuminated both sides of
the courtyard.
p………川…川19由 century-
the electric ligh t , the safety pin, dynamite, and the automobile are
j us t a few others-and of all 。fthen飞 photography probably created
the most astonishment and delight. Today, most people take photographs
for granted, but early viewers were awed an d amazed by the objective records
the camera made.
Photography took over what previously had been 。ne 。fthe main func-
ti。ns of art-the recording of factual vis ual information, s uch as the shape
of an object, its s ize, an d its relation to o ther objects. Instead of having a
portrait painted, people had “ S un Drawn Min iatures” made. Instead of
for ming romantic n。tions of battles and faraway places from paintings,
people began to see firsthand vis ual reports. And soon photography became
an art in its 。wn right.
The camera obscura was the forerunner of t he m ode rn camera. It
was known that rays of lig h t passing through a pinhole for m ed an image.
The 1 0由 centmy Arabian scholar Alhazen described the effect and told how
to view an eclipse 。f the s un in a camera obscura (literally,“dark chamber”)
a darkened E。。m with a pinhole open ing to d飞e o utside. By d飞e time of
t he Renaissance, a lens had been fitted i nt。 the h ole to im prove the image ,
and t h e E。。m-sized device had been reduced to the size of a s mall box that
could easily be carried about The camera obscura became a drawing aid that
enabled an artist to trace an image reflected 。nro a sheet of drawing paper.
What rem ained to b e d iscovered was a way to fix t he cam era o bscur a
im age p e rm a n e ndy. T he darkening of certain s ilver compounds by expo-
sure to light had been obse1ved 臼 early as the 17由 cenru1y, but the u nsolved
and difficult problem 即臼 how to hair t his reaction so that the image would
n ot darken completely.
The first permanent picture was m ad e by J oseph Nic岳phore Niepce,
a gentleman inventor living in central France. He first experi m ented wi th
si lver chloride, wh ich he knew darkened o n exposure to ligh t, but t h en h e
turned to bitumen of Judea, a ki nd of asphalt that hardened when exp。sed
to ligh t. N记pce dissolved the bitumen in lavender oi l, a solvent used in var-
nishes, then coated a sheet of pewter wi th the mixture. He placed the sh eet
in a camera 。bscura aimed t h rough an open windo即 at h is courtyard and
exposed it for eig h t hours. The light form ing the image on the plate harden ed
the bitumen in bright areas and left it soft an d soluble in dark areas. N iepce
then washed t h e plate with lavender o il. T his removed the s till-soft bitumen
that had not been struck by light, leaving a permanent image of the scene
(left). Niepce named the process h eliography (from t h e Greek helios,“sun,”
and graph邸,“drawing”).
181
Dα.guerreotype
“ DESIGNS ON SILVER BRIGHT”
N ews of N ie pce ’ s WO毗 国me t o t he atten-
t ion of a not h e r Fre n chman, Louis J a cques
Mand垂 Daguerre. Daguerre had been using
the camera obscura fo r sketch ing and had also
become interested in ttying to preserve its images.
He wrote Niepce suggesti ng an exchange of infor-
mation, and by 1829 had become his partner.
The mid-19由 century w as ripe for an inven-
t ion s uch as phot o g r a phy. Interest in this new
invention might have spread simply by a growing
interest in science, but ph。tography was more.
In 飞.Vestern countries, a rising m iddle class with
money to spend wanted pictures, especially fami ly
portraits, which, until then, o nly the rich had been
able to afford. In additio口, people were interested
in faraway places; they t raveled to these places
w hen they could and bought travel books and
pictures when they could n。t
N iepce did not live to see the impact that
ph otography was to have. He died in 1833, several
years before Daguen-e perfected a process that he
considered different enough fro m Niepce’s to
be ann。unced to t he world as the daguerreotype
(rig h t and opposite).
The resp onse t o t h e d agu e rreotype was
sensationa l. After experi ment ing for many years,
both wi th Niepce and alone, Daguerre was final ly
satisfied wi th his process, and it was announced
before the French Academy of Sciences on January
7, 1839. A French newspaper rhapsodized:。“What
fi neness in the strokes,飞.Vhat kno飞.vledge 。f chiar-
oscuro ! What delicacy! What exqu isi te fin ish!..
How admirably are the foresh。rtenings given: this
is Nature itself!”
Almost immediately after t h e process was
announced, daguerreotype s tudios were open ed
to provide “ Su n D rawn Miniatures” m a very will-
ing public. By 1853, an esti ma ted three million
daguerreotypes per year were being produced in
the Un ited S tates alone-mostly portraits bu t also
scenic vie飞,VS
182 HI S TOR Y OF PHOTOGRAPHY
Louis Jacques Mande Dague”•· Boulevard du Temple,
Paris, 1839. The busy streets of a Parisian boulevard
appear depopulated because of the long由,posure this
daguerre,。”e required. O吵a person getting a shoeshine n臼r
the corner of the sidewalk stood still long enough to be record-
ed; all the other people, horses, and 臼rriag,由had blurred so
much that no image of them appeared on the plate. The shut-
ter was pro切b如open for several minut,白, much less than the
eight hours required by Niep臼's he/iograph, and the results
were far superior-rich in detail and 归na/ity. The enthusiastic
reception of Daguerre’s process extended 阳poetry: “Light is
that silent artist / Which without 阶e aid of man / Des也rns on
silver br,也·ht/ Daguerre’s immortal plan. ”
Photographer Unknown. Emi如 Dickinson at se时nteen,
ι 1847. Daguerreotype. The daguerreotype reached
the height of its popularity in America. Millions of
Americans, famous and obscure, had their portraits
made. Although the exposure time was reduced to less
than a minute, it was still long enough to demand a quiet
dignity on the part of the su句;ect.
This portrait, taken by an itinerant daguerreotypist, is
the on如known f.hotograph of the 19血century poet Emily
Dickinson. Just like her poemι it seems direct on the sur·
face but elusive on more intimate le时Is Dickinson later
described herself as “small, like the wren; and my hair is
bold, like the chestnut burr; and my eyes, like the sherry
in the glass that the guest leaves.”
The daguerr eo type was made on a hig hly
polished surface of silver t hat was plated
on a copper s h eet. It was sensi tized by being
placed, silver side down, over a contai ner of iodine
c1ystals inside a box. Rising vapor from the iodine
reacted with the silver, producing the light-sensi-
tive compound silver iodide. During exposure in
the camera, the plate recorded a latent image: a
chemical change had taken place, bur no evidence
of it was visible. To develop the image the plate
was placed, silver side down, in another box con-
taining a dish of heated mercury at the bottom.
Vapor from the mercu1y reacted with the exp。sed
areas of the plate. Wherever light had s truck the
plate, mercury formed a frostl ike amalgam, or
alloy, with the silver. This amalgam made up the
bright areas of the image. Where no light had
s truck, no amalgam was formed; the unchanged
s ilver iodide was dissolved in s。diurn thi。sulfate
fix凹, leaving the bare metal plate, wh ich looked
black, to fo rm the dark areas of the picture.
The daguerreotype was very popu lar in its
time, but it was a tech nological dead end .
There were complaints about the difficulty of
viewing, for the h ighly reflective image could be
seen clearly only from certain angles. T h e mercury
vap。r used in the process was h ighly poisonous
and probably shortened t he life of more than o ne
daguerreotypist. Bue the most serious drawback
was that each plate was unique; there was n。 way
of producing copies 四cept by rephotographing
the original. The beautiful daguerre。巧’pe was
rapidly-and easily-eclipsed by a negative-posi-
tive process that allowed any number of p。sitive
images to be made fro m a single negative.
CHA PTER 10 也 183
Calotype
PICTURES ON PAPER
A n oth e r pho吨raphic process was
announced aJmost at once. On Janua1y 25,
1839, less th an three weeks after t he an nounce-
ment of Daguer陀、 process to t he French
Academy, an English amateur scientist,飞William
Henry Fox Talbot, appeared before the Royal
Institution of Great Britai n to announce that he
too had invented a way to perman en tly fix the
image of the camera 。bscura
T a lbot made h is im ages o n pape r . His first
experimen ts had been wit h negative silhou ett es
made by placing 。bjects on paper sensi tized with
s ilver ch loride an d exposing chem co light. T h en
he experi m ented wi ch images formed by a cam-
era obscura, exposing t h e ligh t -sens it ive coating
long enough for the image co become visible dur-
ing t h e exp。sure.
In June 1 840 T a lbot a nnounced a technique
t hat b ecam e 由e b asis of m o de rn phot o g r a-
phy: th e sensitized paper was exposed only long
eno ugh co produce a latent image, wh ich then was
chemically developed. To make che latent negative
image visible, Talbot used si lver iodide (the light-
sensitive element of the daguerreotype) treaced
wich gallo n itrate of silver. He called his invention
a calotype (after t h e Greek kalos, “beauciful,” and
typoι “1mpressio口”)
T albot realize d 由e value of phot o g raphs on
p a p e r rath e r t han on m etal: r ep ro ducibility.
He placed th e fully developed paper negative in
contact w ith an other sh eet of sensitized paper and
exposed boch co light, a pr。cedure now known as
contact printing. T h e dark areas of che negative
bl。cked che light 企om che oth er sheec of paper,
while the clear areas allowed ligh t through. T h e
result was a positive image on paper resembling
che tones of the original scene.
Because the print was made chrough the paper
of a negative, the calotype lacked the sharp detail
of the daguerreotype. Cal。巧’pes are beautiful-
che fibers in the paper producing a soft, slightly
cextured image that has been compared co a char-
coal drawing. Bu t the process didn’t d isplace che
o ne-of-a-kind daguerreotype until the transparent
negative appeared.
William H阳吃y Fox Talbot. 1』/bat’s Pho臼,graphic le~, an assistant copies an engraving. In the cen毗 Graces. At far r.也ht, the kneeling man holds a 旬’罗t
for the maker of this photograph 臼focus on. Talbot
gave assurance that ”the plates of the present附rlc
are imp -essed钞the ageng, of I,敏ta/one.”
岳阳blishment, 1846. The act,vities at Talbot’s Talbot himself prepares a camera 阳臼kea portra此
establishment near London are shown in this early At riiJ,t, 阶e man at the racks makes con归aprints
ca lo type 臼ken in two par由andpieced toge伪配 At whileano阶er photographs a s阳。P阳mof the Three
184 H I STOR Y OF PHOTOGRAPHY
Collodion Wet-Plαte
SHARP AND REPRODUCIBLE
T he coll odion we叩late proc阳 combined
t h e best featu re of t he d agu e rreo type-
shar p n ess-and t h e b est o f t he calotype-
r e producibility. An d it was m ore light sensi tive
t han eit her of them, wi th exposures as short as
five seconds. It combined so many advantages
t ha t despite its drawbacks vi rt ually all photogra-
p hers used it e。m its introduction in 1851 u ntil
t he com mercial availabi lity of the gelati n d1y plate
alm ost th ree decades later.
For some ti me, workers h ad been looki ng for
a s ubstance th at wou ld bin d light -sensit ive salts
to a glass plate. Glass was better than paper or
metal as a support for si lver ch lor ide because it
was textureless, t ransparent, and chemically inert.
O n e bi nding material was the newly invented
collodion (n itrocellulose dissolved in ether and
alcohol), which is sticky when wet, but soon d ries
into a tough, t ransparen t skin.
T he d isadvan tage of collodion was t hat the
p late h ad t o b e exposed a nd p r ocessed while
it was still wet. A m ixture of collodio n and
potassi u m iodide was p。ured onto th e middle
of t he p late. T h e photographer held the glass by
t he edges and tilted it back and forth and from
side to side until the su rface was evenly covered.
The excess collodion was poured back into i臼
The collodion wet-plate process had many advantages,
but convenience was not among them. The glass pla阳
on which the emulsion was spread had to be coated,
exposed, and de时loped before the emulsion dried, which
required transporting an entire darkroom to wherever the
photograph was to be made.
conram er. Then the plate was sensi tized by being
d ipped in a bath of si lver ni trat巳 It was exp。sed
for a latent image wh ile still damp, developed
in pyrogallic acid o r iron sulfate, fixed, washed,
and dried. All th is had to be don e righ t where the
ph otograph was taken, wh ich m eant that to take
a pictu re th e photographer had to lug a complete
darkroom alo ng (below).
C o llodion could b e used t o form e ithe r a
n egative or a positive im age. Coated on glass,
’E produ ced a n egative fro m wh ich a posi t ive could
be p rinted onto albu men -coated paper. If the
glass was backed wi th a dark material like black
velvet, paper, or paint, the image was transform ed
into a posi t ive, an ambrotype, a kind of imi tation
daguerreotype. Coated on dark ena meled metal it
also formed a posi tive image-t he durable, cheap
ti ntype popu lar in America for port raits to be
placed in albun凹, on campaign buttons, and even
on tom bs.
By d、e 1 860s, t he w o rld h ad mill io n s o f
pho t o g r a p h ic im ages; 25 years earlier the re
h ad been n one. Photograph ers were every-
wh ere-taki ng p。rtrai ts, going to war, exploring
d istan t p laces, and bringing home p ictu res to
prove it .
A Photographer in the Field, c. 1865
C HA PTE R 1 0 也 185
Gelαtin Emulsion/Roll-Film Bαse
PHOTOGRAPHY FOR EVERYONE
LJ ntil t h e 1880 s, few photogr aph s were
m a d e b y t h e gen e ral p u b lic. Almost eve1yone
had been ph。tographed at one time or an oth er,
certainly everyone h ad seen ph otograph s, and
probably m any people had thought of taking
pictures them selves. But the tech nical ski ll, the
m臼sive effort, and the expense and s heer q uan tity
of equ ip ment needed for t he collodion wet-p late
process restricted photograp hy to professionals
and t h e most dedicated amateurs. Even t hey co m-
plain ed of th e inconven ience of the process and
m ade many attempts to improve it.
Br t he 1 880s, 由e p erfection o f two tech –
n iq ues cre a t ed a 也st d ry p late and e lim in at-
ed t h e n eed for 由e 价agile g lass p late i臼elf.
The firs t development was a new gelatin emu lsion
in wh ich the light -sensit ive s ilver salts could be
s uspended. It was based on gelatin-a jellylike
s ubstance processed fro m cattle bones and hides.
It retained its speed when d1y , un like collodion
and cou ld be applied on the o ther invention-film
in rolls. Roll fi lm revolutionized photography by
maki ng it simple enough fo r anyone to enjoy.
Much o f the credit for p o pularizing p hot og-
raphy g oes to George Eastman, who began 部
a bank clerk in Rochester, New York, and built his
East man Kodak Company into one of the coun-
try’s foremost industrial enterprises. Almost from
th e day Eastman bought his fi rst wet-plate camera
in 1877, he searched fo r a simp ler way to ta!也 pic
tu res. “ It seemed,” he said,“that one ough t to be
able to carry less than a pack-horse load. ”
Manype。ple had experimented wi th roll fi lm,
but Eastm an was the firs t to market it com-
mercially, wi th h is invention of the equipment
to m ass-produce fil m. The result was Eastman ’5
Am erican Film, a roll 。f paper coated wit h a
th in gelatin 凹nulsion. T he emulsi。n had to be
st ripped fro m its paper backing to provide a
negative that light could sh ine th rough fo r mak-
ing prints. Most photograp hers h ad t rouble wi th
th is operation, so the fi lm was usually sent to the
company fo r processing.
186 HI STO R Y O F PHOTOGRAPHY
Roll fi lm made p ossible a new ki nd of
C副nera-in四pensive, ligh t , and simple to oper-
ate-that made eve1yone a potential p hotogra-
pher. Eastman introdu ced th e Kodak camera in
1888. It came loaded with en ough fi lm fo r 100
pictures. When th e roll was used up, the owner
returned t he camera wi th the 四posed fil m sti ll
in it to the Eastman company in Rochester. So。n
the developed and printed photographs and t h e
camera, reloaded with fi lm , were sen t back to t h e
owner. The Kodak slogan was,咋ou push t he but-
ton, we do the rest ”
The Ko d ak camera b eca m e a n internationa l
sensation almost o vernig h t. Wit h the inven-
tion of a truly modern roll fil m (a transparent,
fl exible plas时, coated wi th a th in em uls ion and
sturdy enough to be used without a paper sup-
port), a new photographic era had begun. T h e
Eastman Kodak Com pany knew who would be
the m ain users of its products, and it di rected its
advertising accordingly:“A collection of these pic-
tu res may be made to fu rnish a pict。rial h istory 。f
life as it is lived by the owner, t ha t will grow more
valuable eve1y day that passes.”
Fredrick Church. Geo也e
Eastman with a Kodak,
1890. George Eastman,
who put the Kodak box
camera on the market and
thereby put photography
into everybo司r’s hands,
S阳,,ds aboard the 立5
Gall ia in the act of using his
invention. Roll film made
the 臼mera small enough
to carry easi吧y Fast gelatin
en”’/sions permitted ~ s-sec.
exposures so subjects did not
have to strain to hold still.
Alfred T. Palmer. \,\巾men
War M血rker事, circa 1942.
Kodachrome transpar·
ency fjlm was introd11ced
for 16mm movie cameras m
1935, and for the 35mm
still photography market in
1936. It was the first acrn·
ra饵,;nexpens,时, ea9’·阳-
1/S鸟 and reliable method for
er,甜ting color photographs.
Color Photogrαphy
D aguerre him self kn ew t hat only one t hing
was n eeded to make his wonderfu l in vention
complete-co lor. After several false starts, one
。f the first successes was d凹nonstrared in 1861
by the British physicist James Clerk Maxwell.
He had three negatives of a tartan ribbon made,
each through a different color fi lter-red, green,
and blue. Positive black-and呐1ire transparencies
were made of the three negatives and projected
through red, green, and blue filrers like those on
the camera. \Vhen the three images were superim-
posed, they produced an image of the ribb。ninits
original colors. Maxwell had dem。nstrared addi-
tive color mixing, in which colors are produced by
adding together varying am。unrs of light of the
three primary colors, red, green, and blue.
In 1869, a n even m o re signi衍cant 由eory
was m a d e pub lic by two Frenchmen, Louis
Ducos du Hauron and Charles Cros, working
independently of each other. Their process, sub-
tractive color mixing, is the basis of present-day
color photography. Colors are created by com-
bining cyan, magenta, and yellow dyes (the com-
plements of red, green, and blue). The dyes sub-
tract colors from the ” white” light that contains
all colors.
T h e 筒,st commercially suαessful color was
a n additive process. In 1907, two French broth-
ers, Antoine and Louis Lum iere, marketed their
Autochrome process. A glass plate was covered
with tiny grains of potato starch dyed red-orange,
green, and violet, in a layer only one starch grain
thick. Then, a light-sensitive emulsion was added.
Light struck the emulsion after passing through
the colored grains. The emulsion beh ind each
grain was exposed on ly by light from the scene
that was the same color as that grain. The result
after development was a full-color transparency.
Kodachrome, a subtractive process, m ade
color phot og raphy practical. It was perfected
by Leopold Mannes and Leopold Godowsky, two
amateur photographic researchers who eventually
joined forces with Eastman Kod冰 research scien-
tists. Their collaboration led to the introduction in
1935 of Kodachrome, a single sheet of film coated
with three layers of emulsion, each sensitive to
one prima1y color (red, green,。r blue). A single
exposure produced a color image (left).
In the 1940s, Koda!< introduced Ektachrome,
which allowed photographers and small labs
to process slides, and Kodacolor, the first color
negative film.
Today it is di仔icult t o imagi ne photo graphy
without co lor . Amateurs make photographs
by the millions each day, and the ubiquitous
snapshot is always in color. Commercial and
pub lishing markets use color almost exclusively.
Digital cameras always start by capturing a color
image; anyone who wants a black-and-white end
product must discard the color information.
Even photojournalism, documentary, and fine-
art photography, which had been in black and
white for most of their hisro厅, are most often
now m co lor
C HAPTE R 1 0 也 187
Eαrly Portrαits
P eople w a n ted portrai岱. Even when 出po
s ure rimes were long and having o ne’s pm trait
taken meant sitting in bright su nligh t for several
minutes with eyes watering, trying n o t co blink or
move, people flocked to portrai t s tudios to have
their likenesses drawn by “ the sacred radiance of
the Sun.” Images of aim。st every famo us person
who had not died before 1839 have come down
to us in portraits by photographers such as Nadar
and Julia Margaret Cameron (right). Ordin ary
people were photographed as well-i n Plumbe’S
Nari。nal Daguerrian Galle厅, where hand-cine-
ed “ Patent Premiu m Coloured Likenesses” were
made, and in cut-rate shops where double-len s
camer臼 took them " two at a pop.” Small portraits
called carres-de-visice were immensely popular in
the 1860s (。pposi ce). For pioneers moving 飞;t'est
in Am凹ica, the pictures were a link to the fam ily
and friends they had left behind. Two books went
West wit h t he pioneers-a Bible and a photograph
album.
Photogr a phs h a d a n almost m ystical pres-
e nce. After seeing some dagu erreotype portrai臼,
the poet Elizabeth Barrett wrote to a friend in
1843,“Several 。fthese wonderful portraits. . like
engravings-only 四quisi te and delicate beyond
the work of graver-have I seen lately-longing to
have such a memorial of eve1y Being dear to me
in the world It is n ot merely the likeness wh ich
1s precious in such cases-but th e association
and the sense of n earness involved in t he t hing
t h e fact of the ve1y shadow of the person lying
there fixed for ever! . I would rather have such
a m emorial of o ne I dearly loved, than t he noblest
artist's work ever produced. I do not say so in
respect (。r d isrespect) to Art, but for Love’s s冰e
飞;trill you u nderstand?-even if y。u wi ll not agree?”
188 H I STOR Y OF PHOTOGRAPHY
Julia /1,旬’-garet Cameron. Alfred, Lord Tennyson, 1865.
Cameron photographed her friends and peers, the well-
known and the well-born, in Victorian England. Tennyson
fol/o附d William Words附rth as the Poet Laureate of Great
Britain and Ireland from 1850 until his death in 1892
F呐。阳,grapher Unknown. Woman in Costume.
Pho阳,grapher Unknown. Andre Adolphe Disderi. Ca时·es
de-visite were taken with a camera 伪at exposed only
one section of the photographic p归te at a time. Thus
the customer could strike several different poses for the price
of one. At leβι shown a print before it is cut 巾归 separate
pictures. People collected cartes-de-visite 时 albums, inse时ing
pictures of themselves, friends, relatives, and famous people
like Queen Victoria .
One album cover advised: "Yes, thι is my Album, but learn
ere you look;/ that all are expected 阳 add to my book. / You
are welcome 阳 quiz it, the penalty is, / that you add your own
Portrait for other军阳 quiz."
Andre Adolphe Disderi, who popularized these multiple
portraits, is shown above on a 臼rte-de-visite. Carte portraits
became a fad when Napoleon Ill stopped on the way 归 war 阳
pose for cartes-de-νisite at Disderi's studio.
C H A PTE R 1 0 也 189
Eαrly Trαvel Photogrαphy
E art~ travel photographs m et a d e m a nd
for pictures of far awa y p la ces. In th e mid-
19由 century, the world seemed full of u nexplored
wonders. S teamships and railroads were making
it possible for more people to travel, but distant
lands s till seemed exotic an d mysterious and peo -
p ie were h u ngry for photographs of them. There
had always been drawi ngs po rtraying unfami lia r
p laces, but they were an artist' s personal vision.
The camera seemed an extension of one’sown
visio n; travel photographs were accepted as real
an d fai thfu l images.
The N ear East w as of s p eciaJ interest. Not
on ly was i t 础。tic, b u t its biblical associa tions and
ancien t cul tures m ade it even mo re fasc inating.
飞.Vithin a few mo n ths of the 1839 annou ncem ent
of D aguerre’s process, a p hotograph ic team was in
Egypt . “ We keep d agu erreotypi ng away like lions,"
they reported, “ and from Cairo h ope to sen d home
an interesting ba tch.” Because there was n o way to
reproduce the d ag ue!'reotypes d irectly, they were
traced a nd reproduced as copperplate e n gravings.
W ith the inventio n of t h e calotype a nd later th e
collodion processes, a ctual p ictures from t h e Near
East were soon availa ble.
1 90 H I S TORY OF PHOTOGRAPHY
πmothyH. 。’'Sullivan. 8归ck Canyon,
Colorado River, 1871 . Expeditions 阳pho
tograph distant pla&es were /aun&hed as
soon as the invention of photography was
announ&ed. In addition to all the materials,
chemicals, and knowledge needed to coat,
expose, and pro白血伪eir photographs in
remotepla出毛自:peditiona,y photographers
also had to have considerable fortitude.
TimothyH. O’'Sul/ivan, whose dark,。。’”
。n a boat appears at left, described an ar,臼
臼/led the Humboldt Sink: ’'It was a pretty
lo臼tion 归 work in, and viewing there was
as pleasant work as could be desired; the
on如drawback was an unlimited m
-
the most 叩racious and particula瓦Jy poison
ous mosqui阳臼 that we met ‘ν'ith during our
e,’tire trip. Add 阳 this. . frequent at阳cksof
that most ener、'Oting of all fevers, known as
the ’mountain ail,’and you will see why 、ve
did not work up more of that country. ”
The most s p ectac ular scene ry of由e w estern
U nited S tates was not much phot o g r a phe d
until the la te 1 860s. Explo rers a n d a rtists h ad
been in the Rocky Mou ntain a rea lon g before t h is
ti me, b u t the ta les th ey cold of the region and
the sketc h es they m ade were o丘en thought to be
exaggerations. After the Civi l 飞.Var, wh en severa l
government 口pedi tions set o u t to explore and
m ap t h e West, p hotograp h ers a ccompan ied t h em,
not a lways to t h e delig ht of the o ther m embers
of the expedi tions. “The ca m era in its s t ron g b。x
was a h eavy lo a d to car1y u p th e rocks,'’ says a
descripti。n 。fa Grand Canyon trip in 187 1, “ but
it was noth ing to t h e chem ical and plate-ho lder
box, which in t u rn was feathe rweig h t C。mpared
to the im itation hand 。rgan which served for a
darkroom. Th is dark box was th e special sorrow
of t h e expedition .. "
C iv il War ph。rographers T imoth y H.
0 ’Su llivan (a bove and opposite) and Alexander
G ardner bo th went 飞:Vest wit h governmen t -
sponsored 四pedi tions. W illiam Henry Jackson’s
p h otograph s of Yellowstone helped con vince
Con gress to set the a rea aside as a natio nal park,
as d id the photographs of Yosemite made by
Carleton Eugene 飞X/atkins.
Eαrly Imαges ofWαr
Timothy H. 。’'Sullivan. A Harvest of Death,
Get.切切,-g, )吵 1863. The first realistic
view of war was shown by Civil War pho-
阳•graphers such as Brady, Gardne巧 and
o’'Sullivan {rt沪纱. Oliver Wendell Holmes
had been on the battlefield at Antietam
searching for his wounded son and later saw
阶e photographs Bra吵made there: “Let him
w加剧拍出阳know what war is look at this
series of illustrations. It was so nearly l放e
时siting the battlefield to look over these views,
that all the emotions 臼cited 钞 the actual
s拗t of the stained and sordid scene, strewed
with rags and wrec缸, came back归叫 and we
buried them in the recesses of our cabinet as
附would ha昭 buried the mutilated remains
of the dead they 归o vivi<功’-epresented. "
P hotographs gave war scen es a u t hority,
and made t h em m o re immediate for those at
h o m e. Un t il photography’5 invention, wars
seemed remote and rather exciting. People
learned of war from delayed n ews accounts or
even later from the tales of returning s。ldiers or
e。m paintings or poems.
The disastrous Brit is h campaigns in the
Crimean War of the 1850s were t h e fi rst con-
fl icts to be extensively photographed. T he ill-
fated Charge of the Ligh t Brigade against Russian
forces in 1854 was only o ne of the catastrophes;
。fficial bungling, disease, starvation, and 四po
sure took more British lives than did t h e enemy.
However, Roger Fenton , t h e 。fficial photogra-
pher (who had been introduced to photography
o n ly three years earlier), generally depicted the
war with scen ic an d idealized images.
Photographs from 由e American Civil War
were the 而rst to show the reality of war
(above). Mathew B. Brady, a successful portrait
photographer, conceived the idea of sending teams
to photograph the war . No pho tographs were
made during a battle; it was E。。 hazardous. T h e
collodion process requ ired up to several secon ds’
exposure and the glass plates had to be processed
on the spot, wh ich made the photographer’s dark-
room-wagon a target for enemy gunners.
Alth。ugh Brady hoped to sell his photographs,
th ey often showed what people wanted only to
fo rget. Brady took only a few, if any, ph。tographs
h imself, and some of his men (川口ander Gardner
and T imothy H. 0 ’Sullivan among t hem) broke
with him and set up thei r o叭响 。peration. But
Brady’s idea and personal investment launched th is
invaluable documentation 。f Am erican h istory.
CHAPTER ,。 然 191
Time αnd Motion in Eαrly Photographs
T he earliest photographs 陀quired v町
long exposures. Today, photographers using
modern cameras consider a o ne-second exposure
relatively long. Bue photographers using earlier
processes had to work with much slower maceri-
als, and an exposure 。f several seconds was con-
sidered quite shore.
People or objects that m oved during the expo-
s ure were blurred or, if the exp。sure was long
en o ug h , d isappeared completely. Busy streets
sometimes looked deserted (page 182) because
m。St pe。ple had not stayed s till long enoug h to
register an image.
Stereographic photographs were the first to
show action as it was taking place, with peo-
ple in midstride or horses and carts in m。tion.
This was possible because the sh。此-focal-length
lens of the stereo camera produced a bright,
sharp image at wide apertures an d thus could be
used with very brief exposure times.
These “mstantaneous” phot。graphs revealed
aspects of motion that t h e unaided eye was not
able to see. s。me of the arrested motions were so
d仔erent from the conventional artistic represen-
tations that the photographs looked wrong. A gal-
loping h。rse, fo r example, had often been dra飞m
w ith all fo ur feet off th e ground-the front legs
extended forward and h ind legs extended back.
Eadweard Muybrid ge was a pion eer in
motion studies. When h is ph。tographs of a
gallopi ng horse, published in 1878, showed that
all fo ur of its feet were off the ground on ly when
they were bu nched u nder the ho rse’s belly, some
people thought that 如fuybridge had altered the
ph otographs. Using the n ew, fast gelati n-si lver
em ulsio n and a specially E。nstructed multi-lens
cameras, Muybridge compiled many stud ies of
different animals and h umans in action (righ t,
bottom) that were distributed w陆ly.
192 HISTORY OF PHOTOGRAPHY
Platt D. Babbitt. Joseph A昭·,y Stranded on
Rocks in the Niagara Rive.巧 1853. Tl』is is
刷刷,fy eX4mple of a news photograph,
unusual because newsworthy even臼rarely held
Eadw,田rd Muybridge. Motion Stu很ι 1885
Capturing motion became technically pos-
sib/e as the sensitivity of photographic
emulsions increased. M吧ybridge’s project
Animal L。com。口。n analyzed 阶emo时ments
still for the long缸”•sur,臼a daguerreot;伊
required. Th且 unlucky man was stranded cling-
i喀阳a log afier a boating accident; his situa-
tion held him motionless enough 臼 be recorded.
。{humans and many animals. M吧ybridge
often used seν·era/ cameras 与ynchronized 阳
work toge阶er so that each stage of a move-
ment could be recorded simultaneously from
different angles.
Karl 8/ossfeldt. Nigel/a
Damascena Spinnenkopf,
ι 1932. 8/ossfeldt’s rigor-
ous plant studies inf/u-
enced generations of artists
Each 平ecimen in the long
坦ries was presented alone
against a neutral background
且 the plant forms could be
considered without any hint
of the decisions or interpre阳-
tions of an artist. Published
as a book in 1929, hι imag
es were studied by pa巾臼甩,
ar而tects, d,田驴ers, and
others who inco’pora阳d
nature's ideas into their own
The Photogrαph αs Document
Eugine A贯get. Quai d说’,jou, 6am, Pa时, 1924. Eugine
Atget artfully revealed the essence of Paris while seeming
merely to document its 缸阳rnal appearance. A silent street
along伪e Seine in the 臼吵mornin阜时阶 i臼graceful trees,
moored ba馆出, and如βlight 写peaks of the pervasi时charm and
architectural harmony of the city.
P ho tog r a phs C甜 be d ocume nts o n many
leve ls. Most snapsh ots record a particular scene
to help the part icipants rem em ber it later. A news
ph otograp h implies that this is what you would
have seen if you had been t h ere y。urself, alt h o ug h
digital ph otography continues to ch ip away at
th is belief (see page 112). O n ano ther level, a
p hotograph can reco rd reality whi le at t he sam e
t ime recording t he p hotograp her's commen t
o n that reality. Lewi s 飞V H ine said of h is work :
“ I wanted to show the t h ings t ha t h ad to be cor-
rected. I wanted to s how t h e th ings that had to
be appreciated.” Hi s statem en t describes the use
of photograp hy as a fo rce fo r social change an d a
s tyle that came to be known as document a1y (see
pages 194- 195).
Eugene Atget’ s w o rk wen t b eyond simple
r ecords, alth。ugh h e cons idered h is p h oto-
g raphs to be d ocuments. A sig n o n his d oor
read “ Docum en ts p our Artistes.” Atget m ade
thousands of photograp hs in the early 1900s, of
the streets, cafes (le丘, top), shops, m o numents,
parks, and people of the Paris he loved . H is pic-
tures won h im lit tle notice during h is lifetime;
he barely m an aged to eke o ut a livi ng by sell ing
prints to art is ts, arch itects, and o thers who want -
ed visual records of the city. Many ph otographers
can record the external ap pearance of a p lace,
but Atget conveyed the atm osp here and m ood of
Paris as well.
Ka rl B lo ssfe ld t's phot o g r a phs of p lan ts
r ej e ct ed commentary, as well as sentiment,
to be as straigh t fo1ward and fac tual as possible
(left). He has been associa ted with the New
O bjectivity m ovement (Neue Sachlichkeit}, that
applied si milar goals to a range of m edia. August
Sand er attempted to record an entire peop le-
the cit izens of pre-World War II Germ any-i n
utterly factual portraits m eant to show society’s
classes an d not individual char acter. Later, Bernd
and Hilla Becher applied si m ilar fo rmal and
proced ural rigo r to p hotograph ing industrial
s tructures, and were teachers to a gen eratio n of
notable a rtists whose artistic lineage can be
traced di rectly back to Blossfeldt.
CHAPTER ,。 然 193
Photogrαphy αnd Sociαl Chαnge
Photogr叩hy s oon went 衔。”’ document
ing t h e w orld t o docu m enting it fo r a cau se.
Jacob Riis, a Danish-born newspaper reporter of
the late 19由 centmy, was o n e of the first to use
ph otography for social change. Riis had been
writing about the g rinding brutality 。flife in New
York Ci旷s tenem en ts and slums and began to
take picmres (righ t, cop) to show, as h e sa风what
“ no mere description could, the m isery and vice
that he had n o ticed in h is ten years of experience
. and suggest the direction in which good m ight
be done.” To take photographs inside t he t en e-
mencs at night, Riis used magnesium powd凹
ign ited in an open pan co provide ligh ting in the
dark rooms. The techn ique was the fo rerunn er
of the modern flash
Lewis W. Hi ne was a trained sociologist with
a passionate social awareness, especially 。f the
abuses 。f chi ld labor 。ight, bottom). T his evi l
was w idespread in t h e early 20th century, and Hine
documented it co provide evidence fo r reformers.
With sarcastic fury he wrote of 削opportunities’
fo r the child and the family co ... relieve th e over-
burdened manufacturer, help h im pay h is rent,
s upply his equipment, ta!也 care of h is rush and
s lack seasons, and h elp him to keep down his
wage scale. ”
Lewis Hi.,皿 Sadie Pfeifer, 48 Inches H也h, Has Worked Half
a Year, Lanu,ster Cotton Mills, Lancaster, South Carolina,
1908. Lewis Hine documented the abuses of child labor
between 1908 and 1921, making 5,000 pictures for the
National Child Labor Committee. One foreman casually
dismissed accidents, such as children getting caught in the
machinery. “Once 巾 a while a 卢nger ι mashed or a foot, but
it doesn' t amount to anything ”
194 H I ST O RY OF P H O T O G R APH Y
Jacob Riis. Home of Italian Rag Picker, Jersey Street, 1894.
Riis used his camera 阳 expose the slum conditions of
New York City. His phot,怨raphs led 阳 housing ’·egulations
that outlawed overcrowded quarters and windowless rooms
Dorothea Lange. M也rant Mother, Californ巾, 1936.
Lange' s work rev臼Is herempa阶!Y for her拥向;e.出-
She had a unique ability to photograph p四,pfe at the
moment that their e叫pressions and ges,阳r田rev田led their
Ii闹剧d feelings. Her photograph of a mother of seven
w由o tried 臼support her children 句’pick句p臼•s, was one
of those that came to symbolize the 1930s Depre.且ion.
The photog r a phers of t h e Farm Security
Adminis t r a tion recorded t h e D e pressio n o f
t he 193 0s, wh en the nation’s en ti re economic
s tructure was in deep t rouble and far m famil i e s
were in p缸ticular n eed, Assistan t S巳crerary of
Agriculmre Rexford G. Tug飞飞
g。vernment's program 。f aid to fa rmers was
expensive and controversial. To p rove both the
extent of the problem and the effectiveness of the
cure, he appointed Roy Sttyker to supervise p ho-
tograph ic coverage of the program .
Stryker recruited a remarkable band of ta!-
enc, including D orothea Lange (le丘, top), Walker
Evans (page 173), Russell Lee (page 16 1, top),
Marion Post Wolcott, Arthu r Ro thstein (left, bot-
tom), Gordon Par ks, and Ben Shahn. The p horog-
rap hers of t he Farm Security Administrati。n pro-
duced a m onumen tal collection 。f im ages sh ow-
ing the plight of “ on e th ird of a nation ” during
the Dep ressio n.
Arthur Rothstein. Dust Storm, Cimarron
County, Oklahoma, 1936. Rothstein was
伪e firrt photographer Roy Stryker hired
阳document 伪e plight of people during
伪e Depression. Du斤’怒that period, drought
turned parts of Oklahoma into a dust bowl.
Here, the building and fence posts are almost
buried 巾 drifts of sand. Rothstein later wro阳
that while taking阶e picture,何I could hardly
breathe because dust was everywhere."
CHA PTER 10 也 195
Photojournαlism
W hatever the news …t-fro m a prize-
fight to a war-we expect to see p ictures of
it. Today we ta!也 ph。tojournalism fo r granted,
bur news and pictures were not always partners.
Drawings and cartoons appeared only occasion-
ally in the drab 18出-century press. T he 19由 cen
tury saw the growth of illustrated newspapers
s uch as the Illustrated London News and, in Am erica,
Harper's \串'eekly, and Fra价 Leslie's Illustrated
Newspaper. Because the various tones of gray
needed to reproduce a ph。tograph could nor be
printed simultaneously with ordinary type, pho-
tographs had to be converted into drawings and
then into woodcuts before they could appear as
news pictures. T he photograph merely furnished
material fo川he artist.
The h a lfto ne process, perfected in t h e
1 88 0 s, perm itted p h oto g r aphs a nd typ e to
be pri nted togeth e r, and ph。tographs became
an expected addi tion to news stories. “These are
no fancy sketches," t he Illustrated American prom-
ised, “they are the actual life of the place repro-
duced up。n paper.”
T he p h oto essay, a seq ue n ce o f p h o t ographs
p lus b rief textu a l mate rial, came o f age in
t he 1930s. It was pi。neered by Stefan Lorant in
European picture magazines and later in America
by a score of publications such as Li庐 and I』ok.
Today, the heyday of the picture magazi ne has
passed, du e in pal't to competition from televi-
s ion . But photographs remain a m叮or s。urce
of our information abou t the world and photo
essays have returned o n the Internet.
The halftone process converts the continuous shades of
gray in a pho阳•uaph (ri劲。巾归distinct units of black and
white that can be printed with 巾k on paper ( far right).
196 H I ST ORY OF P H O T O G R A PH Y
Erich Salomon. Visit of Prime Min ister
MacDonald to Berlin, 1931. Not until the
1920s did photographers get a small
camera able 阳 take pictures easily in dim
I也·ht. Ea吵cameras were relati时如bu/凯
and the slowness of available films meant that
using a camera indoors required a blinding
burst of flash powder. The 卢刚 ofthe small
臼meras, the Ermanox,阳be followed soon
by the Leica, had a lens so fast-f/2-that
unobtrusive, candid shooting finally became
practical. Cameras began to infiltrate places
where they hadn’t been before, and the public
began to see real people 巾 thene附
Erich Salomon was one of the pioneers of
阶is practice, with a 非自由l talent for dress -
ing in (ormal clothes and crashing diplomatic
ga伪erings-sometimes shooting through a
hole in his bowler or di:结uising his 臼mera
within a bouquet. He o卢·en recorded those in
power while they were preoc,阳,pied with other
matter>, such as at this 1931 meetin~ of
German and British statesmen In tribute to
Salomon, the French fore.驴 ministeι Aristide
Briand, is said to have remarke叫i “There are
just three things necessary for a League of
Nations conference: a际νfore驴secre臼ries,
a table, and a Salomon ”
,
…·叫町....,由’1-• 4 I ,”……,r .. • ‘ “‘
时,制叫.··旧’ 户·
.,句M、巾,……….. .,户
‘叫“m刷
“……. …卢’‘’
“、矿,一阳,且
【…··.愧’‘·”’… ”
·-,的呵,,、川“”
. .命”a.,例»u
’协 』,..,, ..』d…
呻』·…H崎…,~
阳恤吨’』,&…..
』,.幽…·.也』,同.
,帽、4. ,·
T11•,·•1’‘’ ‘,,..‘··‘
平,.’叩-··…·’… a.. ….”…,.伽……………… ~ .. ,-伽...!‘!岛,叫咱冽--“愧
讥I, Eugene Smith. 舟。,,, Span ish Village, 1951. The pho阳
essay-pictur,臼p阳 supporting text-was the mainstay
of mass-circulation picture magazin臼 such as life and
t。。K Above are t,咽pag,由from ”’Spanish “llage,”photo-
graphed for U鱼岛y WEug,臼e Smith, w由自e picture essays are
un.阳’如ssed in 伪eirpo附randpho臼,graphic beauty.
CHAPTER 10 也 1 97
Photojournαlism (continued)
Photojournalists were 由e 侃rst t o e mbra ce
digital phot o g r a phy. T h e news is now.
Ph otographers o n l。cati。n n eed co get pictures
from the middle of the action to t he editors’ desks
as rapidly as possible. Fi lm requires t ransportatio n
to a lab, devel。pment, drying, an d proofing before
anyone can tell wh ether t he pictures can be used.
T h e length of a roll lim its the n umber of photo-
graphs th at can be 四posed qu ickly. And it is easy
for info rmation about a picm re’s conten t to get
separated from the p icture itself.
The Associated Press (AP) began t r a n s-
mi忧ing conve nt ional photographs digitally
b efor e 1 980 . T h eir system was used to d istrib-
ute pictu res to editors at d iffere nt newspapers.
In the m id-90s practical digital cameras began to
appear in the han ds of a very few photographers.
T he can1eras were specially m odified 35m m SLRs,
the same m。dels m any ph。tojournalists were
already using, and were very expensive. By 200 1
nearly half of all jou rnalists used d igital cameras;
today virtually all d。.
Ashley Gilbertson. Baghdad, Iraq, 2004,
Ci/be巾。” has photographed &onflict in
Whiskey Ta鸣。 Foxtrot, records not o吵the
drama of scenes like 阶is, but also the people
Iraq sin&e 2002, on a臼盼ment for a var时吵
。fpub/i,臼tions and as a personal project. He时,
an Iraqi’s at阳mpt阳田tinguish the 卢mbu m ing
in a van ends spectacular如 Gilbertson ‘s book,
that are 臼ught up in the conflict. George
Packer, writing in The New Yorker, said that
warpho阳,graphy 臼n 毡阴阳ck 阶eir subjects
the humanity 伪at the war is taking away.”
198 HISTOR Y OF PHOTOGRAPHY
Alfred Eisens臼edt. Ethiopian Soldier, 1935.
War and social i呼ustice are among伪e
stap1’苗。fnews photography. 7百e饨st
ofthesepho问graphs go beyond the simple
recording of an e时nt. 7百ey become symbols
of the time in which they occurred.
In 1935, when the overw\elmingforce of
a modern, mechanized Italian army invaded
an ill-prepared Ethiop巾, Eisenstaedt focused
on the feet of a barefoot E阶iopian soldier.
Susan Meise/as. Awaiting Counterattack
by the Guard, Ma阳,ga伊a, Nicaragua,
1978. During the Sandinista revolt in
Nia1rag1将a, Susan Meise/as pho曲,graphed
these men at a barricade awaiting attack
句ygovernment troops. She had to decide
whether 臼 stay and continue photographing
or 曲 lea时阳make the deadline for publica-
tion. “A a do阳menta,y phot,络rapheιl
附uld have liked归stay, but I had to leave
臼get the pictur,出out. It was the first time
that Ir,臼lized what it means to be a pho曲-
journalist and d,臼/ with a d臼d/i,盹”
C H A PTE R 1 0 也 1 99
Photogrαphy αs Art in the 19th Century
W部 it j u st a photograph o r w剖 it art?
Almost from the moment of its birth, photog-
raphy began st冰ing 。ut claims in areas that
had long been reserved fo r painting. Portrai臼,
still lifes, landscapes, n udes, and even allegories
became photographic subject matter.
At the rime, the most famous and commer-
c1ally the most successful of th。se intending t。
elevate photography to an art was Henry Peach
Robins。n Robins。n turned o ut many illus tra-
t ive and allegorical composite photographs.
T h ese were carefully plotted in advance and com-
bined several negatives to form the final print
(rig h t , top). Robinson became the leader of a
so-called High Art m ovement in 1 9由-century
photography, which advocated beauty and artistic
effect no matter ho即 it was obtained. Robi nson
advised:“Any dodge, trick and conjuration of any
kind is open to the photographer’S use.”
By t h e 1 880s, a new m o vem ent ch a m pio ned
natl』 ralism a s a rtistic phot o g r a phy. Its leader,
Peter Henry Emerson, felt t hat true ph otograph ic
art was possible o nly through exploiti ng the
camera’s ability to capture reality in a direct way
(right, bottom). He scorned th e pictorial school
and its composite printing, cosrumed models,
painted backdrops, and sentimental views of
daily life.
Emerson laid do叭响 h is own rules for what
he called naturalistic photography: simplicity of
equipment; no “ fak ing” by means oflighti ng, pos-
ing, costumes, o r props; free composition wi thout
reliance on classical rules; and no retouching. He
also promoted what he believed was a scientific
foc using technique that imita ted the way the eye
perceives a scene: sharply focused on the main
SU悖ct, wi th t h e foregro und and especially the
background slightly 。ur of focus.
His ideas influenced a new gen eratio n of pho-
tograph ers wh o no longer felt the need to imitate
painti ng bur began to explore photography 臼m
art in its 。叭响 right.
200 H I S T O RY O F P H O T O G R APH Y
Henry Peach Robinson. Fading A叫y, 1858. Henry
Peach Robinson’s H也h Art pho阳,graphy was inspired by
romantic literature. He de时loped a composite photographic
technique that allowed him 阳pro御自 imagina,y s,四nes.
Fading Away (abo昭j wass臼1ged by posing models separately
and piecing together the imag,由e
Peter Henry Emerson. Gathering Water Lilies, 1885.
Peter Henry Emerson rejected 伪e methods 。fthe M沪
A时photographers. He insisted 阶at photography should
not imitate art but should strive for a naturalistic effect
that was not artificially contri,昭d He illustrated his theories
M阶 his own photographs of peasants on the East Anglian
’”arsh目的 England.
Pictoriαl Photogrαphy
αnd the Photo-Secession
Robert Demachy. Panel,
1898. Pictoriolist photog·
rophyot the 阳m of the
酬阳吃y often -esembled
impressionist painting,, wi,阶
light and atmosphere more
impor臼nt than sharp details.
Alfred Stiegli缸. 7百e Steerage, 1907. Alfred Stieglitz chom-
pioned photography as art, including pictorial臼t photogra-
phy. Howeve巧 his own photographs U白cept for a brief ea吵
period, see page 172) did not include soft 阳,乓 hon即时, or
other alterations of阶e direct 臼mera image
毛
病
-
M
比
世
〉
d
d
E
<
EEiee
L卜
日
o
a
z
σ
b
u
w
们
U
M
L
H
n
n
u
J
U
句a
,
也
e
s
·
a
·
‘
s
u
k
t
a
队
盯
E
m
盯
W
’
唱
门
h
M
I
组
副
U
H
口
h
品
』
u
t
u
n
e
-「
I
P
A
-
u
z
w
归E
剧
r
k
H
H
E
i
3
1
0
甲
咀
W
K
I
I
E
E
、
,
m
e
m
叫
罗
址
r
u
U
A
阴
叶
M
m
m
四
川
剧
旷
-
m
h
mpun
划
中
刮
A
h
u
um
m
副
s
g
叮
P
M
-
m
s
l
um
ouxit
n
tteuEE
u
t
。
h
飞
呻
叫
A
S
-h
L
H
E
A
U
!
凹
N
F
山
p
e
o
k
h
n
啊
,
吼
:
“
P
MW
C
刘
、
门
口
阻
n
.
-
h
M叮
d
A
M
W
M
忡
’
出
m
rm
y
叫
拍
即
叫
叶
、
,
忙
E
E
E
础
m
m
m
V
A
V
A旧
曲
俨
r
p
r
h
m
m
灶
’
旧
凹
p
c
u
m
m
u
臼
力
i
H
e
町
’
阳
O
H
H
I
K
N
U
h
町
J
E
h
n
w
H
-
sEVESSE
Many pictorialists believed that artistic merit
increased if t h e photograph lo oked like
someo由er kind o f art-charcoal drawi ng, mez-
zotint, or anyth ing other than ph otography. T hey
patterned th eir wor k q uite frank ly on painti ng,
especially the work of the Fren ch lmpressionis囚,
fo r whom mood and a sense of atmosphere an d
light were importan t. The pictorialists favored
m ist-covered landscapes and soft ci tyscapes; light
was diffused, line was softened, an d detai ls were
s uppressed (left, top).
In America, Alfred Stieglitz was t h e leader
and catalyst for photography as a n art form
and h is infl uence is ha rd E。 overestimate. He
ph otograp hed (le丘, b。ttom), organized sh。叽,s
and p u blished infl uential and avant-garde wor k
by phot。graphers and other a rtists. In h is galler-
ies-the Li ttle Gal leries 。f d飞e Pt飞。E。-Secess ion
(later known simply by its address, 291), t he
Inti mate Gallery, and An American Place-he
s howed not 。nly what he considered t he best
ph。tographic w。rks bu t also, fo r t h e fi rst ti m e in
the U nited States, t he works of Cezanne, Matisse,
Picasso, an d other m odern artists. In his m aga-
z ine C町,i.era \冈州, he pu blish ed p hotograph ic
crit icism an d wor ks whose on ly requirement was
that they be worthy 。f the word art. N。t on ly
d id he eventually fo rce m useu m cu rators an d
art crit ics to gran t p hotography a place beside
the o ther arts, bu t by exam ple an d s heer fo rce of
personality h e n川ce set the s tyle for Am erican
ph。tography: fi rst toward t h e early p ictorial
impression istic ideal an d later toward s ha rply
realis tic,“s t raigh t” ph otography.
CHAPTER ,。 然 20 1
The Direct Imαge in Art
S ome phot咆raphers interested to m ake
a rt in t h e early 20由 century created unma-
nipulated images even wh ile pictorialis臼 were
making photographs that l。。ked very m uch like
paintings. A movement was formi ng to return to
the direct photographs that characterized so much
of l9由,century imagerγ. In 19 17, Stieglitz devoted
the last issue of Camera Work to Paul Strand, whose
photographs he saw as a pow凹fi.tl new approach E。
photography as an arr form. Strand believed th挝
、bjecrivity is of the veiy essence of photography ...
T he fi.tllest realizatio n of this is accomplished with-
o ut tricks of process o r manipulation.”
S tieglitz’S 0胃口 ph otographs were direct an d
u n man ipulated. He felt t hat many of them were
V阳al metapho rs, accurate im ages of o均eccs in
fro nt of h is camera an d at the san1e t ime external
“equivalents” 。f h is inn er feelings. After 1950,
如fin。r 飞亨h ite carried o n an d expanded S tieglitz’S
concept of t he equivalent For Wh ite, the goal
of the serious ph otographer was “ to get from
the tangible to the intangible” so t hat a straight
ph otograph also functi。ns as a m etaphor for the
photographer’s 。E t h e viewer’s s tate of mi nd.
Str在ight photography d o minated photogr叩hy
as a n a rt form 命。”’ the 1930s to 由e 1 9 70s
and is 四emplified by Edward Weston. He used
the simplest techn ique and a bare m in imu m of
equip ment: generally, an 8 x 10 view camera with
lens stopped d。叭响 to the smallest apertu re for
sharpness overall. He contact-printed negatives
that were seldom cropped. “ My way of working-I
start wi th no preconceived idea-discovery excites
me to focus-then rediscovery th roug h the lens-
fi n al fo r m of presentatio n seen o n ground glass,
the fin ished print previs ioned complete in every
detai l of textu re, movement, proportion, before
exposure-th e sh utter’s release automatically an d
fi n ally fixes my conceptio n, allowing no after
man ipu lation-the ulti mate end , the print, is but
a d uplication of all that I saw an d felt t h rough
my camera.” Many other photographers, such
as Ansel Adams, Paul Capon igro (right), Imogen
Cu n ningham, and Ch arles Sheeler (page 164)
have used t h e s t raig h t approach.
2 0 2 HI S TOR Y O F PHOTOGRAPHY
Paul Strand. The White F面脯, Port Ken; New V切成, 1916. Strand's stra敏e app.刷ch 阳p协
tography as an art form combined an objective view wi,伪 personal meaning. “Look at the thing;
a刷ndyo盹 the immediate附,rJd around you. If you are alive it will mean 酬,ething to you. »
Paul Caponigro. Galaxy Apple, New York City, 1964. The a仰le is a symbol of the biblical story
of creation:,的伪ispho阳,graph it m回nat,臼叫h 伽时sual metaphor of a universe reflected in its skin.
何Pho臼,grap.均y'sp。但n阳I, "α,ponigro said, “ .is rea吵nod,,庐,切t from the same po阳阳I in the
best poetry where familiar, 刷,yday words, placed时hin a special酬t叫can 皿arabo昭伪e intellect
and阳uch subtle real钞的a unique w命”
Usz/6 Moholy-Nagy.
j臼lousy, 1927. Photog·
raphers such as Laszlo
Moholy-Nagy and Gyo也Y
Kep臼 used many techn句ues
归劝eir explorations of real,
unreal, and abstract image·
,y. The photomontage (right)
com岳阳臼pi自由ofse时rat
phott.苍raphs. Mohofy defined
pho阳montage as "a tumultu-
ous collision of whimsical detail
from which hidden meani,咿
flash, ” a de卢刚仿on that fits
this ambiguous picture.
Cyo,罗Kepes mined sci-
entific advances for image饥
collaborating with physicist
A. R von H伊•pel to generate
the image above. Lichtenberg
{igu -es result from h也•h-
νoltage s阳tic electrici,纱, a
principle that led direc.吵阳
modern xerography.
The Quest for α Ne飞v Vision
T he b eginning of t h e 20由 centu叩 saw
g reat ch a nges in many areas, including science,
tech nolog)’, m athem atics, p olitics, and also the
ans. Movem ents like Fa uvis m, Expressi。nism,
Cubism , D ada, and S urrealism were perm anently
changing the m eaning of the word “ an.” T h e
Futuris t art m ovem ent proposed “ to sweep fro m
the fi eld of arr all m。tifs and su均ects that h ave
already been exploited .. to destroy t h e cult of the
past .. to despise u tt erly eve1y form 。f im itation ...
to extol eve1y form of originality.”
At the ce nter of rad icaJ art, d esign , a nd
thinking was t h e Bauh aus, a school in Berlin to
wh ich th e Hungarian artist Laszlo Mo h oly-Nagy
cam e in 1922. H e att em pted to find n ew ways of
seeing th e world and experimented with radical
uses of p hotograph ic m aterials in an attem pt
to replace 19由,centmy p ictorialist conventio ns
w ith a “ n ew visi。11” compatible wi th m odern
life. Mo h oly explo red many ways of expanding
ph otograp h ic vision, through phorograms, ph。.
tom ontage (le丘, bottom), t he Sabattier effect
( often called solarizat阳市, unusual angles, optical
distort io ns, and multiple exposures. He fel t that
“ properly used, they help to create a mo re com-
Cyo,xyKe阳. Lichtenberg figure.乓 1951.. plex and imaginary language of ph。tography.”
人
The Bau haus school closed in 1933, under
pressure fro m the German governmen t, wh ich at
the same time made it d ifficult fo r fo reign citizens
like Moholy to work. He m oved to London, an d
then to Ch icago, where in 1937 h e fo unded the
New Bauhaus sch。ol. Moholy brought Gy凸rgy
Kepes fro m Europe to head the sch。ol's “Light
Workshop” area, wh ich included both g raph ics
and ph otography. Kepes, a prolific artis t and writ-
凹, later fo unded the Center fo r Advanced Visual
Studies at MIT, a program that sponsors th e arts
at the intersection of techn ology. Over several
decades, the CAVS invi ted dozen s of in novative
artists to collab。rate wit h scien tists worki ng at
the cutting edge of their own fie lds, just as Kepes
was d oi ng in his own work (le丘, top).
C HAPTE R 1 0 也 203
Photogrαphγαs Art
in the 1950s αnd 1960s
A t r e m endous g rowth t o ok pla ce in t h e
aαeptance o f photography as an art form,
a change char scarred in the 1950s. Since the口,
photography became a part of the college and arc
school curriculum, an museums devoted con-
s iderable actenci。n co photography, an galleries
opened co sell only ph otographs, while photog-
raphy entered other galleries that previ。usly had
sold only paintings or o cher trad itional arcs, and
es cab I胁时 magazines such as h怡mm (page
208) and Art in America regu larly pub!胁时 pho-
cograph s and essays about the m edium.
A m e rican work o f t h e 1 950 s wa s o伐en
d escribe d in terms o f regiona l styles. Chicago
W臼identi自ed \\~th the work of A缸。“民md (right,
bottom) and Hany Callahan (right, cop). The 飞:Vest
Coast was linked to the so-called straight photog-
rap he叭 such as阳sel Adams (page 仍and Minor
White (page 53). New York was a cen四r for social
documentation, such 部 by ph。cographers in the
politically active Photo League. Meanwh ile, tied co
no region, Robert Frank, a Smss immigrant, 、m
traveling across the United States photographing
his 0 \\~1 view 。flife (opposite).
A n increasi ng numbe r of colleges a n d art
sch ools in t he late 1 9 60s o仔ered phot o g-
r a phy courses,。fcen in their an departments
where a cross-fertilization of ideas took place
between photographers and artists working in tra-
ditional art media. Some painters and 。ther arc-
ists used photographs in their work or som eti mes
swi tched to photography altogether. Some ph。-
tograph ers combined their images wi th pai nti ng,
printmaking, or 。ther m edia. Older photograph ic
processes were revived, such as gum bichromate
and platinum printing.
Minor 飞:Vhite said that in t h e 1950s ph ocogra-
ph ers fu nction ing as artists were so few that they
used to clu m p together for warmth. The 四plo
s ion of photography in academia helped push
the m edium in many directions, and the l。ng
battle over whether ph otography was an arc was
fi n ally resolved. The win ners were t h ose wh o said
it could be.
204 HI STOR Y O F PHOTOGRAPHY
)
. .
.
, .
Harry Callahan. Eleanor,
1947. Harry Callahan's
work was lyria,/ and pe.俨
sonal. He returned again
and again to three main
themes, the emptin醋。f
city scenes, the rich de臼i/of
lands臼pe.毛 and portrai臼of
his w檐, Eleanor. He sa均
匀t 阳k由me a long time to
change. I don’t think you
can just go out and figure
out a bunch of visual ideas
and pho阳•uaph. 7百e change
happens in living and not
阶rough 阶inking ”
一呵,-
'471
Aaron Siskind. Chicago 30, 1949. Aaron Siskind's best-known work
consists of surfaces abstracted from their context such as peeled and
chipped pa巾t or posters on walls. 7百e SU句;ect of the photograph is the shape.ι
归nality, and other elements 伪at appear 的 it, not the particular wall itself
Robert Frank. Bar - New 沟rk City, 1955. Robert
Frank's ironic view of America exerted a great infTuence
on both the s咐ect matter and s忱。{photography as
an art form. Like Frank's photographι the works of Diane
Arbus, Lee Friedlander, Garry Winogran叫j and others were
personal observations of some of the peculiar and occasiona吵
grotesque aspects of American society.
Above, a glimpse inside a New York bar is an unset伪ng
comment on the emptine.且 ofmodem soαety. Jack Kerouac
wrote in his introduction to Frank's book The Americans,
"After seeing these pictures, you end up finally not knowing
any more whether a juke切,x is sadder than a coffin »
CHAPT E R 10 也 205
Photogrαphγαs Art
in the 1970s αnd 1980s
Photogr叩hers continued to explore a vari-
ety of su均e出 and issu es. Some 阳nained
committed to the str缸ght photography t raditio n
of Edward Weston (page 164) or Ansel Adams
(page 47), while others 口perimented with fo rm to
find a new visi。n Shaped by repercussi。ns of the
Vietnam War and o cher conflicts, some photogra-
ph ers rook the medium in political directions, fo l-
lowi ng the leads ofRoben Frank (page 205) or \V.
Eugene Smith (page 197). Photograph ers like Lee
Friedlander (page 157), Diane Arbus, and Garry
Winogrand (page 135) roamed the stree叭 record
ing the humo几 pathos, and irony of daily life.
Photogr aphy fo und acceptance as a legiti-
m ate art fo rm . During the late 1970s and
early 1980s, emerging artists using photography
like Cindy Sherman (right, t。p), Robert Mapple-
thorpe, and Barbara Kruger were exhibited in art
gall凹ies, as opposed to photography galleries,
and fo und they could prosper. Photographers like
Irving Penn and Jljchard Avedon (opposite), bet-
ter known for t heir commercial work, were given
exh ibitions of th eir editorial and personal work in
major arr museums, evoking controversy 111 some
quarters. Tech nological advances in color ph。tog
raphy, seldom used by art photographers in the
past, helped it gai n popularity.
Museums hired photograph ic curators and
charged them w ith bu ilding collections and
exh ibi t ing ph otography more regu larly. New
institutions like the International Center fo r
Photography ( 1974) and the Center for Creativ
Photography ( 1975) werεfounded By d飞e earl y
1980s, photography had become a fixture in
museums, academia, and the art world at large.
Photogr a phy attracted t h e attention of
respected intell ectu a ls from other fields as well.
In On Photography (1977), Susan Sontag raised pen-
etrating questions about the medi um, its aesthet-
ics, and its ties with the culcure at large. Sontag
validated photography as a subject worthy of seri-
ous analysis. By the early 1980s, photography was
not merely accepted, it was hot.
206 H I ST ORY OF P H O T O G R A PH Y
Robert Cumming. Tile/ Mirror, Milwaukee,时·sco’”的,
1970. “Photographic conceptualism" is a label applied
to Cummini「sea吵photographic wor屿, like 伪is one,
be臼use they broke from the tradition of formal beauty 巾
favor of str,四ing an idea. Many of his "conceptual" pieces
also displ.吧ya 时qd,y sense of humor.
C切司y Sherman. Untitled
Film Still #13, 1978.
Sherman examined modern
culture by pho阳,graphing
herse扩in various roles. 归
thι image from her Untitled
Film Stills series, she pl.钞宫
the role of an actor pl.ψ'ing
a role.
Richard Avedon. 匀,,dra Bennet飞, twelvey,臼rold,
Rocky 问'ord, Colorado, August 23, 1980.
C H A PTE R 1 0 也 207
Color Photogrαphy Arrives-Agαin
B y 1970, almost everyone’ s snapshots were
in color, but art photographs were n ' t . The sud-
den respectabi lity received by serious photography
in the la te 1960s d id not include col。t Many o f
the e阻’s well-known artists h ad photographed in
color-Ansel Adams, Har1y Callahan, Helen Levitt
and even Edward \Vesto n amon g them-bu t what
was seen of t heirs was always b lack and wh ite.
In part, this was d u e to the expense of p rint-
in g books and m agazines in colo r. Bu t t h ere were
oth er r easons as well. Serio us photographers
cook pride in t h eir expressive darkro。m craft;
the tones of a black-an d -wh ite print were easi ly
man ipulated in t h e han ds o f a master. Color pho-
cographs either looked accu rate o r they looked
wrong. Also, dark r。。m colo r c hem icals required
more att en tio n , so q u ali ty con trol favored the
auto ma ted processing machines in h igh-volu me
com m ercial labs. Until the 1970s n。 ph。tograph
ic a rtis ts could make a livi n g just by sell ing prints,
so the ir darkr。。ms were us ually econ omical-
s m all spaces with s imple equ ipmen t. There were
few options for a modest color dark room .
Color materials had (and continue to have)
permanence issues; over t ime, col。m fade a n d
ch a n ge. In m useums you can see many pristin e
examples of black-and呐1ite prints made by the
fi rs t generatio n of p h otograph ers in the 19,h cen -
tury. Research in to the lon gevity of ph。tographs
proved th a t, with careful processing and s to rage,
silver-based b lack-and -whi te pri n ts a n d negatives
can last n early forever . But t h e n ews about color
U咀s a ll bad. It was so bad that u nti l the mid -1970s
most m useums, because 。f thei r obligation co pre-
serve 。同ects in their care, would not collect color
p h o tograph s at all Photographers who wanted
thei r prin臼 to outlast them would口’E tak e a c h ance.
Colo r photography arrived-sudden ly, 1t
seemed-in the mid -1970s. Art schools and Lm i-
versi ties t hat had o nly recently introdu ced ph。tog
raphy courses fo und them increasingly popular.
Art departmen臼 grew fro m teachi ng o n e o r two
p h o to classes to offering a full academic maj时,
which meant expan di ng thei r faci lities to meet
the demand Color photography classes entered
William Eggleston. Gree,,附od, Mississ,”i, 1973.
Egg/es臼n had his 35mm color transparenci,臼
madei.,,阳司ye tran价rprin恒. Now discontinued, the
dye transfer P_rocess was labo户巾tensi,昭and required
absolute precision, but the prints are amo,结 the most
permanent and accurate color photographs ever made.
2 0 8 H I STORY OF PHOTOGRAPHY
In 1978Jan C伊oover
exhibited color pho阳-
graphs at the Sonnabend
Gallery in New York.
Because So啊,abend was
lcno附for exhibiting Pi叩,,,i
nent conte明po叩,yp由nters
and sculp归rs, the appea俨
an臼ofcolor pho阳,graphs
印used a sensation. Writing
about herwo旷k almost
ten years later in the New
York Times, 的tic An吵
。undberg said, “'When
。明e appeared on the co,er
of Art forum magazi叫 it
was a signal that pho阳,gra
phy had arri时din the a叫
附rid-complete with a
marketplace 归 support iι ”
\
Artforum. January, 19 79.
the course catalogs and school labs set up color
processing machines. More facilities meant more
emerging artis臼 with color portfolios, and more
color prints on view.
Newly available research showed t hat cooler
temperatures slowed the deterioration of color
photographs. Museums began constructing
refrigerated vaults to s tore the color photographs
they could then collect, and some photographers
found r。。m in their studios for freezers to keep
their color negatives.
For years, Kodak ignored pleas fr。m com-
mercial photographers and artists alike for a more
permanent color printing paper, but Fuji listened.
They began to marl也E color paper in 1980 and
improved its 口pected lifespan with a new version
eve1y few years. Photographers-and collectors-
began to trust that color photographs wouldn’t
vanish overnigh t.
Colo r photography was valid ated by muse-
um exhi bit ions. S tephen Shore was represented
by color prints in the enormously influential New
Topograph ics exhibition at the George Eastman
House in 1975. Although color photographs had
been shown occasionally at New York’s Museum
of Modern Art since 1937, its 1976 exhibitions of
飞.Vil
were hailed as a 叭,atershed in the acceptance of
col。E ph。tographs as fine 缸t
Stephen Shore. South of附ama曲Falls, U.S. 97, Oregon,
July 21, 1973. Shore pho阳•graphed with an 8 × 10
view camera using color film. The resulting prints
'7here’s something arb占ra,yabout 臼king a picture.
So I can stand at thee司geofa h吵way and take one step
forward and it can be a natural landscape un阳uched~
man and /酬阳ke one stφ加c/c and include a guard-have saturated colors_,卢,,ede阳ii, and cry宫阳/line clarity
but, he Sd)侣, 飞it's that awaren甜。,freally looking at
the everyday world wi,阶 clear and focused attention 阶at
I'm interested in ”
rail and change the meaning of the picture radi,臼fly."
His not-so-arbitrary decision 曲stφback allowed him 归
rai:且questions about the nature of pictures.
C HAPTER , 。 然 209
Digitαl Photogrαphy
p R巳D ECESSORS
T oday, i白 di俑cult t o t h ink o f a sector
of our society t h at isn ’t a仔ected in s ome
m easure by digitize d imagery. T he print an d
media industries, the ans, m edici ne, politics, and
sports all use an d depend on d igital images. Web
sites and apps such as Snapchat, Instagram, and
Facebook regale us with the latest pictures of
frie nds, pe臼, kids, and everyth ing else in ways that
few people could imagi ne even a decade ago.
M a ny of photography’ s inven t ors were
g ro unde d in t h e sciences, for 口ample, William
Henry Fox Talbot (page 184) and Sir Joh n
Herschel in t he early 19由 century. Talbot, coin-
cidentally, was friends with Charles Babbage, a
mathematician whose “ difference engi ne," was the
fi rst successful automatic calculator-t he direct
ancestor of today's computers. In the mid-20由
centu厅, scientists and engineers played key roles
in devel。ping digital imagi ng systems. Space navi-
gation and mapping drove th e development 。E
for example, t he H ubble telesc。pe an d advan ced
television cameras
The impulse t o m a n ipulate photographs
is n early as o ld as 由e m e d ium itself. Long
before computers were invented, people wan ted to
do (an d som e were d。i ng) one of the 巾ngs t hat
d igital imaging does s。 well-combining imag-
es. Herny Peach Robinson (page 200), Oscar G.
Rejlander (right), and o thers cut, p臼ted, masked,
缸1d reph otographed images to ma!也 allegories,
illustrate Biblical stories, an d create dramatic 。g
s imply a musing scenes.
In the early 20th cen tu ry, artists like Man Ray
and Laszlo Moholy-Nagy (page 203), Hann ah
Hoch, and John Heart field created surrealistic-
and s。metimes polincal-mon tages
I ns钮,,t feedback was a n elu sive g o a l for
phot o g raphers. Until t h e availability of Edwi n
Land’s firs t Polaroid camera in 1948, there was no
practical way,。ther t han years of experience, to
know if a captured image would match t he expe.c-
tations 。f the p hotograph er. Polaroid’s instan t-
print cameras and fil m were enorm ously popular
for snapsh。“, and their professional fi lms were
an essential proofi ng step in stud ios, but most
210 H I STORY O F PHOTOGRAPHY
instan t fi lms limited th e photographer to produ c-
ing-like t h e early daguerreotype-only a small,
uniqu e print.
Dig it al imaging s o o n re a ch ed a popu la r
a udience. Soph isticated computer equ ipment
was used to generate new special effects and m卜
m ation techniques in popular fi lms like Star \Va盯
{1977). Dazzling imagery captivated au d iences,
including fi lm makers and artists who began to
glimpse and use t he visual possibi lities (see pages
2 12-213). C。mpeti tion among Koda!飞Sony, Fuji,
and other cot porations led to the introduction
of cameras t ha t could capture an im age digi tally,
an d sh。w it to the ph otographer immediately, in
the early 1990s. In Janua巧, 2008, t h e Japan ese
camera manufacture凹’ trade organ ization report-
ed fi lm camera sales 。f less t h an 0. 1 % of total
cameras sold; after t h at t h ey stopped inclu d ing
fil m cameras in their month ly sales reports.
Oscar C. Rejland,配问lander
Introduces R可lander the Volunteer, c.
1865. R吃ilanderoβ·en pieced 阳·~ether
negativ,自阳produce composite images.
He enjoyed theatrics and pho归•graphed
himself and other军 di.平laying emotionι
made character studies, and created
comp Ii,臼阳d allegori,臼Is,臼nes. 归伪h坦·If
portrait, he appears as both the artist and
the soldier he is 巾traducing.
Jim Stone. Dawn and Krista at the Lemonade Stand,
与yra阳血, New York, 1984. To 户hotograph strang-
ers, S旬,,e used a now-discontinued Polaroid
instant positiv,电/negative film in his 4 × Sview
camera. It made an instant print that he gave 归his
SUψcts 归 make sure they附re comfortable with the
image, and a negative he kept to make 归也uprints.
7百e film pack, a sandwich of black-and-white
film and print pape巧 contained a pod of developing
chemicals that would process the materials after ex-
posure-in daylight-in twenty seconds. The 斤·ame's
distressed edges, visible in the image abo吨 are the
result of including a part of the negati时阶at extended
beyond the ins阳nt print's masked w由ite border.
CHAPTER ,。 然 川
Digitαl Photogrαphy
BECOMES MAINSTREAM
T h e 1990 int roduction of A d o be Photo s hop
w as a major t urning p oint in t h e aαeptance
a nd u se o f digital im aging. An early exhibi-
tion, D锣ta/ Photograp抄 Cap阳陀d Image.毛 Volatile
Memory, New Montage ( 1988) gathered work by
artists such as Paul Berger, MANUAL (Suzanne
Bloom and Ed Hill), Esther Parada, Martha Rosier
(page 76), and o thers who used digital imaging
for a variety of purposes. T he flexibi lity of digital
imaging and the integration of applications o n
the computer led many artists to exp!。re cross-
media and interdisciplinary production using
1nsrallat1ons, music, and video.
In the 1990s, many traditional photographers,
who had long been committed to black and wh ite,
began us ing color, in part because digital techno l-
ogy simplified color management and made the
printing process m ore accessible.
212 H I STOR Y OF PH OTOGRAPHY
In less t h a n a gene ration, digital technol-
o gy t ook ove r 由e m edium of photography.
Anyon e who owns a camera, or even just a cell
ph。ne, is an image maker. In 20 17, Facebook
claimed that its members upload 136,000 ph。tos
eve1y sixty seconds. By 2014, there were more active
cell ph。nes than people in the world, and about
95% of them were camera phones. Virtually every-
o ne in the world 1s carrying-and using-a camera
D igi tal manipulation of images is common-
place, whether in the news, in advertising, or in
the si m ple act of removing unwanted power lines
(or unpleasan t relati s) fr。m o ur s口apshots. T h e
allure of ph otography has always in part been
abou t controlling and even altering our experi-
ence of reality. We have experienced a revolution
wh ose contours and implications we are just
beginning to understand.
Martina Lopez. Heirs
Come to Pass, 1991. Lopez
was a pioneer in the use of
digital collage, or composit-
in阜 as a 卢,,e art medium
7百is pie出 references her
own family's photographic
archi吨, and she imagines
herself as all the female
characters, but the figures
all came from found photo-
graphs. Individuals印,,s 附m
assembled using a very ea吵
ν·ersion of Photoshop, before
version 3 (in 1994) intro-
duced L砌的 and a/lo附d
each piece of a composite to
beman伊ulated 时dividually.
Direct high咛uality print-
ing from diiJtal fil<臼 was not
wide.世d时i/able at the 时,e.
Lopez坦-nt 伪e completed file
归a film recorder to create a
4x 5 film tran平,arency仇。tshe
伪en printed剧。bachrome
(now called 1/fochrome) in a
co/orda放,即m
Nancy Burson. Warhead 1, 1982. Burson made combination portraits like 伪h
。”e after working with scientists at MIT in the 1970s 归 develop software to graphically
advance a portrait subject's apparent age (it was used to find se时rat ’”issing children).
This digi,臼I composite superimpo阳images of five 附rid /eade.,骂,伪e visual阳讲t
of臼ch face represents how ma’,yofthe附rld's nuclear warheads they controlled:
Ronald R臼,gan (55%) and Leonid Br,臼\nev (45%), wi伪 Margaret Thatcher,二丹·anfois
Mitterand, and De’飞gXiaoping (each less than 1%). It was made n臼r夕a decade before
photo-quality digital printers appeared; Burson used a film camera to photograph her
composit,由displayed on a CRT monitoι then made exhibition prints in a darkroom.
CHAPTER 10 也 m
More Leαrn How to
Use a search engine to fi nd pages 。n a specific
topic. Most browsers h ave search e ngines a l-
rea dy st。red as b。。kmarks, three useful 。nes
among many a re c。ogle, B,ng , and Yah。。
Type keyw。rds to locate your top,c, using sev-
era I t。 narrow the search. A recent search 。n
t he ke沪N。rd phot':f,'aphy in En_glish tu rned u p
。ver 1.5 billio n sites. Narr。wing the search t。
photography museum listed 8 m ,lhon p。ss1b1 li
ties. Changing the searc h to photography museum
Roch田ter NY reduces the n u mb er E。 a still-
daunting 650,000 entries, but the first 。ne 。n
that 11st ,s pro bably the 。ne y。u’d want-the
h。me page fo r the Ge。rge Eastman Museum.
M。st u mvers1t1es and public li braries have
c。mputers that are always 。n l ,ne, meaning
they are c。nnec四d to the In四rnet. M。st cof-
自eehouses and many 。ther bu引ness白。他r free
WI陀less ( Wi存) connewon to the Int ernet chaε
y。u can use ,f y,。u bnngyour 。wn laptop c。m
pu四r, tablet,。r smaπph。ne.
T。 c。nnect fr。m y。ur home, y。u need a
com put er, tablet, 。r smartph。ne and a c。n
tract wit h an Internet Service Provider (。r ISP)
A l。cal c。mputer retail store can help answer
questl。ns, a nd nu me rous self-he lp b。。ks are
av副lable on the topic
Further informatl。”。” ph。tography is readily
available. Many b。。ks and magazines extend
techn ical 1nformat1。n; 。thers re produce greaε
examples-b。th c。n四mp。rary a nd h istorical-
。f practical and aπ,st,c ph。t。,graphy. The b,b-
l,。graphy。n page 226 and a local 。r university
library are g。。d places to start
Camera store pe陌。nnel can answer questi。ns
ab。utthe pr。ducts 由ey sell. Additi。nally,
the sta怦, n m。st camera st。res are 。丘en avid
ph。tographers themselves, and they m ay b e
eagerε。discuss ph。E。graphy-espec,ally when
the store ,s n。t c rowd ed
O nline magazines, portal sites, and biogs are
very useful fo r ma ny m户口 Any。ne can staπ
and maintain a blog (。nginally weblog), a regu-
la rl y updated Web s,回They 。ften include links
to other, s,m,la rly focused biogs. Over t ime,
some have grown larger, blurnng t he defi m-
ti。n S。me a re like pub lic d,an凹, 。thers c。n-
s。hda四 poπfol ,os 。r εechn1cal inf.。m、at,on, 。r
feat ure in四rviews, b。。k reviews, a wards, and
c。ntests. T ry DPRev,ew. c。m, FlakPh。mc。m
Fraw。nMagazine.c。m, and Le nsCulture. c。m
to seeεhe range Also 四e the hst 。fWeb Sites
feat un ng the work 。fphotographe目 repre-
sent ed in ch ,s b。。k,。n page 2 20
AWebbr。wser is t he s。仕ware program your
c。mputer uses to rea ch t he World W ide Web
Do m inating the fi e ld are M。zi lla Firefox, Ap ple
Safari, G。。gl e C hro me, and Micros。仕 Internet
Explo rer. They a re free (b ut you need t o use 。ne
t。d。wnload an。ther), and m。st c。mputers
are s u pplied with at least 。ne alread y install ed
Your Web browser le ts y。u type in a l。c.at1on
。r a ddress, called a URL (f.。r Uniform Res。urce
Locator), to rea ch a specific Web page
Ad d resses begin w ith http://。rM的V M。st
pages c。n阳n links that C。n nect y,。u d irect ly to
。ther related pages si mply by clicking 。n t hem.
Your b rowser lets you save a ny URL as a 胁。k
mark s。 y。u can easily re tu rn t。此
Advanced classes and w。rkshops are 。fl'ered
aim。st eve叩where, &om guided photo tou陪m
professional l『ght,ng sem inars. Ask about them
at a camera store, a local c。mmumtyc。liege or
u n附rs,ty, 。r search the Internet (see b elow)
The In回met can answer aim。st any question
you may have about ph。E。graphy Like an
imme nse library, the w。rldW由Web gives
you a ccess t o , nformaεi。n, 。pinions, and ,m-
a ges. O n ,t y。u ca n search fo r prices and o rder
b。。ks, supplies, a nd eq u ipment And y。u can
show y。ur 。wn phot。graphs t o any,。new,ch an
Internet c。nnecc,。陀w。rldwide
…一
一
一
一
一
=
一
}
副
主
一
一
田二U
H
EF- -f
囚
一一国
一…副
~
ltf:i~1 EEEEZ。5
3
2
-2
2
圭
FmN零
一
一
位
一
…
一
三一塌
葫
嗨
一
斗
圄
…
配
工
一
二
四
囚一回
刷一
-
73
4
·’
响w
2·
”
是
g
E
S
Ph。tography 。rganizations h ave gallenes and
libraries; many p ublish newsletters and books
and-hke Light Work, the Syracuse, N ew Y,。rk
a rtist' s space sh。wnab。ve-spons。r a rtists with
res1denc1es, gran臼, and in 。ther w ays. Find 。ut
ab。ut their pr。g日ms &om their Web sit es
叫咱
叫阿··一叫嗣
”一川·’w
一-~…一一一甲恤阳明
Museums have sites 。n the Int ernet. This 。ne
has an 。n hne vers1。n ofa book-lengt h cata -
l。g-an exhib1t1。n 。f landscape ph。E。graphy
t hat w a s held at the Smi ths。man Ame rican
Art M useum. lnformat1。n ab。川 ind1v1dual
aπ眩目旺。仕en presen四d a lo ng w ith images
Product information is plentiful 。n t he Web
Camera m a kers featu re n ew p ro d ucts a nd pr。-
v1de l istings 。f lenses a nd access。nes. Paper
ma n ufact u rers' s1白毛 hke ln nova's shown here,
have pnn阻’ profi les y。u can download , as
well a s c。mple四 pr。d uct l1st1ngs
H OW T O L EA R N MO R E 2 14
Troubleshooti!些
1'-rom tim e to t im e, ever y p h otograph er enco unte r s ca ptured 1mag凹, scans,
I or pri口ts that d isplay unexpected problems. T h is sect n c an help y。u巾
d、e ca use o f some com m o n probl e m s-and ho、、, to p r event t h e m in t he fu ture.
SOLVING CAMERA AND LENS
PROBLEMS
IMAG E AREA COMPιETELY BLACK
Cause: The sensor ( or 刷m) recerved n。四p。sure
Prevention· Increase exposure by several stops and sh。。t again
Check that the lens cap is 。ff. Wi th electronic flash , the Aash may
n。E have fi red
LIGHT STREAKS. Image area flared 。r foggy looking 。veral l. If y。u
use 民Im, darkened in a negative, lighte ned in a pn nt 。r slid e, with 民Im
ed ges u旧的cted. The ,mage may als。 showgh。sting 。r ge。metnc
sp。ts in the shape 。fthe lens d1aph用gm
Cause: The sun, a bnght bulb, 。r。ther l,ght s。urce was w1th1n 。r
close to the ,mage, 。r b n ght hght struck t he lens a t an angle
Prevent,。”: Expect s。me Aare ,f y。u can see a light s。urce in your
viewfinder. The l a咆er 。r b nghter the hght, t he m。re 自are y。u w ,11
get, d istant 。r d1 m l 1gh臼 may not pr。duce any A are at a ll. T。 pre-
vent stray light fr,。m stri king t he lens, use the c。rrect size lens shade
for y。ur lens 币,cal length (n ght ) . Even with a lens shade, make sure
the sun ,s n。t sh,nong directly 。n y。ur lens
PICTU R E NOT S H A RP. Easier to see in a n enla rged print 。r
screen display at 100% magnoficatl。n
Cause: Too slow a 址、utter speed will blur a moving subject。r blur the
picture 。verall due to came阻m。口。nT。。 w,de an apertu陀w, 11 make
t he scene sharp where y,。u focu坦d It but n。t ,n front 。for behind t hat
part. An 四t陀melyd,πy lens can somet,m臼 reduce sharpness 。ve阻11,
especially when c。mb,ned with lens 自are
Prevent,,。”: U臼a faste r sh utter speed 。r smaller apeπure, 。r supp。π
the came用m。re stead ily. Keep finge rpn nts and dirt 。何the lens
V IGNETTING . Image obscured or ve叩dark a t
the c。rners
Cause: A lens shade,而lter, 。r b。th pr,。'Jected
E。。 far fo阳•ard 。fthe lens and partially
blocked the image fr。m reaching the lens
Prevention· Lens shades are shaped to match
d,伯rent focal-length lenses (nght ). Use t he
c。rrect shade for your lens:,田。 l。nga le ns
shad e can cau四vignetting, b ut 。ne that IS E。。
shall。wwill not provid e adequate pr。四口,。n
from flare. Using more than 。ne filter。r a filter
plus a lens shade can cause vignetting , espe-
c1ally with a sh。rt lens
([
Lens shade for
l。”Z伽:al•leng甜lens
@应
Forsho呻·focal•le,”Z曲lens
T R O U BL ES HO O TI N G 2 15
SOLVING CAMERA AND LENS
PROBLEMS, continued
LIN ES T ” ROUGH IMAG E.
Cause· N。nresp。nd,ng CCDs A line 。n a d igital camera ph。E。 means a
r。w。fCCDs o n t he sensor ,s n。t collecting p ixel data . A 1 ,ne 。n a sc.an
1s from a single d ead CCD that m。ves across the ,mage
Prevention· Focmg the problem may mean replacing 出e scanner 。r cam-
era, but suc h lines a re easy to retouch in the ,mage. Ph。toshop lets
y。u selecεa single-pixel row or c。lumn a nd adJUSt it sepa阻四ly (see
als。 Lines Across a Pn肘, page 2 19 )
OUST S P E CKS . Dark 。r black specks 。r marks 。n a digi臼I image,
clear specks 。n a negative
Cause· Dust 。n the sensor 。r 民Im dunng exp。sure. 81白。f d ust 。n t he
hg ht-sens1t1ve surface w,II keep the light b。m reaching a small part 。f
,t duri ng the exp。sure
Prevention· Keep the m引de 。f t he camera dust 什ee by carefully blowing
。r dusting camera surfaces when y。u change lenses 。r reload fi lm
(四e p age 29). Clean d ust 。ut 。f t he cap thaεc。vers the back 。fy。ur
le ns before use. Specks can be retouc hed d uri ng image ed iting to re-
m。ve t he m but It 1s better not to get them.
21 6 T ROUBL E SHOOT I NG
LIGHTNESS / DARKNESS PROBLEMS
S UBJ E CT VERY DARK AGAINST LIGHTER BACK-
GROUND.
Cause· The me四r averaged all the t。nes ,n ,cs angle of v,ew, the n
c。mputed an exp。sure 品。r a m1dd le-g日y tone. The p roblem ,sεhat
the average 。f the 。verall scene was lighter than a m iddle tone, s。
a ppears t。。 dark
Prevention: Don’t ma ke an 。verall reading w h en a subject 1s against
a much lighter background . Instead _, m。ve in cl。se to me te r JUSt a
paπ 。f the su bject t ha t 1s middle-toned, then seεyour shutter speed
a nd aperture acc。rdmgly (坦e pages 70-72).
每 一-
SUBJ ECT V ERY LIGHT AGAINST DARKER BACK-
GROUND .
Cause: If t he su bject 1s c。。 light, Y。ur me ter was overly mff uenced by a
dark background a nd 。verexposed t he image
Prevention: D。n't make an 。verall read ing when a subject 1s against a
m uc h darker backgro u nd. Instead , move 1n close to meter JUSt a paπ
。f the subject t hat 1s m iddle-toned , then set your shutter speed and
aperture acc。rdmgly (see pages 70-72)
SHARPNESS PROBLEMS
NOT ENOUGH (。r t h e wr。”g p art) OF TH E S C E NE IS
IN FOCUS .
Cause: 1 . N。E en。ugh depth 。ffield. Too wid e an aperture w ill result
in shall。wdepth 。f自eld, making the scene sharp where y。u foc used
the camera, b ut not ,n front 。f。r behind that pa同。fthe scene. 2
Shutter speed was t。。 slow, subject 。rcamera m。ved dunng exp。-
sure. 3 . Camera wasn’ t focused 。n t he main subject
Prevention: 1. Ch。。se a smaller apeπure. 2 . Ch。。sea faster shutter
speed 。r set the camera 。n a tnp。d . 3 . Ch。。se manual 币OCUS, 。r
make sure you kn。w h。wy。ur autofocus lens selects a 自,cus d is-
tance ( see page 43 )
A LL O R PART OF SCAN OUT OF FOCUS.
Cause: If the e ntire i mage 归。ut 。ffocus, the scanner v,b甩出d dunng
the exposure 。几 with fi lm, the 。nginal 1s held t。。 far fr。m t he scan-
ner’s plane 。f focus . If part 。f t he scan ,s out 。f而ocus, the scan ner
may have been b u mped dun ng t he scan. The film may be buckling 。r
m。vmg d unng the scan, 。r may not be he ld fl at en。ugh
Prevention: Make sure the scanner sits 。n a s。l,d surface and ,s not
vibrated by nearby equip ment. A glass h。Ider or c。vering sheet will
keep the fi lm flat, b ut may introduce Newt。旷s n ngs, undesired 阳n
bow-c。lored patterns. Spe口al ant1-Newton glass is av副Iable
FLASH PROBLEMS
PART OF SCEN E EXPOSE D CORRECTLY, PART TOO
LIGHT OR TOO DARK.
Cause: ObJec臼 ,n the scene were at d,的rent distances from the flash,
so were exposed to d。他rent am。u n臼。f light
Prevention: T,叩 to group imp。rtant parts 。f t he scene a t ab。ut the
姐me d旧ance from the fl ash (see page 148)
FLASH PROBLEMS, continued
ONLY PART O F SCENE EXPOS E D .
Cause: Sh。。t1ng at to。也st a shutter speed with a came甩出at has
a foca l pla ne shutter, such as a single-lens reflex camera . The flas h
fi red when t he sh utter was n。t fully 。pen
Prevention· C heck manufacture r’s instructions fo r the correct shutter
speed to sync hronize with 由ash, and set the sh utter-speed dial
acc。rdingly F。r m。st cameras, 11,;o sec is safe:,也ster speeds are
usable w ,th s。me cameras. The fl ash shutter speed may appear 。n
y。ur came阻’s shutter-speed d ia l ,n a d倪rent c。1。r h。m the 。ther
shutter speeds, 。r it may be marked w,th a n X
SUB』ECT APP EARS TOO DARK OR TOO LIGHT. Manual flash
坦mngs are m。re likely to cause problems t ha n automatic 。pe阻口。n, wh,ch
reads t he 1 llum,nat1。n from 由e 刊ash t hrough the le ns. M。re ab。ut flash
。perati。n。n pages 146-147
Cause: T,。。 dark-the scene was underexposed, not enough l,ght
reached the 民Im 。r臼肘。r T。。 l ,ght-too much lig ht reached t he
白Im or sensor. Semng exp。sure fo r Rash manually, an 。ccas,onal too
d ark 。r lig ht fra me p robably results from setting the lens aperture ,n-
correctly 。r making a n exp。sure before t he flash ,s fu lly c harged
Prevention: In manual 。pe用tion, increase the 四posure ab。ut a stop
for scenes shot 。utd。。目 at night 。r ,n a la rge room like a g归nna-
s1um; t he relatively d ark surroundings abso巾 l ight that would 。ther
wise b ounce back to ad d to the exposure. W ith a n。n built-in fl ash , 1f
y。ur p ictures a re freq uently to。 dark, t叩 setting the fl ash u n比m ha lf
the ISO y。u are using
Close d。wn the apeπure ab。ut a st。p when shooting ,n small,
l 1ght-c。lored rooms to c。mpensate for excess light b。uncing back
from walls and ceiling. W it h a non bu1lt -1n Rash, if your pictu res a re
usually 。verexp。到d a nd too hght , t叩 semngεhe fl ash u n『t to twice
the ISO y。u are using
TROUBL ES HOOTING 217
SOLVING FLASH PROBLEMS , continued
F l ash p。inted s trai g ht Same scene shot
at reflec创ve surfaεe at an angle
UNWANTED REFLECTI ON .
Cause· Light bouncing b ack fr。m reflective surfaces such as g lass, m ,r-
r。r, 。r shiny walls
Prevention· P。Sltl。n the camera aεan angle to hig hly reflective surfaces
。r a im the flash at the subject 击。m。仔came阳
RED EYE. Ape目。n’s o r animal ’S町es appear red 。r amb er ma c。l。r
p ic ture, ve叩l ight ,n a black-a nd-white p icture ( see page 148)
Cause· Light reAect1ng from the bl。。d-nch retina insid e t he eye
Prevention: M。ve the flas h away fr,。m the le ns 。r have the subject l。。k
slightly m。ne sid e of the camera . Turning the subject's head slightly
can a lso prevent bright re何配。。ns b。m 町eglasses. S。me cameras
have a red-eye reduction m。de: t he fl ash ligh臼 up briefly before
t he main 凹p。sure so that t he su bject’sins c。ntracts, red ucing the
am。unt of v1s1 ble red
218 TROUBLESHOOT I NG
SOLVING COLOR PROBLEMS
GREE NI S H LOOK TO SCE NE OVE RALL.
Cause: Scene shot ,n fluo rescent light, which e mits d目pr,。p。rtl。nate
am。un臼。fgreenish light. See a lso Unexpec四d col。r cast, bel。w.
Prevention: With film , try an Fl filter 。n the le ns. Seε the w hite balance
of a d igital camera to flu。rescent ( see pages 6 a nd 58)
BLUISH OR R E DDISH LOOK TO SCENE OVERALL.
Cause: C。l。r film or a d igita l camera’ s wh,因 balance semng n。E
matched to the type of hghtmg 。n t he scene Dayhght fi Im shot m
incandescent hght will g ive a reddish l。。k
Prevention: F,。r a m。re realistic c。l。r balance, seε the white balance of
a d igita l came阻m the type 。f lighting used (see pages 6 and 58)
Use a # 80A filte r fo r a scene lit by incandescent ( ab。ut 3200K) light
bulbs. Use daylight-balanced fi lm 1n daylight 。r with flas h
UNEX P E CTED COLOR CAST.
Cause: Light re由ected fr,。m a nearbyc。lored 。bJeCt can g ive a c。l。r
cast to the scene. The shad e of a t ree can add a n unexpected l。。k
to skin t。nes because t he lig ht was fi ltered th rough c。l。red leaves,
here,。range fall leaves. S1m1larly, light b。unc1ng 。百a str。ngly c。I
。red wal I can tint t he scene the c。l。r of t he wall. The e的Ct IS m。st
n。口ceable 。n skin c。nes or ne utral t。nes like wh1目。r gray.
Prevention : T1叩to rec。gnize a nd, 1f you w,sh, av。1d the situation. In
some cases, t he color balance 。fselected a reas can be adjusted
separa四ly d uring image ed山ng
SOLVING OTHER DIGITAL PROBLEMS
P IX ELATION . Edges look stair-stepp ed. Details are indistinct
Cause: Image res。l ution m。 l。w fo r the intended use
Prevention: 72 dp1 IS ideal fo r display 。n a m。nitor, but p ri n ting fr,。m
an in kjet o r dye-subl ,matl。n pnnter requires 180-360 dp,. If y。u
scanned the 『mage, rescan 1t at a higher dp『 setti ng.
If the image came from a d 1g1tal camera, t叩Ph。toshop
lmage> lmage Size to resamp le the image a t a h igher d p1. Next time
y。u ph。tog阻ph, use a highe r resoluti。n
SOFT IMAGE. De阳Is 1n the image a re not sharp.
Cause: Possib ly p。。r 币ocus o r camera moveme nt ( see Picture not
sharp, page 2 15 ). Extreme fi le c。mpression UPEG, page 8 1) is
sh。wn in the example ab。ve
With a digital camera, quality level IS too low. At low-quali ty
settings (a lso called basic or tpod队 the camera c。mpresses the image
fi le. When the image IS reopened and u nc。mpressed, details can be
Jost. The visible results may b e negl1g1ble when pnn臼 are very small,
but w1II be n。”ceable ,f they are enlarged
Prevention: T1叩m a nticipate the fina l size and reproduction method
for y。ur images. P1ctur自由 b e used only 。n the Web can be shot
前 low quality. Use the came阻’s h ighest quality setting 1f you m『ght
ever want to make 8 x 10-1nch o rlarger prin臼
All digitally captu red pictures need some sha甲ening ( page 104) .
lfy,。u a re JUSt starting 。ut, you may n。t be used to JUSt how u nsharp
y。ur unsharpened ph。tographs w ill appear.
D IGITAL NOIS E. C。lored specks in dark a reas.
Cause: Often 。ccurs 1n shad。wareas, 1n ph。tos taken at night,。r in
low light with a long 剧p。sure
Prevent,。”·Try shooti ng at a lower ISO; instead 。f ISO 800 。r 1600,
try ISO 1 00 。r 200. Try Phot。sh。p FilteρN。,se>Despeckle. This
reduces the n。ise, alth。ugh It S。仕ens the image somewhat
BANDING. Un剧pected bands in areas w ith n。 de阳I .
Cause: W ith a d 1g1ta l camera, scene may have been sh。t at t。。 high an
ISO setting. S。me fine patterns, like a wind。wscreen, may create a
pattern ( called moire) w he n 。verla1d with the p阳el gnd
Prevention: T1叩sh。。ting the scene with a lower ISO Y。u m ight need to
use a tnp。d and a sl。wer shutter speed 。r add lig ht from a ff ash 。r
。ther lig ht s。urce
OVERS HARPE N I NG . De阻,i ls too c由pand c。ntrasty that may
sh。wd igital n。,se; c。lored 而i-ingesal。ng ed ges
Couse: Ove陪harpening the pnnt while scan ning o r while w。rking 。n
the image 1n an image-edit ing prog日m (see page 104)
Prevention: Rescan the pnnt, transparency,。r negative without sharp-
e n ing 1t. With a d1g1ta l came阻 image, return to the 。rig1nal d 1g1tal
自le, if比 has n。t been sharpened. When y。u resharpen the image, d。
sowt引le v『ewing at 100% magni币Cati。n
LIN ES ACROSS A PRINT.
Cause: Misaligned 。r cl。gged pnnt heads
Prevent,。”: U坦 the pnnter’s s。仕ware u tility t o check for a problem The
ut1 I町will a lso align head s, pn nt a test pattern, and ru n cleaning cycles
TROUBL ES HOOTING 2 19
Photogrαphers ’ Web Sites
‘’、/ e b p ages a r e t o day’ s gallerie s ; many photographers use
Y Y them to show a broader sampling of their work than they could
in a gallery exhibit or a monographic b。。K Compared to those venues,
a Web site is also available to be seen almost anywhere at any time and
can always be updated to include new work. Use the links below to find
out more about the photographers whose work appears in this b。ok.
Adams, Ansel
Adams, Shelby Lee
Avedon, Richard
Barney, Tina
Bateman, Edward
Brooks, Drex
Burson, Nancy
Carey, Alison
Cartier-Bresson, Henri
Chin, Christine
Comen,Sam
D’Amato, Paul
De Keyzer, Carl
Divola,John
Dujarclin, Filip
Eggleston,飞亨illiam
Ekberg, Adam
Envitt, Elliott
Fink, Larry
Fontcuberta,J oan
Frank, Robert
Galvan, Laurisa
Gilbertson, Ashley
Gilden, Bruce
Gonzalez, Dionisio
Gossage,John
Gould, Meggan
Harker, Santiago
Harvey, David Alan
Hatal也yama,Naoya
Hocks, Teun
looss,飞亨alter
Joh nson, Keith
Jones, Lou
Jones, Peggy Ann
Joyce, Kate
Karsh , Yousuf
k过lip, Chris
anseladams.com
shelby-lee-adams.blogspot.com
richardavedon.com
tinabarney.com
xmission.com;- capteddy
drexbrooks.com
nancyburson.com
alisoncarey.com
magnumphotos.com
christinechin.net
samcomen com
pauldamaro.com
carldekeyzer.com
divola.com
filipdujardin.be
egglesrontrust.com
adamekberg.com
ell1otterw1tt.com
billcharles.com
fontcuberta.com
pacemacgill.com
laurisagalvan.com
ashleygilbertson.com
magnumphotos.com
dionisiogonzalez.es
loosestrifebooks.com
meggangould.net
santiagoharker.com
magnumphotos.com
takaishiigalle1y.com
teunhocks.nl
walteriooss com
keithjohnsonphorographs.com
fotoj。nes.com
pinhole.us
kate-joyce.com
karsh.org
chriskillip.com
220 PH O T OGRAPHER S’ WE B S ITE S
Klett, Mark
Koo, Bohnch ang
Kost,Julieanne
Koudelka,Josef
Leibovitz, Annie
Leventi, David
Liebling,Jerome
Lopez, Martina
Mandel, Mike
Manzano,Javier
McFarland, Lawrence
markklettphotography.com
bck。。.com
jkost.com
magnumphoros.com
contactpress1mages.com
davidleventi.com
jeromeliebling.com
marrinalopezph。to. com
thecorner.net
Jav1ermanzano com
lawrencemcfarland.com
Meiselas, Susan susanmeiselas.com
Miralle, Donald donaldmiralle.com
Misrach, Richard fraenkelgallery.com
Moho!沪Nagy, Laszlo moholy-nagy.org
Oberschneider, Christoph oberschneider.com
Owyoung, Todd toddowyoung.com
Padula, Warren wpadula.com
Parr, Martin
Pinkh assov, Gueorgui
PoKempner, Marc
Richfield, Robert
Richter, Christian
Robinson, Geoffrey
Robledo, Maria
Rosier, Martha
Ro飞.vin, Stanley
Schafer,如iichael
Sch erer,Jim
Shennan, Cindy
Shore, Stephen
Siskind, Aaron
Smith,飞V Eugene
Sohier, Sage
Sod飞 Alec
Stein,Amy
Sternfeld,Joel
Stone,Jim
marttnparr com
magnumphoros.com
pokempner.net
robert-richfield.com
r ichterchristian.com
geoffrobinsonphotography.co.L也
judycasey.com
marrharosler.net
stansrudio com
mschaefer-srudio.de
jimscherer.com
metropicruresgallery.com
stephenshore.net
aarnnsiskind.org
magnum photos.com
sagesohier.com
alecsoth.com
amysteinphoto.com
joelstemfeld.com
j1msrone com
?『..
Strembicki, Scan
Tarnowski, Tom
T aylor, David
T urner, Pete
Ulrich, Brian
Umbrico, Penelope
van Coller, Ian
scrembicki.com
ccarnowskt n ee
dcaylorphoco.com
peteturner.com
nocifbucwhen.com
penelopeumbrico.net
U川ancoller.com/
Brian Ulrich. Untitled (Thrifi 0509), 2005.
Obsolescence comes quickly in the d也-ital
world, as you can see 时 this photograph from
Ulrich’s坦·rieso,,伪rifi s.阳res. VI也know伪rough
Vanderwarker, Peter
飞;tiebb, Alex
飞;tleems, Carrie Mae
飞;tleifenbach, Terri
飞;t’haley,Jo
飞;t’illis, Deborah
xRezScudio
ad晤时ising伪at the equipment and如冉咽re for
making photographs are cons阳ntI.r_evolvinι but
如are 阶e pictures附can view on/ine. Use the list
on these two pages to check 巾。,,your favorites.
vanderwarker.co m
magnumphocos.com
car riemaeweems.nec
scephendaicergallerγcom
jowhaley.com
debwillisphoco.com
xrez com
PHOTOGRAPHER S’ WEB S ITES 221
Glossαrγ
Aberrati。n Opcical defecc in a lens (sometimes
unavoidable) cau sing d iscorcion or loss 。f
sharpness in 由e final image
Adapter ring A ring used z。 attach one camera
’cem co anocher; for 四ample, co ac臼ch a lens co
a camera 川 reverse p。si c i。n in 。rder co increase
image sharpness when 岛cusing 四叩closeco che
SU同ect.
Additive c。lor The chree pnma叩 colors (red,
green, and b lue) chac can be mixed as lighc co
macch any。cher c。lor. See Subcraccive c。lor.
Ambient li~ht See Av.由lable lighc
Angle 。f view Theam。unc of a scene chac can be
recorded by a parcicular lens from a given posi·
u。n; decermined by che focal lengch of the lens.
Aperture The lens 。pening formed by che iris dia·
ph咱gm insid e che lens 节回 size is variable and
adjusced by the apercure con tr。I.
Aperture control The ring 。n che camera lens
{a push buccon on s。me models) chac, when
turned, adjusts t he size 。f che 。pening 川 che
ins diaphragm and c hanges che amounc of light
cha, reaches che film
Aperture•pri。“ty m。de An aucomat1c exposure
system in which che ph。cographer secs the ap·
erture (f·scop) and the camera seleccs a shuccer
speed for normal exposure
Application See s。fhvare
Archi叫ng c。P归ng a nd storing d igica l files ,n a way
thac proceccs against I。ss
ASA A film speed racing similar to an ISO rat1 ng
Aspect ratio The raci。。f叫dth co heigh, , a mea·
sure 。f che shape of a rec国ngle. A came阻 chat
uses a sen曲,wich 1’h t imes che p ixels measured
h。rizoncally as vertically has a 3:2 aspect 阻cio.
Automatic exp。sure A mode 。f camera opera·
ti。n in which che camera aut。macically adjusts
eicher che apeπure, t he shuccer speed,。r both
for normal exp。sure
Aut omatic Rash An ele口ronic flash unit chat us臼
ics I吵!·sensitive cell o r the came阻’s co deter·
mine the duration of the flash for normal exp。-
sure by measuring the light reflec四d back from
che su同ect.
Available light The hghc chat a lready ex眩目(as
opposed co being a dded by t he photographer)
where a ph。tograph is to be made
Averag ing meter An exp。sure meter with a wid e
angle of view. The 川dicaced exposure is based
on a n ave闯京。fall t he light val ues 川 che scene
B See Bulb.
B缸kup An 四act duplicace 。f a digital fi le or set
。ffiles, made as prote口ion against loss
Bell。ws An acc。,di。作like secti。n inserced be·
tw回n t he lens and che came阳 b。dy. In cl。坦·up
photography, the bellows all。ws cl。ser·than·
normal 自由usin品 resulcing 川 a larger image.
Binarγ number A n um ber consiscing only 。f。ne
。r m。re ls and Os
Bit The smallesc un oc 。f information usable by a
computer,川d,caced by a 1 。r a 0, describing
one oftw。 c。nditi。ns: on or off.
Bit dep由 The number 。f b its used to represent
each pi胆l 川 an image, determining che number
22 2 GLO S SARY
。f possible divisi。ns 。r steps 。f color and cone
betw四n black and 咐,时
Ble ed mount To mount a princ S。 there ,s n。
b。rder between the ed ges of che pnnc and the
edges of the m。uncing surface.
Body The l,ght·c,ghc box t hac contains t he came阳
mechanisms and procects t he sensor or fi lm from
lighc until you are ready to make an呻出ure
s。unce light Indirect light produced by p。,nco ng
che light source a c a ceiling or ocher surface co
refl ecc che hght back toward che subJecc. S。仕er
a nd less harsh chan d irecc hght
Bracke ting Taking several ph。cographs 。f che
same scene a c d ifferent exposure settings, some
grea阻, chan and some less chan the secting indi·
cated by the meter, to ensure at least one well·
exp。sed frame
Built-in meter An exposure meter in t he camera
chac takes a light read ing {usually chrough the
came由 lens) and rela归exposure informacion to
che ele口ronic c。ntrols 川 an automatic camera
or to the phocog阻pher if t he came阻 ,s being
operated manually.
Bulb A shuccer·speed se口ing {marked B) at which
che shuccer stays 。pen as I。ng as che shuccer re-
lease is held d。wn.
Bum in To darken a specific area 。f an image ,n
a darkro。m, by giving ic additi。nal print ing ex·
p。sure Hence t he name 。f Phocosh。p’s Burn
E。。l
Byte A unic 。fdigital data. A n umber represen四d
by 8 b ics. Used co measure s,扭。r capacity 。f
a c。mputer fi le or device See a lso Kil。byte,
Megabyte, Gigabyte
Cable release An encased wire thac accaches at
one end to the shuccer release 。n che came阻
a nd has a pl unger 。n the other end t hat che
ph。tog阻pher depresses to activate the shutter
Used to av。id came阳 m。vemenc or co activate
由e shuccer fr。ma d iscance
Calibrate To adjust a device, for 四ampl e, a c。m·
puter monitor, co match a pred efined standard
Camera Raw O ne 。f several proprietary fi le for·
mats chat preserve a ll che data fr。m a d igital
came阳 piccure 明白 ”。 after-capture incerpreta·
CIOn .
CCD Cha rge-coupled device. One of cw。叩pes
。f lighc•sensing d evices {the 。cher is CMOS)
placed in a grid E。 make the sensor 川 a digital
came阳 Also used in scan ners.
CC filter {for c。l。r C。nversi。n or c。l。r C。rrec·
cion). A E阳nsparent fi lcer placed in front 。f the
came阻’s lens co a lcer che color 。fche lighc, usu·
a ll y to adjust 、vhite balance
Center-weigh ted meter A through-the lens 四po
sure mecer that measures hghc values from the
entire scene but gives greacer emph缸,s to chose 川
che center。f the image area.
。。”·up A larger·cha n-normal image 。bcained
by using a lens closer than norma l to che sub·
jecc
Cl。se.•up lens A lens accached t。 the fronc 。f an
ordinary le ns co allow focus ing at a sh。rcer
distance in order to increase image size.
CMOS Complementary metal 。xide semiconduc·
cor. O ne o f cw。叩pes of l ight·se阳ng devices
(che o ther is CCD) placed in a grid to make the
sens。r in a d ig1tal camera.
CMYK The bas,c sec 。f four col。rs used in most
printing presses a nd deskt。p printers: cya风ma·
genca, yellow, and black. Also t he color mode
usually used in the profe臼山nal graphic am
and print ing i ndusoγThe 。ther c。mm。n c。lor
mode is RGB {red, green, b lue). Files can be
scored and edited in e1ther mode and converted
between chem. See Subtraccive c。lor.
c。lor balance 1 The prop。m。”。f di促renc c。1 .
。陌川 a whice light s。urce 2. A film’s resp。nse
co t he colors in a scene c。l。r fi lms are bal·
anced 岛ruse wich specific lighc S。urces 3. The
repr。ducc i。n 。f colors in a p h otograph. See
Whice balance.
Color management A means of coordi川ac ing the
color 。utpuc 。fvari。us d evices s。 che c。l。rs
you see o n a m。nitor, for example, will be t he
ones chat will appear when you print t he image
Col。r s pace 1. A syscem for defining specific c。1 .
。阳, for example, RGB or CMYK. 2 A predefined
gamuc, for example, sRGB, Adobe RGB (1998),
or ProPh。z。
Color temperature Description of the col。r 。f a
hghc source. Measured in degrees Kelvin (K)
c。mp。site A”’mage ma de from pam 。f队v。。,
m。re othe们mages.
c。mp。und lens A lens made of several e lements
c。mpression A means 。f reducing t h e size of
a digital image fi le in order co red uce st。r·
age requirements 。r cransm1ss1on time across
a necw。rk. “Lossy” cechniques permane ntly
elimina ce some 川for『nacion m 。btain h ighly
compressed, ve叩small fi les L。ssless techniques
compress images 、响chouc losing any informa·
cion in t he fi le. See JPEG.
c。ntrast The di何erence becween che ligh t and
dark pam 。fa scene 。r ph。tograph
c。ntrasty Having greater·th an·n。rmal di仔er·
ences between lighc a nd dark areas. The 。ppo·
site offlat.
Crop To crim che edges of an image,。ften co im·
prove t he c。mp。创汇,。n. Cropping can be d。ne
by moving che came阳 posici。n while vie叫ng a
scene, d uring image ed,cing,。r bycrimm川g the
finished print
Darkr。。m A m。m where a nalog {阳m·based)
phocographs are developed and pri nted.
Dep由。f field The discance be队veen che nearest
and farchest p。,nts chac appear in accepcably
sharp focus 川 a p hotograph Depch of fie ld var·
ies with lens aperture, focal length, and came陆-
[O·SU均e口d眩目nce
。iaphragm {iris diaphragm) The mechanism
controlling che size 。f che lens 。peni ng, there·
fore the am。unt ofl唱ht tha c reaches the sens。r
It consiscs 。f 。verlapping metal leaves inside
che lens chat h ’m a circular opening of variable
sizes. (You can see it as 归u look inco che front
of the lens ) The size of the 。pening is referred
co as theιstop or apeπure
Di仔used light Light t ha t has been sζattered by
re由ecti。”。旷 by passing t hrough a translucent
mat erial. An even,。ften shad。wless, I吵t
o;gital camera A camera tha t rec。rds an image
di rectly in d igital form, i nstead 。f。n c。nven ’
u。nal silver film .
o;gi国I imaging A means by叶,ich a photO!j旧phis
rec。rded as a d,gi国I image that can be read and
mani p ulated by a c。mputer a nd, subsequently,
reformed as a visible image.
o;。pter Uni t 。f measurement that ind icates the
magnifying p。wer of a close-up lens
Direct light Light shining directly 。n t h e sub·
ject and producing stro ng highlights a nd d eep
shad。ws
Directional/di阪,sed light Light cha t is partly do ·
rect and paπly scattered . Softer a nd less harsh
tha n d irect light.
D。dge To lighten a n area 。f a darkro。m-made
print by shading it d u ri ng paπ 。f t h e p rint·
ing exposure. Hence the name o f Phot。shop’s
Do dge to。I.
Dpi D。自 per inch; a meas ure o f the resol uti。n 。f
a p hotomechanical halfo。ne 。r the res。lut i。n
capacity 。f a d igital print er. Frequently (but
川accurately) used for t he final res。lucion of a n
image, actually ppi. See Ppi .
D叩m。unt T。 attach a print to another surface,
usually a heavier mat board , by placing a sheet。f
adhesive dr沪m。unc tissue beiween the print and
the m。unting surface. Generally, chis sandwich
is placed 川 a hea四d mounting press to melt t he
adhesive 川 the t1ssue Some tissues are p陀ssure
sensitive a nd d。 not need to be heated
DSLR 。r 0 -SLR Digit a l single -lens reflex. See
Single-lens re由ex.
Electr。”ic flash (strobe) A camera accesso叩that
provides a brief but p。werful flash ofl协E A bat·
te,γpowered unit requires 。ccasi。nal recharging
o r battery re placement but, unlike a fl ashb ul b,
can be used repeatedly.
Environ mental p。同rait A photograph in whic h
the subject’ s surroundi川gs are impoπant to the
poπ阻,t
Exif Exchangeable image file format Information
about the camera,始时,and 四p。sure that ,s au·
tomatically stored 叫th each fi le by t he came阳
See Metadaca
Exposure 1. The act o f allowing light to strike a
light•senmive s urface. 2. The amount 。f light
reach川S tha t s urface, c。ncrolled by the c。mbi·
nation of aperture a nd shutter speed
Exposure meter (light meter) An 川scrumem chat
measur臼 the amount oflight and provides aper·
ture a nd shutter-speed combinat1。ns for corr出E
创p。sure Exposure meters may be built into t he
came阳M they may be separa四 in日rumen臼
Exp。sure m。de The cype 。fcamera 。peration
(such as manua l, shu tte r-priority, aperture·
pri。ricy) t hat determ川es whic h controls you
set a nd which 。nes t he camera secs automati·
cally. S。me cameras 。perate in only one m。de.
O th ers may be used in a variety 。fm。des
Extension tubes Metal rings attached b etween
the camera lens a nd the b ody to all。w closer·
than-no rmal fo cusing in order to increase the
image size
Fast 1 Describ es a sen sor when ,c ,s set t o a
high ISO 2. Describes a lens that 。pens to a
ve叩wide aperture. 3. Describes a short sh utter
speed The 。pp。site of slow
File A quantity 。f d a ta st。rage on a compu ter.
Each ph。tog阻phis saved as a single file .
File format One 。f several 日andard ways a p ho·
E。graph can b e enc。ded d igitally. Se e JPEG,
TIFF, and Camera Raw
Fill light A light S。urce or reflect。r used E。
lighte n shad。w areas s。 th at contrast is d e·
creased.
Film A roll 。r sheet 。f a flexi ble materia l c。ated
。n one side wit h a I吵t•sensi t ive material and
used in t he ca mera to rec。rd an image
Filter 1. An editing c。mmand t hat p erforms a
specific adjustment to a file, like sharp凹,ng 2.
In an image d at a base, a search E。。l for fin di ng
a specifi c , mage 。r group 。f i mages,也r exam ’
pie, E。 find all pictures ta ken a t f/ 16 .
Fisheye lens An e班reme wide-angle le ns c。ver’
ing a 180° a ngle of view Straight li nes a ppear
curved a t the edge 。f t he p hotograph, and che
image itself may be circular.
Flare Noni mage•forming hght tha t reaches the
image sens。r, resulting in a loss of contrast
Caused by stray light reflecting be队veen the sur·
faces of che lens or 川side t he camera
Flash 1. A sh。π burst 。f『,ght emitted by a n e lec·
tronoc fl ash u nit or strob e to illuminat e the
scene being photographed. 2. The eq ui p ment
used to produce this hght.
Flat Having less-than-normal d,何erences beiween
l吵E a nd da而 areas. The 。pp。site o f cont阻sty.
Focal length The d,scance rrom an incemal pa同。f
a lens (the rear nodal p lane) t o che ,mage plane
when the lens is focused 。n 川自阳ty. The focal
length is usua lly expressed in millimeters (mm)
and determines the a ngle of view (how much of
the scene can be included in t he picture) a nd the
size of。bjec臼 川 the image. A 1 00mm lens, for
四ample, has a narrower a ngle of view a nd mag·
nifies 。同eccs m。re tha n a lens of shorter f,田al
length.
F。cal plane The surface insid e the camera 。n
which che lens 岛rms a sharp image
F。cal-plane shutter A camera mecha nism t hat
admits hght to expose an image by 。pening a
s li t j ust in fr。nt of t he focal pla ne.
F。cus 1. The p。int at whic h the rays 。f light
c。m川Z thro ugh t he len s c。nverge to fo rm
a sharp image. Th e pictureι 气n focus”。r
sh arpest when this poin t c。incides wit h t he
foca l plane 2. To change t h e l ens·to·sens。,
(or lens·to•fi lm) d ista nce (or the camera-to·
subject d旧ance) until the image is sharp
F。cusing ring The band o n t he came阻 lens cha t,
when turned, moves t he lens in rela tion to the
foca l plane,而ocusing the camera for s pecific
distances.
F。cusing screen See Viewing scr四n.
Frame 1. A single exp。sure 。r image. 2. The edges
。fan image.
F-stop (f·number) A numerical designati。n (f/2,
町2.8, e tc } indicating t he size 。f t he a perture
(lens 。pening).
Gamma The 阳目。f brightness change, a measure
。f川sual c。ncrast The lo ne in a g阻phic d isplay
。f t h e tones 。f a n ima ge (like Ph。tosh。p’S
Curves dialog b。x) has a higher gamma 、叶,en 1c
has a steeper slope.
Gamut The range of c。lors t ha t can b e seen or
t hat a particula r d evice can capture 。r re pro·
d uce. For examp le , the ra nge of colors t ha t a
digita l came阻 can record.
Gh。sting 1. A kind 。f flare caused by reflecco。ns
between lens surfaces. It appears as bright spots
the same shape as the apeπure (lens 。pen mg).
2. A c。mbined b lurred a nd sharp image t hat
。ccurs when 何ash is used wit h b right existing
light The flash crea tes a sharp image; t he ex,目-
ing light adds a blurred image if the subject is
moving
Gigabyte Approximately 。ne bill i。n bytes or 。ne
tho usand megabytes (actuall~ 1,073,741 ,824).
A measure 。f computer fi le size 。旷 device stor·
age capacity. Abbreviated G or GB
Glossy Describes a printing paper with a great deal
。fsurface sheen. The 。pp。site 。f matte
Gray card A card t ha t re何ects a kn。wn percent ·
age 。f light falling 。nit. 0白en has a gray side
reflecting 18 percent a nd a whit e side refle ct·
ing 90 percent 。f the light Used E。 take ac·
c urate exp。sure mete r read ings ( meters base
their exp。sures o n a gray ton e 。f 18 p erc ent
re fl ectance). Some gray cards are als。 c。l。p
neutra l, to be used for坦tcing C。lor balance
Guide number A n umber rating for a flas h u nit
t hat can b e used to calculat e t he correct ap
erture for a particular ISO speed and fl ash -to·
SU同ect d istance
Hand-held meter An exp。sure meter chat ,s sepa·
rate from t he camera.
Han d h old To s upport the camera w it h y。ur
ha nds rather t ha n wit h a trip。d or 。ther fi xed
suppoπ
Hard ware The pr,出essor, monitor, printer, and
。ther ph庐ical devices cha t make u p a c。mputer
system. See s。ftware
HOR H唱h Dynamic Range; a n image with a s pa n
。f brightness 咀lu臼 grea四r than t he range chat
c an be captured 川 a single exp。sure. Several
bracke ted exp。sures can be merged into o ne
HOR image.
Highli供 A ve叩 l ight a rea in a scene 。r image.
Als。 called a h吵刨出
Hist。罗志m A g阳ph that shows the distri bution of
tones or c。lo陌 in a digital image
H。t sh。e A clip 。n the top o f the camera that
attaches a fl ash u nit and pr。vides a n electrical
link to synchro阳ze the fl ash with t he camera
shutter, el im川ati ng t he need for a sync c。rd.
Hyperfocal distance The distance to t he nearest
。同e口,n focus when t he lens is focused 。n in·
fin 11y. Setting t he lens t o focus 。n this dista nce
instead 。f on 川finicy will kee p the farthest 。b·
户口S 川 focus as well as extend t he depth 。ffield
四川elude 。均旺臼 closer to the camera
Incid ent-light meter A ha nd-held exposure meter
t hat measures t he amou nt of light falli ng o n t he
SU协口 See also Refle口ed·I吵E me阳e
Infinity Designated oo. The farthest distanc e
marked 。n t he focus ing ring of the le肘, gener·
ally about 50 feet. When the camera is focus ed
。n infi nity, a ll 。同eccs a t tha t distance 。r fa rther
away will be sharp
Infrared Wavelengths of electromagnetic rad oa·
ti。n , like hght b ut slightly longer than th。se in
t he visible sp旺crum. Ph。tog阻phs can be ma de
fr.。m reflect ed infra red radia c,o n with special
equipment 。r film .
Inkjet A d igital p rint er tha t s prays m,crosc。p,c
droplets 。fink 。nto a recept ive surface (see
Media) to create t he appearance 。f a concin u·
OUS·t。ne ph。tograph
G LO SS ARY 223
Interchangeable I凹S A lens that can be removed
from the came阻 and replaced by another lens
lnte币。lation Estima ting th e data between cw。
known points. Used to crea四 a finer grid of pix·
els than what was captured
IPTC l nternati。nal Press Telecommunicat1。ns
c。uncil A form of metadata chat can be added
t。 an image file a白er capt ure
Iris diaphragm See Diaphragm.
ISO A numerical rating that 川dicates t he sensitiv-
町(speed)。f a sensor o r film. 节,e rating dou·
bles each time the sensitivity doubles
JPEG A 叫。ssy” format fo r saving d igital pho·
E。graphs (see File) tha t C。m presses data E。
preserve space in t he c。mputer’s mem。叩. See
c。mpresso。”
Key light See Main light.
Kilobyte Approxi mately 。ne t housand bytes ( ac·
cually 1,024} A measure 。f c。mputer file size
o r device storage capacity. Abbreviated Ko r KB
Latitude The am。unt 。f over· or underexp。sure
p。ssible without a signifi cant change in the
quality 。fche image.
LCD Liquid Crysta l Display. The ki nd of th in, fl at
visual display screen 。丘en used for 。”’camera
m。nitors and data displays, as well as com·
puter m。nitors and televisions.
Leaf shutter A camera mechanism that adm,cs
light to expose fi lm by 。pening a nd shutting a
circle 。foverlapp川g metal leaves
LED See Light-emitti ng diode
Lens O ne 。旷 more pieces 。f。ptical glass used to
gat her a nd f。cus light 阳庐m form an image.
Lens cleaning flu id A liquid made for cleaning
lenses
Lens c。ating A thin, transpa rent coat ing on the
surface 。f the lens that reduces light reflections
L回s element A single p iece of optical glass t ha t
aces as a lens 。r as pare of a lens.
Lens h。。d (lens shade) A shield chat fi臼 around
the lens to prevent unwanted hght from entering
t he lens and causing flare.
Lens tissue A soft, li nt·rree t issue made specifi·
call y for cleaning camera lenses. Not t he same
as eyeglass cleani ng tissue
Light-emitting d iode (LED) A d isplay in the
vie、vfinder。fs。me came阻S cha t gives you infor·
mation ab。ut aperture and shut ter-speed set·
tings or 。ther exposure da臼
Light meter S四 Exposure meter.
L。ng·f.。cal-length lens A lens t ha t provides a
narrow a ngle of view of a scene, includi川Z less
of a scene than a lens 。f normal focal length
and therefore magnifyi ng o bjects in the image
O仕en called telephoto lens.
Luminance A rela tive measure 。f brightness, re·
fleccance,。r value, i ndependent 。f col。旷(hue)
and saturati。n.
Macro lens A lens specifically d缸,gned for close·
up ph。tography and capable 。fgood 。ptical
pe斤。rmance when used very cl。se co a su帐目
Macro·ph。togr在phy Production ofimages 。n che
sens。旷。旷日Im that are life size 。r larger.
Macro·z。。m lens A lens that has close-focusing
capabil i町plus variable focal length
Magnificati。n The size 。f an obj旺E as it appea陌
,n an image Magnification 。f an image taken
by a camera is det ermined by the lens focal
length. A lo ng-focal-length lens makes an 。bjecc
a ppear larger {pr,。叭ides greater magnifi cation)
than a sh。町,focal-length lens
224 GLO SSAR Y
Main light The pri ma叩 source of i l lum 1nat1。n ,
cast ing the d。minant shad。WS. s。meti mes
called key light
Manual exp。sure A nonautomatic mode 。fcam·
era 。peration in which the phot,。grapher secs
b。th the apeπure and the shutter speed
Manual flash A nonautomatic m。de of fl ash op·
eration in which che photographer c。ncrols t he
exposure by adjusting the size of the camera性
lens aperture.
Mat A cardboard rectangle 、响th an 。peni ng cut
in it that is p laced over a print to 骨ame it . Als。
called an 。vermac.
Mat cutter A short kn ife blade (usually replace』
able) set 川 a large, e臼Y E。·h。Id ha ndle Used for
cutting cardb。ard moun臼for prin臼
Matte Describes a printing paper wit h a relatively
d ull, nonrefleccive surface. The 。pposite 。f
~!。ssy.
Media A t。。回归,m for t he vanous papers, inks,
and 。ther materials used in a d唱’tal printer,。r
for the 以毡,i。us cards, tapes, disks, and other
items used for scori ng digital da臼
Megabyte Appro州mately 。ne milli町、 bytes {ac·
cuall y 1,048,576). A measure 。fc。mputer file
size Abbreviated M or MB.
Mem。叩card An in-camera, removable, and reus·
able storage device that rec。rds and saves 1m·
ages captured by the camera u ntil y。U transfer
the fi les to a c。mputer 。r 。cher sco阻ge device
and erase (reformat) it.
Menu A l ist 。f choices, like c。mmands or a吗USC•
mencs, th缸 ,s dis played by an application or
operati ng s归回m 。n a c。mputer screen
Metadata I nformau。n ab。ut informatl。n In
digital ph。tog,阳phy, the camer毡, exp。sure, and
subject data scored in the image fi le
Meter 1 See Exp。sure meter. 2. To take a light
read mg 、vith an exp。sure mecer
Middle gray A standard, a明白ge g阳Y cone 。f18
percent reflectance. See Gray card
Midtone An area 。f medium brightness, neither
ave叩dark shadow n。r ave叩bright highlight
Mirror A pohshed, metall ic reflector set inside a n
SLR camera body at a 45。 angle to the lens E。
reflect t he image up o nto the foc using screen
When a picture is taken, the m川or moves 。Ut
。fth们咀y so t hat light can reach the sensor.
Negative 1 An image with col。rs 。r dark a nd light
tones that are the 。pp。site 。f those in the 。而gi ·
nal scene. 2 Film that was四p。sed 川 the came阻
and processed to form a nega即e image
Neutral-density fi lter A p iece of dark glass or
plastic placed in front of the came阳 lens to de-
crease che i ntensity 。f light entering t he lens. It
affec自由p。sure b ut not color.
N。is• Pixels 。f阳nd。mc。lors and brightnesses,
mosco仕en appearing 川 che dark areas 。fadigi ·
ta l image.
N。rmal品cal-length lens (standard lens) A lens
that pro呐ides ab。ut the same angle 。f帆ew 。fa
scene as the human eye
Open up T。川crease the size 。fche lens a perture
The 。pposite 。fstopdown.
Operating system 。r Disk Operating System
(DOS). Management so仕ware, usually supplied
with the computer, t hat stares when you b。。E
up {turn 。n t he power to) the c。mpu四r and
perfi。rms such 。peraci。ns as reading from and
w时cing to hard drives, and 。pening and manag·
川g applicati。n s。fcware. Comm。n 。perating
systems are Mac OS X, Wind。ws 8, and Unix.
Opti目I storage A daca storage mediur啊, such as
a CD, DVD, or BD, t hat uses light (usually a la·
ser) to read and 州白,nformacion
Overexp。se T。 make an 四p。sure with too much
light , making a p icture that is t oo hght
Ovem咀E See Mat
Palette A data b。X that appea陌 on a compute♂s
m。nit。r Palettes d isplayed by i mage-ed山ng
s。仕ware o何er tool 。ptions, provide informa •
ti。n, and so o n
Pan To move the camera during the exposure ,n
the same dorecci。n as a m。vi ng sub』ect. The ef.二
位口,S that the subject stays relatively sharp a nd
the background bec。mes blurγed.
Parallax The d iffere nce in point of view that oc·
curs when the le ns (。r other device) th ro ugh
which the eye vi缸吗 a scene is separate from the
lens that exp出自由e film
Pentaprism A five-sided 。ptical device used 川
t he eye-level viewfinder of a single-lens-reflex
camera to correct t he image from the focusing
screen 回 chat it appears right side up a nd cor·
rect le阮E。而ght.
Perspective The optical i ll usi。n in a two d imen·
SI。nal i mage 。f a three』dimensional space sug·
gesced primarily by c。nverg川g lines and the
decrease in size of。同ects 也rcher from the cam·
era.
Ph。”flood A tungsten lamp designed especially
for use in ph。tographic stu dios. It emits hght a t
3400 K color tempe阳cure
Ph。to-micrography Phot。graphing t hro ugh a
microscope.
Ph。tom。ntag• A c。mp。Site image made by as·
sembling pares of t wo or more ph。tographs
Pini、。le A small clear sp。t on a negative usually
caused by dust 。n the fi lm duri ng exp。sure or
development.
Pixel Sh。町 for picture e lement The smallest u nit ,
usually square,。f a d 1g1tal image t hat can be
dosplayed 。旷 changed.
Plane 。f critical focus The pare of a scene that 陆
most sharply focused.
Plug-in An add·。n s。白白,are m。dule for a pro·
gram 。r appl icati。n t hat extends its capab ih·
t ies. Some applications (such as Photoshop)
are made s。 that 由ird·阳rry developers can pro·
duce and market plug-ins.
Polarizing screen {p。larizing filter) A fil ter placed
in front 。f the camera lens to reduce reflecti。ns
h。m n。nmetallic surfaces like gla且 orw.田er,。r
to darken t he sky.
p。sitive An image wit h col。rs o r light and dark
tones that are similar to t hose in the original
scene. See Negative
Ppi Pixels per inch, a measure of the res。luti。n of
an image that has a ph庐ical size, like 。ne t hat
has been printed or is displa阳d 。n a monitor.
Prima叩 c。lors A set 。f basic colors t ha t can be
mixed to match any ocher c。lor.
Print 1. A tw。 dimensional image, usually 。n an
opaque surface like paper, made fro m a cap·
tured, scanned, or drawn image fi le 2. T,。 pro·
duce such a n image.
Pr。fi le The data for a digital device, such as a
printer or monitor, that describ臼 its gamut,。旷
range 。fc。lors. Used to match the gamut from
one device t o an。ther. See c。lor management ,
Gamut
Programmed aut。matic A mode 。f aut。matic
exp。sure in which t he camera se臼 b。th t h e
shutter speed a nd the aperture for a n。rma l
exp。sure
胁。。f A test .print made for the pu币。se of evalu·
ating dens,cy, c。ncrast, c。lor balance, subject
c。mposition, and the like.
Quartz lamp An incandescent lamp chat has h咀h
intensity, small size, I。ng life, and c。nscanc
c。lor temperature
Raw fi le A digita l camera file 。r scan chat con·
tains p ic tu re information exactly as 旺 ,s ac·
quired. Most raw file formats used in cameras
are proprieta叩, or specifi c to t he came目 manu’
facturer, and must be int erpreted before edit·
川g See Came阻 Raw.
Reflected-light meter An exposure meter (hand
held or built into the camera) t hat reads the
amount of light reflected fr。m the subject. See
al四 Incident-light meter.
Reflect。r Any s urface-a ceiling, a card, an um·
brella, for exampl• used to bounce light 。nto
a SU同ecc.
Reflex camera A camera with a b uilt-in mirror
that reflects the scene being photog,闯phed 。nto
a gr。und·glass viewing screen. See Single-lens
reflex
Resampling Changing a file E。 create the same
image w1th more or fewe r pixels to achieve a dif·
fe renc resol ut1on . Called u psampli ng for m。re
pixels, downsampling for 告wer.
Resin-c。ated paper Printing paper 、呐th a water·
resistant coating t hat a bsorbs less moisture
than a fiber-base paper. Abbrevia四d RC paper
R<>s。luti。” 1. T he total n umber 。f pixel s 川 a
camera sens。r, for example, a 2000 x 3000
pixel grid has a resoluti。n 。f 6 megapixels.
2. The number 。f pixels per u nit length, gener·
ally a measure 。f maximum image quality. See
Ppi.
Ret。uch To rem。ve small imperfe口i。ns in an im·
age caused by d ust specks or fla、吗 in t he pro·
cess. 剧姐, to re move perceived imper也ccions or
fta、吗川the SU同ecc.
RGB A c。lor mode chat uses the additive pro ma叩
colors (red, green, and b lue) to match any ot her
c。lor. See CMYK
Scanner A device chat 。ptically reads a c。oven’
ti。nal negati ve, slide,。r print , converting it to
digital form for u辑用digital imaging.
Sharp Describes a n i mage 。r paπ 。f an image
that shows crisp, precise 回回ure and detail. The
。pposite 。f blurred 。r so阮
Sharp凹ing A software manipulation 。fan ,mage
that increases contrast in areas 。f cone cransi·
n。n and creat自 由e V1sual sensation of a mo陀
sharply focused image
Sh。e A clip 。n a camera for attaching a flash
unit. See als。 Hot shoe.
Shoπ.f,。cal-length lens (wide-angle lens) A lens
that pr,。呐des a wide angle·。f.响ew 。f a scene,
includingm。,e of the subject a rea than a lens 。f
n。rmal focal length
Shutter A device in the came甩 出目 。pens and
closes E。由pose t he sensor or fi lm to light for a
measured length of ti me
Shutter-pri。rity mode An automac,c exp。sure
system 川which the ph。tographer sets the shut·
ter s peed and the 臼mera selects the aperture (ι
目。p) for normal exposure.
Shutter release The mechanism, usuall y a but ·
ton on t he top of the came由a that acti咀tes the
shutter to exp。se the sens。旷。r film.
Shutter-speed control The camera control that
selects the length 。f time t he sensor 。旷日Im is
exposed to light
Sid ecar file A file with the same name as a
Camera Raw file (but having t h e excensi。n
.xmp} that c。ncains added metadata Created
by programs that cann。E write new 川岛,mation
to a proprieta叩阳wfile
Silhouette A dark shape with l i ttle 。r n。 detail ap·
pearing against a light background.
Single-lens re fl ex (SLR) A type of camera 叫th one
lens that is used b。由岛r 川ewing an d for caking
the picture A mirr,。r inside the camera re由ects the
image up 川to the viewfinder. When the picru陀 is
t aken, this mirror mov目。ut of the w町, allo叫ng
the light entering the lens to era咽I directly to the
臼nsor or 币Im.
Slide A transparency made 川 the size 。f35mm
film . See Transparency
Slow See Fast
SLR See Single-lens reflex.
s。ft 1 Describes an image that is blurred 。r 。Ut
。f focus. The 。pp。site 。f sharp. 2. Describes a
sζene or print oflow c。nt阳St . The 。pposite 。f
hard o r high cone阻St.
s。食ware Ac。mputer prog阻m designed to per·
form a specific purp。se or ca沫, for example,
image editing o r w。,d processing (applicati。n
software) or an 。pe阻ting可seem.
S pectrum T he range of radiant energy fr。m ex·
cremely short wavelengths z。 e班,emely long
。nes The visible spectrum includes only the
wavelengths to which t he human 町e is sensitive
Speed 1 The relat ive abili ty 。fa lens to transmit
light . Measured by t he largest aperture at 、叶,ich
the lens can be used. A fast lens has a larger
maximum aperture and can tra nsmit more light
than a slow one 2 T he relative sensitivity to
l吵t 。fa sensor o r fi lm. See ISO.
Sp。t meter An exposu re meter with a narrow
angle of view, used t。 measure the am。u nt 。f
light from a smal I p。πion 。f t he scene being
ph。cog阻phed.
Stop 1. An apeπure setting tha t indicates the
size 。f the lens 。pening 2. A change in expo·
sure by a factor 。f 2. Changing t he apeπure
from one setting to the ne目 doubles 。r halves
the amoun t of light reaching the sens。r 。,
fil m . Changing t he shutter speed from 。ne
setting to the next does the same th ing. Either
c ha nges the exposure one stop
Stop d。wn To decrease the size 。f the lens aper·
cure. The 。pp。site of。pen up
Ser。be See Eleccr。nic flash .
Substituti。n reading An exposure meter readi ng
taken from s。methi ng other than the subject,
such as a gray card or the ph。tog阻pher’s hand.
Subtractive c。l。r A set 。f primary colors (cyan,
magenta, and yellow) that can be mixed as pig·
ments to ma tch any 。ther color The CMYK
c。lor mode adds black ( K} t o c。mpensate for
imperfecti。ns in manufacturing the 。ther three
c。I ors S四Additivec。lor.
Sync (。r synchr。nizati。”) cord A wire that
li nks a flash unit t。 a camera’ s shu tter-release
mechanism
Synchronize To cause a flash u nit to 自由、vhi le t he
came阻 shut回r is 。pen.
Tacking iron A small, electrically heated to。l used
to melt t he adhesive in d叩·m。unc t issue, a t ·
t aching it partially E。 the back 。f the pnnc and
to t he mounting surface. T his keeps the print in
place during t he mounting procedure.
Teleph。to effect A c ha nge 1n perspective caused
by using a long-focal-lengt h lens ve叩 far fro m
all parts of a scene. O bjects appear cl。ser co·
gether t han they really are
Telephoto lens See Long·f.田al-length lens
Terabyte Approximately 。ne t rillion bytes ( actu·
ally 1,099,5 11 ,627,776). Appr。ximately one
thousand Gigabytes. A measure 。f computer
file s,ze o r device st。rage capacity Abbrevia ted
T。r TB.
Through·由e.• lens meter (TTL meter) An expo·
sure me阳built into the came陆 that takes l吵z
readi ngs thr。ugh the lens
T IFF An open·s。urce ( not pr。prieta叩) format
f。r 且ving digital photographs (see File format)
that is readable by m。st graphic s。仕ware run·
ning on most computers.
Transpar凹cy (slide) A p。sitive ,mage 。n clear
fi lm viewed by pass川Z light through from be·
hind wit h a projector or 『,ght b。x
T巾。d A t hree-legged support for the came阳
丁TL Abbreviation for t h rough the lens, as 1n
through-t he-lens viewing or metering.
Umbrella reflector An appa由tus c。nscructed like
a paras。l 制th a refle ctive surface o n the inside
Used E。 bounce d iffused light 。nco a subje口
Underexp。” To make an exp。sure w1th too little
light, making a picture th缸 ,sm。 dark.
V,ew camera A camera in which the taking lens
forms an image directly 。n a gro und-glass view-
ing screen. A film holder or d igital adapter is
inserted in front 。f t he viι呐ng screen before
exp。sure The front a nd back of the camera can
be set a t vari。us angles to change the plane of
f。cus and the pe陌pective
V帽wfinder eyepiece An 。peni ng in t he camera
through which the photographer can see the
sζene to be photographed.
Viewing scree” T he surface on which the image
川 the camera appears for viewing T his image
appears upside d。wn and reversed left to right
un less the camera c。ntains a pencaprism to
correct it
Vignette To s hade the edges 。f a n image s。 they
are underexp。sed A lens ho。d t hat is to。 long
for t he lens will cut into t he angle 。f view and
cause 响gneccing.
Visib le spectrum See Speccrum
W hite balance 1. The c。lor balance of a wh1te
light source. 2. A setti ng 。r adjustment 。n a
camera or in an image editor that adjusts the
overall image colors for the light sou rce in
which it was captured
W ide-angle dist。而。” An unusual p erspecti ve
caused by using a wide-angle (sh。π-focal·
length) lens 四叩close to a su均ecr. O均配臼 ap·
pear stretched o ut or farthe r apaπ than they
rea ll y are.
Wide-angle lens See Shoπ-focal-length lens
w。由日。w A re pea t able series 。f steps leadi ng to
a desired result or product. A digital p hotogra·
phy w。rkfl。w includes, a t mi nimum, t he steps
between image capture and o utput
z。”“cusing Presetting the focus to ph。to·
graph acti。n so tha t t he entire area on whid、 the
action may take place w,11 be sharp
z。。m lens A 『ens 、叭th several moving elements
that can be used to produce a continu。us 阳nge
of focal lengths.
G LO SSARY 225
BibliQg!:_α~lyy_
A vast n u mber of books on pho吨raphy are avail•
able, whecl,er )'咽ur interest is in ,rs techn iq ue or its
histOI’)'飞 its use for aπ。r for commerce Look for
t hem online, or in your local librarγ, booksto町,or
camer在score
If you want a broader selection of books th四you
can 日,叫 Jo臼Uy, C巧, Phoco E)'飞376 Garcia St reet,
Sama Fe, NM 87501 (505-988-5 152). This ph oto•
only bookstore has an immense selection of new
and used photo books sold by mail and through
its onhne booksto陀,photoeye.com. O ther online
ph otobook specialis臼are vincent如何它Iii.com 四d
血sh,uoodbooks.cm”
Lighclmpre据,ons, 2340 Brigh ron Henrietta Town
Line R时, Rochescer,附 14623 (800-975响29) is
an excellent sou rce of photographic storage, pres•
ervation,剧、d display ma四rials. Catalogs are free
You臼n buy onhne or requ出E a printed caralogat
lighrimpressionsdi时ct.com
Technical Reference s
Ang, Tom. Digital Photograp.加亏H刷品ook. 6th ed
New York: DK Publishing, 2016.
Ashe, Tom pα•/or Ma,wgement & Q.嗣lity 011tp11t:
Working iuith Color卢棚Camera to Displdy阳h切t
Boston, MA: Focal Press, 2014.
Evening, Marr川 TJ,e Adobe Pho阳•shop Lig,加。om CC/
h护troom6阳k Berkeley, CA: Adobe Pre白,2015. A
complete gu ide to che Adobe workflow application
-.A血he Pho.阳hop CC for Pho问fTaphers: 2016
Edition. Boston, MA: F配al Press, 20 16.
Faulkner, Andrew and Conrad C havez. Adobe
P阳阳sh-Op CCC阳sroom in a Book. Berkeley, CA:
Adobe Press, 20 17 Includes acc出s co che interactive
Web edition A good way to learn the b四cs ofche
mostpopul盯 image吃dicing sofrware
Hirsch , RobeπL也,,,,and Lens: Pho问?T•P·纱巾脚
D做阳l Age. 2nd ed Boston, MA: Focal Press, 2012.
Profusel)’’ ,illustrated, deεa’iled compend
c出ses 削d tech、mqu臼
Jones, Lou, Bob Keenan, and Steve Osrrowsk,
Speed/ii妙ts&Sp时•d/i.阳C附,arive Flash P加E结raphyas
Lightspeed. 2nd ed. Boston, MA: Focal Press, 2013.
Use small,川剧pensive, por四ble fl剖h units to
ach ieve professional results
Koh时, Kenned、 Phorojour,w/ism: 71加Pr~卢ssionals’
App,旧ch. 7th ed Boston, MA· Focal Press, 20 16
Complete coverage of equi.pmen飞 techniques, 阳、d
approach四used by p hocoJournahsts
Krogh, Peter. The DAM Book: Digi,阳/ Asset
Man鸣ementfor Pho问?T•P·加五 2nd ed. Cambridge:
0’R白lly Media, 2009. H。wtoorg剧、ize, keep, ar-
ch,咽, and find digital photographs
London, Barba阻,John Upton,Jrn、 Stone
P阳tograpl岁 1 2th ed. Hoboken, NJ: P国rson
Education, 20 16. Complete infom,anon about
both fi lm•b.臼ed and digital p ho tography, widely
used as a cexr Ve巧’ comprehensive
226 B I B LIOG R A P ”Y
Long, Ben. Complete D也italP阳•tograpl岁 8th ed.
lndependence, KY· Cou rse Technology, 20 14.
Excensive rnfom,anon, clearly 啊,rten
“-呻, Gettings,阳rted iuith Camera Raw: Hoiu阳Make
Better阿α11res UsingP加&OS,加,pandPho阳•shop Elements.
2nd ed. Berkeley: Peachpit Pre盟,2009.
McKenz吨JO)'刊nd D阻,el Overturf. Artifi,巾i
Lightingfor阶otograpl,y. Clifro n Park,阳· Delmar
Cengage Learning, 2009. Clear四pl削anon ofhght•
ing techniqu臼w1th visual examples
S副cha, Erni. Cap阳时One Pro JO. Mastering Raw
Development, Image h白白ssing, and Asset Ma,wll归”ent.
S甜 Rafael , CA: Rocky Nook, 2017. A complete
guide co the Ph甜e One workflow appl i,臼口。n
R时,呵, Andrew. α/orMa旧rgement如P加啼·aphm:
Hands on Teclmiques如P加&OS,加,p Users. Boston, MA:
Focal Press, 2005.
Russot口, Patricia, and Rich ard Anderson. D总归I
Pho吨’·ap.抄Best Practices and Worliflow Handbook.
Bosto n , MA: Fo臼I Pre妇, 2009
Wilhelm, Henry. The Permanence andα附ofα,for
Pho吨rap.加· 1子-adit阳,w/andD,饭’dα•lorP,切龟α,for
Negatives, Slid,旺, and Motion 阿·ctt1res. A comprehensive
conse阿ation guide. The entire book may be down-
loaded free a t wilhelnwesearch.com/ book_toc html
Business Practices
Ameri臼n Sociel)•,。fMedia Photographers. ASMP
h电fessio,wl Business Practices in Pho吨rap.抄 7thed
New York Allworrl、 Pre蹈,2008
Bostic,Ma巧’ Burzlaff. 2018 P加tographe内Ma呻et:
Hoiu and \Vhere to Sell Yo”r P加tography. 41 st ed New
York: Noπh Ligh t Books, 20 17.
Crawford, Tad. Business and l.Rgal Forms户r
Pho问fTaphers 4th ed. New York· Allw咱πh Press,
2009
Du Bo仔, Leonard D. The Latu (in Plain English)户T
Pho吨fTaphers 3rd ed. New York· Allwoπh Press,
2010
Himes, Darius D., and Mary Virg川,a Swanson
Publish Your P阳tograpl岁Book. Revised, updated ed
New York Princeton Architectural Press, 20 14.
Kieffer.John. TJ,e Photograpl,e的Assistant: Learn t加
Inside Sec,咄ofPr~卢ssional P加E锣-aphy and Get Paid
j』r It. New York: Allworcl、 Press, 200 1.
Oberrech t, Kenn. How to S阳rta Home-Bared
Pho咐•p.抄B,.,;时ss. 6th ed. Old Sa·卢刚k,CT:
Globe P叫uot Press, 2010.
Swanson, Ma叩Virginia. Finding Yo”r A11dience: An
I’”’叫11ction to Ma呻四”,gYo11rPho问fTaphs m四wan•
son com· Selιpublished, 20 17. How to market
yourself挝a photographer in che Internet age
Essays, Collections, and Hist。对自
Adams, Robert. Beauty in P加鸣’·aphy: Essays in
D~卢nseofTradirional Values. New York: Apertu时,
2005. New edition of 1981 edition
Barrete, Ter巧’ 。听ricizing P加•tographs: An Introd11ction
阳Unde向阳ndinglmages. 5th ed. New York- McGraw-
Hill, 20 11. Widely used as a text to help develop
四chniqu臼 for discu臼rng photographs.
Barches, Roland. Camera Lllcida. New York· Hill and
咀:lang, Reprint edition, 2010
Benson, Richard The h切,·edPi,αure. New York:
Museum of Modern Ar飞2008 Eloquent d臼crip•
t ions of che way m四川ng ,s affected by printing
technologies
Berger,John. \flays of Seeing. New York: Pengu in
Modern C lassics, Reprint, 2009
Burgin, Victor. TJ,inking Photograpl岁 London
Macmillan, 1982 and 1990
Colem拙,A D. T11eD也ital Evolution: Pl,ot,伊,phyin
the Elem恻ic Age. Portland, OR: Nazraeli, 1998
Corton, Chari。rce 1加Pho问fTaphasc。”的'II户>rary
Art. 3rd ed. New York: Tham自由 Hudson, 2014
Frizoc, Michael, ed. A Neiu Hi.刷•ryof p阳锣’ttp妙
Koln, Gem,a呵’ Konemann, 1999 M拙s,ve,
bea‘Jt’ifully pr,叫uced, th、。r。ugh,a’、d rεlat’飞•e
‘e m四pens,v,
Grundberg, Andy. C时is of the Real: \Vrirings on
Photograpl,y Since 1974. 2nd ed. New York: Apeπu时,
R白ssue 2010. Readable, stimulating e坦ayson con•
temporary a臼U臼川 photog阳phy
Gustavson, Todd 臼,,,era: A History of Pho咐·apl,y
J>:om Dag11en吨严阳盹’ital New York: Sterli川g
Signatu陀,20 1 2 From theCuratorofTechnology
at the George Eastman House
H白ferman, Marvin, ed. Photography a,anges
Eve吵thing. New York- Apeπure, 2012.
Hirsch , RobertJ. Seizingt.加L也’111: A Social & Aesthetic
History of P加E喀raphy. 3rd ed. Boston, MA: Focal
Press, 20 17. Thorough (608 pag臼,) and conrempo•
m巧’survey of the medium’s histo叩
Moms, Errol Believing is Seeing: Observations on 阶e
Mysteries of Photograpl,y. New York: Pengu in Press,
20 11 Es且.ys on t he nature of truth 川 photography.
Papageorge, Tod. Co时Cs1rricul1m,: Writings on
Photograp炒 New York: Aperru时, 2011
Rosenblum, Naomi. A World History of Phot<>;罗·ap.抄
4th ed New York: Abbeville, 2008. Comprehe时,ve
and profusely illustrated.
Shore, Stephen. The Na阳附ofPhotographs: A阳mer.
2nd ed. London· Phaidon Press, 20 IO.
So川ag, Susan. On P加均~aphy. New York Farrar,
Straus 胡d Giroux, 1977
S回rkowski,John. TJ,e Pho问?T•PI肝3号’e New York
Museum of Modern Ar飞2007 Landmark 四川b,-
t ion catalog with 出says from the mediu m’s mosc
mfluennal curator
Wells , Liz. Phot<>;罗·ap.抄ACritic.ti Int时,,ction. 5 th ed
New York: Routledge, 20 15
Print and Online Magazin臼
Amt Bad Mat,叩吨P.O. Box S444, Savannah, GA
3 14 12 Since 2011, producing monrhly o nhne
poπfolios, an i rregular prmc maga2ine,四d mono•
graphic books. (ai11t·bad.com)
American P加叫 2 Park A田, New York, NY 10016.
Onl i川、e o nly Phorography in all forms , in cluding che
fashionable and che f:注m。因 (ameri臼np.加阳”agcom)
A户,τ'"飞 20 Ease 23rd Srreec, New York, NY 1001 1
A super也ly primed mag拙med国hng wich ph ocog•
raphy as an art 岛m、 Pubhshed ac irregular 川回p
vals. (a阳切,时’扮
Black & \Vhite, PO Box 1529, Ro蹈,CA 94957.
Bimon chly princ mag血’M chacmdud臼 porrfohos
and comescs (bandtum司g.rom)
Digital Pho阳,Madavor Media, Madavor Medi且, 25
Brame陀e Hill Office Park, Smee 404, Braincree, MA
02 184. Onhne胡d quaπerl)•’ pr川、c magazine ” for
passionace phocographers.” (dpmag,rm吵
一… Digi归I Photo Pro. In cludes busmes川e隅, ar•
rid白,and ocher con阳、c a,med ar professional ph o-
吨raphers. (digitalpbotopro.r,刷}
Fraction Magazine, publishes monch马’ porrfol i,的朋d
book reviews online,剧、d prm臼books, all by livmg
ph。cographers worldwide. 伊-actionmagavne.rom)
Lens\Vor.鸟 1 004 Commercial , Anacorces, WA 9822 1
High•qualicy, b imon chly b lack-a,,d -wlme prim and
online publi臼non abouc p horographs, n oc cam•
eras, wich asricles and inrer”iews (/enswork.rom)
Pbo阳DistrictNe叫, 770 Broad机也.y, New York, NY
10003 D,rec四d m明rd profes臼onals in p horogra•
p hy. (pdnonli时rom)
– . pdn e巾,.,, online and prim periodical for sm•
denr phocographers; che primed maga2me is d,smb·
med directly co schools. (你·italmag.pdned,..com)
Pbotograpbe的Fomm, 813 Reddick Srreec, S刮目
Basbasa, CA 93 103 Geared cowasd smden臼and
choses田king phocographic 臼reers. (pfmagav,时阳吵
ThePbo阳Review, 340 Ease Maple Avenue, Suice
200, Langhorne, PA 19047. Fine-aπph。rography
四hibinon四d book revie明wirh porrfohos, on line
@加阳刚时咱
Pop11Jarf响。tograp.伽 2 Park Ave., New York, NY
100 16 Online mag缸”、e for hobbyiscs 由ac mixes
informacion abouc equipmenc飞呐rh porrfohos a,, d
h ow-co articles. (popp.加阳com)
Professional Pbo何时p阳, 229 Peachtree Sr NE, Suice
2200, lncernaci。nal Tower, Aclanca, GA 30303
Monchly prim and o nhne mag四ine for commercial
a,,d induscrial ph。rographers. (ppm,ig.r。”。
Rant,φ时间 P.O. Box 360 1 Northbrook, IL 60065.
For professionals in che 日eldsofw,时dmgand
poπr臼E ph ocography Prine magazine free co US ad•
dresses. (阳nt,φ阳如ronline.com)
Shutt,凹ψu』L TEN, 83 1 S. Douglas Sc, El Segundo, CA
90245 Monch ly prmr magazine, moscly produces
reviews and how-co articles. (班时时rbt嘻com)
Ph。togr在phic 。rganizari。”s
Mose of ch ese non pro自Em白nbership orga,uza•
口。ns publish magazin臼臼,d news)盯rers and have
mformac附Web sices If you hve near o肘,you may
also wish co join for rheir sponso时d轨。rkshops,
lecrures,。r exhibicions
Ame,咀an Sociecy of Media Phorograph ers, 150
Noπh Second Screec, Philadelphia, PA 19106
Pubhsl、自ASMPB11l』elin, a guide for che 轨咽rkmg
professional (d町ribuced only ro ASMP members
(asmp.org)
Cencer for Phocography ac Woodscock, 59 Ti川、k时
Sere凹,Woodscock, NY I 2498. Publishes P/10鸣阳p抄
Q11arterly, cur阿ncly on hiams. 在p阻。,x)
CENTER, P.O. Box 2483, Sama Fe, NM 87504.
Orgamzes poπfoli萨阿v,ew evencs (Revieu, San阳
Fe) an d sponsors j u ried awasds for phocographers.
( visitcenter.mx)
CEPAGallerγ, 6 17M副n Screec, Buffalo, NY 14202
Exhi binons, lecmres,and an arcisc project progmn
(cepagallery.mx)
George Eascman Museu m, 900 Ease Avenue,
Roch escer, NY 14607. A museum of phocc啄raphy
and臼m盯as, as well 臼rhe rescored ma,,sion and
gardens of Kodak’s fo山、der. 民1bhshes a newslecrer
and occ缸,onal exh ibicion cacalogs. (eastm刷刷x)
Houscon Cen四r for Phocography, 1441 Wes,
Alabama, Housron , TX 77006 Publis hes Spot maga•
zme, cwice a year (brponline.o’x)
The Lighc Facco巧’, 18 I 7 Cencral Avenue,Su,ce
C200, Chaslocce, NC 28205. A museum of phocog•
raphy an d fil m, offers d剧目。但l收回吻。,x)
Lighc Work, 316 Waverly Aven ue, Syracuse, NY
13244 A communicy咱自由s lab, several galleries,
and 由、 amsc’s residency program, pubhsh四Contaa
Sheet and exhibit ion ca,划。gs. (/.也•htu,ork.mx)
Nacional Press Ph orograph ers Associa口。n, 120
Hooper Screec, Achens, GA 30602 An org臼uzacion
of working and scudenc p horojournahscs; publishes
che monthly N阳胁。问grapher. (nppa.o’x)
Phorog阳phic Resource Cencer, 4 I lA High land
Ave. #3 17, Some"'吨lle, MA02 144 A g刻lei)’, library,
lecrure series, and porcfoho reviews. Pubhshes Lottpe
occ拙。nal马’ (btt.e血,;pre)
Sa,, Francisco Camera work, 10 1 I M盯kec Screec,
Sa,, Francisco, CA 94 I 03. Publishesα,•1U>ratvor,ιA
Jo,mwl of P/10问graphic Arts. 饷merawork.org)
S0C1et) ‘’ for Phocographic Educacion, 2530 Superior
Avenue, #403, Cleveland, OH 44 114 An organiza•
cio n cenrered around ch e c国ct, ing and practice
。f phocography臼a 白ne art Pubhshes Expo,,.γc
(spenationaimx)
Visual Smdies Workshop, 3 1 Prmce Screec,
Roches四r, NY 14607. lnco币。races a degree-gram•
mg school wich workshops, gall呵, and a rtist’s
book s rudio. Publi
Spa曲 constrains 由is list of organizacion s and
periodicals ro chose 川 rhe United S臼ces. Many
ocher councries have organizations and publica•
cions devo四d co phocography, which can be fo und
onhne, chrough a pubhc libra巧飞。r by con cacring
che nonprofics lisced h ere
。”line Video Tutorials and M。”
阳adobe.com Adobe Web sice wich free rucorials for
each of cheir apphcacions
phaseone.com Follow Produccs>Sofrware co fi nd a
link co Capmre O ne Pro mcorials
dpreview com T escs and r缸’,ews of dig,cal 臼mer缸,
lenses, primers, and software, plus forums , ph。m
sharing, and conr白白
j阳且com Adobe Phocoshop “E咀ngelisc” J uhea,,ne
Kosc provid四 free h incs and rucorials on Phocoshop
and Lighcroom
1.>’nd.a com Software crainmg me, some conrenc ,s
fr时,some by subscription
pho阳netOnhne p时Mo-peer foru ms, ph oco shar•
ing, and criuqu臼
strobist. com All abou c location lighcing wich porca•
ble equipmenc, wich cips 岛r inexpensive solutions
visitcen配时’宫See enc叩under Phocographic
Organizacions, le阮; rheir Web S1Ce has a Resour四s
page wich links ro ocher useful sic出
BIBLIOGRAPHY 227
Photo Credits
p ii Teun Hocks, C。uπesy 。f the artist and T。rch Galle叩a Amsterdam, NL; p 2 Annie
Leib。vitz/C。n臼ctPress Images, pp. 9 (bottom right), 73, 159 (b。ttom}©RKM Archrve; p 10
0。p) Panas。nic Corp。ration 。fNoπh America; p . 10 (bott。m le丘) Pentax Imaging c。mpany;
pp. 10 (right}, 11 (right), 12 (b。口。m right ), 59 (top right), 62 (top right), 84 (bottom)
c。urresyofMACGroup; p. 12 (top) FUJ IFILM Noπh America c。币。由口。风 2017; p . 12 (cen·
ter) C。urtesy 。f Panasonic N。而h America; p 13 (top) Used bypermiss,on 。fSony Ele口ronics
Inc. All R咀h臼 Reserved; pp. 14 (bottom), 85 (b。ttom left), 146 C。urresy of Nikon Inc.,
Melvi lle, NewY,。rk; pp. 14 (top), 112 (top) C。urtesy of Can。nυSA; p . 21 (top)Josef
Koudelka, Magnum Photos; p. 21 (bottom) C。urtesy of Na。ya Hatakeyama and Taka lsh”
Gallery, T。ky。; p. 24J。el Sternfeld, c。urresy。fthe artist and Luhring Augustine, New y。rk;
p 30 Geoffrey Robi川son/剧amySt。ck Ph。to; pp. 33, 118 Courtesy xRez Srudi。s, Inc.; p 35
Henri Carrier-Bresson, Magnum Ph。tos; p 36 Ed Jones/ Cercy I mag臼; p. 37 Andreas Feminger/
Geery Images; p 38 © David Levenci/C。urresy Rick Wester Fine Arc; p. 4 1 (b。ttom) Donald
Mi阻lie/Getty Images; p. 46 Christoph Oberschneide旷AlamyScock Photo; p. 47 (t。p) Nati。nal
Archives and Rec。rds Adm川i日raci。”, Rec。rds of the Nati。nal Park Service; p 52 Javier
Manzan。,fAFP/Get叩Images; p. 53 Reprod uced wit h permissi。n 。fthe Minor White Arch,咽,
Pnncec。n Universicy AπMuseum. © Trustees of Princecon Un rversi ty, p 59 Gue。rgui
Pinkhass。v, Magnum Photos; p . 65 Library 。fC。ngress LC-D1G-fsa·8d2490 1; p. 7 1 C。urtesy of
the Liebling Family Trust ; pp 86, 89 (top), 116 C。u阿esy。fEps。n America, Inc., p . 89 ( bottom
righ。 Hasselblad Bron , Inc.; p. 112 (b。ttom} Libra叩。fC。ngress LC-DIG-cwpbh 03225; p.
114 Teun H田ks, Courtesy of the artist and P·P·O·W Gallery, New York; p 门5 ( le仕} ©The
Museum of Modern Art/ Licensed by SCALA/ Art Res。urce, NY; p. ’3 1 Alex Webb, Magnum
Photos; p. 135 ©The Estate of Gar叩W川。grand, C。urtesy Fraenkel Gallery, San Francisco; p.
136 Libra叩。f C。ngress LC-D1G-fsa·8b32434; p. 137 (left) C。urtesyJanet B。rden, Inc.; p. 137
(right ) c。urtesy F。leyGalle叩a New Yo巾, p. 138 Lib阳叩。fCongress; p. 139 (b。口。m) David
Alan Harvey, Magnum Ph。tos; p 1 SO Bruce Gilden, Magnum Photos; p . 15 1 Carl De Keyzer,
Magnum Ph。tos; p . 155 Lib阳叩。f Congress, American Folklife Center, p . 157 © Lee
Friedlander, Courtesy Fraenkel Galle叩a San Francisco; p 159 (top) Elliott Erwitt, Magnum
Photos; p. 159 (bottom} Courtesy Laurence Miller Galle叩, p. 16 1 (top) Libra叩。f Congress LC·
D1G·fsa·8b37302; p. 162 (b。ttom) Courtesy 。f Minneapolis Insti tute 。fAπs, C币。fthe
William R. Hibbs Family; p. 164 (top) ©The Lane Collection. Photograph Museum 。fFine
Arcs, Bost。n, pp. 164-5 (b。ttom) Ha ll mark Ph。tog阻phic Collecti町、, Hallmark Cards, Inc.,
Kansas Ci町, MO© 20 13 Katherine Anne Sinsabaugh and Elisabeth Sinsabaugh de la Cova;
p 166 Alec S。巾, Magnum Photos; p . 168 © Y,。usufKarsh, Courtesy Julie Grahame; p . 169
Arnold Newman/ Getty Images; p 170 © Richard Misrach, c。urtesy Fraenkel Gallery, San
F阳ncisco; pp. 173 Lib阳叩。fC。ngre臼 LC-USF342·001 1 67-A; p . 171 Je何Wall , Transparency ,n
lightbox 174.0 x 250.5 cm, C。urtesy of the aπist; p . 180 Library 。fC。ngress LC·USW36-950;
pp. 181, 185, 188, 200 (bottom} Ha叫Ransom Humanities Research Center, The υn阴阳cy of
Texas at Aus ti肉, p. 182 Bayerisches Nat1onalm useum Munchen; p . 183 C。urresy Amherst
College Archives and Special Collecti。ns; p . 184 Me町。pol i曰” Museum 。fAπGilman
c。llecti。,,, Gift ofThe H。ward Gilman F。undati。n, 2005; p. 186 C。urtesy of Ge。rge Eastman
House, Internat ional Museum 。fPh。tog阳phy and Film, p . 187 Library 。fCongress LC·
USW36-950; p . 188 Mecrop。l i tan Museum of Aπ Harris Brisbane Dick Fund, 194 1, p. 190
Lib阻叩。fC。ngress LC·D1G·ppmsca· 100 17; p. 19 1 Library 。fC。ngress LC-DIG·ppmsca-12557;
p. 192 (top) Lib阳叩。fC。ngress LC-USZC4·477; p . 192 (bott。m) Lib阳叩。fCongress LC·
USZ62- 103037; p 193 (top) Mecrop。I i国内 Museum 。fAπGil man Collection ,帆,rchase,
W川剧”Tal b。a Hill man Fou ndati。n G泊, 2005; p . 193 (bottom) Mecrop。lκan Museum of Arc
Warner Commu nications Purchase Fund, 1978; p. 194 (t。p) Museum of the City of New York;
p. 194 (b。ttom} Libra叩。fC。ngress LC-DIG-nclc-01455; p. 195 (top) Li brary of C。ngress LC·
D1G·fsa·8b29S16; p. 195 (b。ttom) Lib阳叩。fCongre臼 LC-USZ62·1 1 49 1 ; p. 196 (top)
Mecrop。l ican Museum 。fAπFord M。由,c。mpany c。llection, Ci丘。fFord Motor c。mpany
and John C. Waddell , 1987; p . 197 W. Eugene Smit h/ Geccy Images; p . 198 Ashley Gilberrs。n/
VII Ph。mAgency; p . 199 (top) Alfred Eisenstaed矿Geccy Images; p . 199 (bott。m) Susan
Meiselas, Magnum Photos; p. 200 (bottom} Meer。politan Museum 。fAπGilman Collecti。n,
Purchase, Mrs Walter Annenberg and The Annen berg Foundation G陡, 2005, p 20 1 (top)
Mecrop。“四” Museum 。fArt. Alfred Stieglitz Collecti。n, 1933; p. 201 (b。ttom}, 202 (top)
c。urresy Andrew Smith Galle叩, Santa Fe, NM; p 203 (top) C。Urt臼y。fthe Kepes Estate; p
203 (bottom) C。urtesy ofHattula M巾。ly-Nagy; p. 204 (top) ©The Estate of HanγCallahan,
c。urresy 。f Pace/ MacGill Galle叩; p. 204 ( bottom) Courtesy the Aaron Siskind F。undation; p.
205 © R。bert Fr毡,由a from 7百eAmeri,臼,,,, c。Urt臼Y Pace/ MacGill Gallery, New y。rk;p 206(top)
c。urresy of Cindy Sherman and Metro Pictures Gallery, New Y,。由; p. 207 © 1980 The Richard
Aved。,, Foundation; p. 208 (right )© Arcforum, Janua叩 1 979 [c。verJ; p. 208 (b。ttom)
© Egglest。n Artistic Trust C。urtesyCheim & Read, New York; p. 2 10 Science & S。ciecy Picture
Lib阻叩, p 214(b。目。m le丘} l nno吨 Art Ltd .; p . 214 (bottom center) Smithsonian American Aπ
Museum; p . 214 (boa。m right) Light W。巾,Syran』se, New York
22 8 P H OTO C R E D I TS
Jam臼 Henkel. Volume 1-7, 2004
229
lndeχ
Abbott, Beren,co, 162
aberration<, 31
ac峙free ,n均et pnnting paper, 133
Adams, An5"1, 47, 202, 204, 206, 208
Adams, Shelby Lee,’74
add山ve prima,i凹, 56, 83
Adobe see also Bndge so仕W在re,
Light<•。。m softwa«, Ph。t。shop
s。ftwa陀
Bridg•, 85
ONG con晴rtcr, 88
RGB (1998), 82, 118
Adobe Camera Raw (ACR), 85
American So白etyofM时,a
Photog,甩phtts (ASMP), 168
angl• 。fview, 32, 33, 156, 162, 170
apertu陀
bracketing and, 74
c。ntr,。I, 15
C陀at,ve uso of, 24- 25
depth 。f field and, 23, 44
exposure and, 53, 62, 64
f-st,。ps, 23
h,gh c。ntrast and, 73
and l协t, 22
maximum, 3 1
ring/button, 17
四ttings, 23
shutm speed and, 26- 27
Aperture so仕ware, 118
editing and, 108
apertu吨〈。”trol rin且, 31
ape陀U吨-priority m。de, 16, 69
Apple, 78
appl icati。”而1 ., 92
a ppr叩riat.,on 。fcopyrighted mate·
,ial, 113
Arbus, Diane, 205, 206
archival mounting materia ls, 120, 121
archiving, 86, 133
拙, photography as, 200- 207
A陀forum magazine, 208
artifoc,a l lighting, 146-147
As扭。aced Press 队的,”S
Atget, Eug占ne, 193
autochrome process, 187
autofocus,”,40,43
automatic electronic Aash, 146
automatic focus, 43
A四don, Richa
We provide professional writing services to help you score straight A’s by submitting custom written assignments that mirror your guidelines.
Get result-oriented writing and never worry about grades anymore. We follow the highest quality standards to make sure that you get perfect assignments.
Our writers have experience in dealing with papers of every educational level. You can surely rely on the expertise of our qualified professionals.
Your deadline is our threshold for success and we take it very seriously. We make sure you receive your papers before your predefined time.
Someone from our customer support team is always here to respond to your questions. So, hit us up if you have got any ambiguity or concern.
Sit back and relax while we help you out with writing your papers. We have an ultimate policy for keeping your personal and order-related details a secret.
We assure you that your document will be thoroughly checked for plagiarism and grammatical errors as we use highly authentic and licit sources.
Still reluctant about placing an order? Our 100% Moneyback Guarantee backs you up on rare occasions where you aren’t satisfied with the writing.
You don’t have to wait for an update for hours; you can track the progress of your order any time you want. We share the status after each step.
Although you can leverage our expertise for any writing task, we have a knack for creating flawless papers for the following document types.
Although you can leverage our expertise for any writing task, we have a knack for creating flawless papers for the following document types.
From brainstorming your paper's outline to perfecting its grammar, we perform every step carefully to make your paper worthy of A grade.
Hire your preferred writer anytime. Simply specify if you want your preferred expert to write your paper and we’ll make that happen.
Get an elaborate and authentic grammar check report with your work to have the grammar goodness sealed in your document.
You can purchase this feature if you want our writers to sum up your paper in the form of a concise and well-articulated summary.
You don’t have to worry about plagiarism anymore. Get a plagiarism report to certify the uniqueness of your work.
Join us for the best experience while seeking writing assistance in your college life. A good grade is all you need to boost up your academic excellence and we are all about it.
We create perfect papers according to the guidelines.
We seamlessly edit out errors from your papers.
We thoroughly read your final draft to identify errors.
Work with ultimate peace of mind because we ensure that your academic work is our responsibility and your grades are a top concern for us!
Dedication. Quality. Commitment. Punctuality
Here is what we have achieved so far. These numbers are evidence that we go the extra mile to make your college journey successful.
We have the most intuitive and minimalistic process so that you can easily place an order. Just follow a few steps to unlock success.
We understand your guidelines first before delivering any writing service. You can discuss your writing needs and we will have them evaluated by our dedicated team.
We write your papers in a standardized way. We complete your work in such a way that it turns out to be a perfect description of your guidelines.
We promise you excellent grades and academic excellence that you always longed for. Our writers stay in touch with you via email.